:'':.'':?

tMMk

¦.;-'; ' :-i

¦)<'.:.-

\am

'I. give thtft Btioki
/«• ttefoumtoig of a^CcQegt in && Colony

8LS

>TOLE«¥]MII¥EI&SIirYo • IUMBAEgy •

DIVINITY SCHOOL
TROWBRIDGE LIBRARY

THE SECOND AND THIRD EPISTLES
OF ST. PAUL TO THE CORINTHIANS

THE SECOND AND THIRD
EPISTLES OF ST. PAUL
TO THE CORINTHIANS
WITH SOME PROOFS OF THEIR
INDEPENDENCE AND MUTUAL RELATION

BY
JAMES HOUGHTON KENNEDY, D.D.
ASSISTANT LECTURER IN DIVINITY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF DUBLIN
EDITOR OF (<S. HIPPOLYTUS ON DANIEL*'
AUTHOR OF "NATURAL THEOLOGY AND MODERN THOUGHT," BEING
THE DONNELLAN LECTURES, DELIVERED BEFORE
THE UNIVERSITY OF DUBLIN, 1888-9

METHUEN & CO.
36 ESSEX STREET, W.C.
LONDON 1900

CONTENTS

PART I.
PAGE
The Date of First Corinthians . . . i

PART II.
The Identification . . ... 79
PART III.
Greek Text of Second and Third Corinthians. 163
PART IV.
English Text of Second and Third Corinthians 184

PREFACE

IN the first part of this volume I have laid before
the reader reasons which appear to me to show
that the Epistle which is known to us as i Corinthians
was not written (as is generally supposed) in the
spring of the same year in which St. Paul left
Ephesus, but about a year earlier; and that, conse
quently, it cannot be the Epistle of whose reception
by the Corinthian Church St. Paul first received news
from Titus after he had come into Macedonia. The
second part gives the proofs which have led me to
the conclusion that the Epistle with which i Corin
thians has for so long a time been wrongly identified
has not been totally lost, but that a considerable
portion of it has been preserved for us, and is to be
found in the last four chapters of the document
which appears in our Canon as 2 Corinthians. The
concluding portion of this volume will enable the
reader to see and examine for himself the result of
this theory exhibited in a concrete form.
The former of these conclusions is not unfamiliar
to modern Biblical critics ; though, I think, some of

viii SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
the arguments which I have employed in support of
it have never been published before. Many leading
theologians in England, as well as in Germany, have
publicly avowed their belief that the attempt to
identify I Corinthians with the Epistle described in
2 Corinthians ii. must be abandoned. The thesis,
however, of the latter part of this book is (at least in
this country) so novel that it must, almost of necessity,
at the outset awaken the hostility of many readers.
I shall certainly not complain of this, if it leads my
critics to examine closely and rigorously the proofs
which I have laid before them. I believe that the
theory which I advocate has nothing to fear, but
everything to hope, from the result of able and
honest criticism. I only ask that it may not be
condemned unheard.
The question at issue is not one in the examina
tion of which criticism seems foredoomed to failure
for want of" material. The personal character of
St. Paul's Epistles to the Corinthians, and the fre
quent references to current events which they con
tain, ought to supply critics with abundant material
for testing a theory which not only substitutes two
Epistles for one, and interposes between them an
interval of some months and the visit of Titus
to Corinth, but also reverses the order in which
the chapters have hitherto been placed. If the
traditional order of the text be the true order, it
is scarcely possible that so violent a disturbance of

PREFACE ix
it should not throw its allusions to recent history
into hopeless confusion and chaos.
This is a test which, in the following pages, I
have endeavoured to apply to the theory in dispute,
and it will be found that, instead of causing con
fusion, it again and again enables us to discover
order and coherence in what eminent critics have
described as " a trackless forest " ; nor does it substi
tute any fresh difficulties in the place of those
which it removes. This line of argument is not
to be confused with that which calls attention
to the sudden and violent difference of tone be
tween chapters i.-ix. and x.-xiii. There is no
conceivable explanation of the fact that the same
order of the text which confronts us with this
unexplained and perplexing change of tone should
also throw the historical references into confusion,
except the explanation that both difficulties have
been caused by the displacement of the original
order.
» There are, indeed, many independent lines of
proof which establish the same conclusion, so that
we must not only examine them one by one, but
also take account of their cumulative force. The
proofs, however, on which I lay most stress are
derived from three passages in the Epistle which
I have designated as 3 Corinthians, and which are
all found in a paragraph in which St. Paul is
avowedly speaking of the missing Epistle ; in each

x SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
of these passages he refers back to a corresponding
passage in 2 Corinthians ; and in each of the three
pairs of parallel passages the act or purpose which
in 2 Corinthians is present or future, in 3 Corinthians
is spoken of as belonging to the past.*
It was not, indeed, any of these lines of proof
which, more than a century ago, led Semler to
suggest that the canonical Epistle contained matter
which did not originally belong to it. He appears
to have regarded the contrast between the parts
as sufficient evidence for his theory, and to have
sought for no further proof. He complicated his
theory by advocating further alterations of the text,
some of which he afterwards abandoned or modified.
In fact, he divided 2 Corinthians into three epistles :
(1) 2 Corinthians i.-viii., to which he added Romans
xvi. and 2 Corinthians xiii. 1 1 to end ; (2) 2 Cor
inthians x. 1 to xiii. 11 ; (3) 2 Corinthians ix. Meyer,
in his reply to this theory, endorsed the statement of
Hug, that we might as well divide the irepi are^dpov
of Demosthenes into two orations because the first
part is calm and the second part vehement. Semler's
theory did not for a long time gain much acceptance
even in Germany, and in England it was completely
ignored ; so much was this the case that Dean Alford,
in his Introduction to 2 Corinthians, acknowledged
* The examination of these pairs of parallel passages will be found
in the chapter which is entitled "The Identification."

PREFACE xi
that he derived his information about the theory
solely from Meyer's reply to it. In process of time,
however, fresh advocates appeared in Germany ; and
in the year 1870 Professor Hausrath, of the University
of Heidelberg, published a pamphlet, entitled Der
Vier-Capitel-Brief des Paulus an die Corinther, in
which he advocated the division of 2 Corinthians
into two separate Epistles, the division being made at
the end of the ninth chapter. Hausrath went into
more detailed proof of his theory than Semler had
done ; he particularised four points of difference
which had arisen between St. Paul and the Corinthian
Church : (1) The case of the incestuous person ;
(2) Suspicions about the collection for Jerusalem ;
(3) The announcement of St. Paul's approaching
visit to Corinth and the subsequent postponement
of the visit ; (4) The controversy with the Judaising
party there. Taking these points one by one he
claimed that he could show that chapters x.-xiii.
of 2 Corinthians represent an earlier stage of the
controversy than chapters i.-ix. The treatise is
marked by acuteness and ability, but in discussing
each of the four heads Professor Hausrath frames
hypotheses about the position of things at Corinth,
and the accusations brought against the Apostle,
which do not appear to me capable of being suffi
ciently established to become the foundations of an
important theory ; and by far the most telling part
of the reply which was made by Professor Klopper

xii SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
to the theory is, in my opinion, his examination of
some of these hypotheses.
Since 1870 the question has become to some
extent an open one in Germany, but in an article
on the subject which I published in the Expositor in
September, 1897, I was obliged to admit that in
England it had as yet received very slight notice.
Commentators, when they do not ignore it altogether,
generally confine themselves to a passing reference to
Klopper's refutation of Hausrath's treatise.
A sentence in a short introduction to an unfinished
Commentary by Bishop Lightfoot, which has been
published since his death, appears to me to suggest
that that great scholar regarded the matter as one
which should not be dismissed in so summary a
manner ; for he classes both Hausrath's and Klopper's
treatises among works which " will well repay ex
amination," while at the same time he refrains from
expressing any opinion on the theory, or even stating
it. This reserved attitude, taken in connection with
his respectful mention of both the opponents, makes
it probable that he suspended his judgment on the
matter, and that, had time and strength been spared
to him, he would have further investigated a subject
which his words implied to be one that would repay
investigation. It was not by any of these writers that my own
attention was first called to the question, but by a
remark which was made in my hearing by the late

PREFACE xiii
Dr. Reichel, Bishop of Meath, to the effect that he was
convinced that there were two Epistles in 2 Corin
thians, and that the one which was written last had
been placed before the earlier one. His illness and
lamented death, which occurred a short time after
wards, deprived me of the opportunity of further
conversation on the subject ; and, though I had a
very high respect for his acuteness of mind and
profound scholarship, I was at first strongly pre
judiced against what appeared to me to be a
mutilation of the Epistle. As I examined the text,
however, proofs of various kinds appeared to multiply,
all converging to the same conclusion — that the
Epistle referred to in 2 Corinthians ii. 4 as written
e/c iroWrjs OXlxffeais /ecu avvox^s KapSlas was not our
1 Corinthians, but an Epistle whose closing portion
we possess in chapters x.-xiii. of 2 Corinthians.
When I first came to this conclusion I was un
aware that it had advocates in Germany, and I felt
so strongly the difficulty of obtaining a hearing for
it that I had no thought of publishing anything on
the subject. It occurred to me, however, that if
there were two separate Epistles, written by the
same writer, with only a short interval between them,
and referring to the same circumstances seen from
such very different standpoints, it was not improbable
that there might be some passages in which the
Epistle which was written later would refer back
either to the very phraseology of passages in the

xiv SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
earlier Epistle or to the acts or purposes spoken of,
or the thoughts or feelings which underlay the words
of those passages. It was the discovery in this way
of the pairs of parallel passages, of which I have
already spoken, which first encouraged me to ad
vocate in print the conclusions to which I had been
led ; and I eventually published articles on the sub
ject in the September and October numbers of the
Expositor, in the year 1 897.
In the interval my attention had been called to
Professor Hausrath's pamphlet by the mention of
it in Bishop Lightfoot's Notes on the Epistles of St.
Paul; for, though the bishop did not say anything
about the nature of the work, the mere mention of.
the title — Der Vier-Capitel-Brief — appeared to me
to suggest that the theory which it advocated
might be identical with my own. When I procured
the pamphlet I found that Professor Hausrath had
not gone on the same lines that I had, and that even
his conclusion was partly different from mine ; for he
believed that the four chapters were the whole of the
Epistle written by St. Paul, and that they had
probably been originally an appendix to an Epistle
written by the brethren at Ephesus in support of
him ; while my belief is that we have in these four
chapters only the concluding portion of an Epistle
of which the earlier part has perished like the Epistle
referred to in 1 Corinthians v. 9. I was, however,
encouraged by finding that, though we had travelled

PREFACE xv
by different roads, we had, in part at least, arrived at
the same conclusion.
An article from the pen of Dr. A. Robertson, in
the first volume of Clark's Dictionary of the Bible,
which appeared in 1898, marks a new departure in
the history of this controversy in England ; for in
this article Dr. Robertson fully recognises the import
ance of the question, and enters into a long and
careful discussion of it. His conclusion is that "on
the whole, as regards internal evidence, we may say
that the case for separation is not proved ; but it
would be going too far to say that it is absolutely
disproved." The argument from internal evidence, on which
Dr. Robertson appears chiefly to rely as partly dis
proving the case for the separation of the four
chapters, has increased my sense of the import
ance of the difference between Professor Hausrath's
theory and my own ; for the validity or invalidity
of this objection depends altogether on this differ
ence. The objection is thus stated by Dr. Robert
son : " The identification of these chapters with the
painful letter would seem to demand that they
should refer to the {ex hypothesi) still unsettled case
of the Offender (chapters 2, 7). But no such refer
ence can be traced; the argument for separating
x.-xiii. from the rest of the Epistle thus loses a
very strong positive factor."
This objection appears to me to tell with great

xvi SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
force against Hausrath's theory that we have in the
four chapters an entire Epistle; but against the
theory which recognises in them only the concluding
portion of an Epistle of which the earlier part has
been lost it has no weight whatever. If we had
only the latter half of i Corinthians, we should
have known nothing whatever about the incestuous
person, for it contains no mention of his case. Our
knowledge about him is derived from the fifth
chapter, and from that alone.
In 2 Corinthians the case of the Offender would
naturally be mentioned early in the Epistle. St.
Paul tells us that he referred to this matter not for
the sake of the man himself, but because of its
bearing on the feeling of the Corinthians toward
himself, and he would therefore naturally pass from
the consideration of the offence to this question.
I need scarcely add that chapters x.-xiii. are full
of the latter subject.
A still later contribution to the literature of this
question is to be found in an article in the Encyclopedia
Biblica, by Professor Sanday, which also to some
extent marks a new departure, both by what it omits
and what it contains. It omits altogether the usual
explanation that there was a rebellious minority, and
that unfavourable news may have arrived after the
ninth chapter had been finished. Not only are these
points tacitly dropped, but, after giving a sketch of
the received view of the Epistle, Professor Sanday

PREFACE

xvn

adds, with that spirit of candour which inspires
everything that he writes, " Considered quite broadly
and generally, the course of events is clear enough ;
but when we attempt to give them precision in detail
difficulties spring up at every step. The questions
which arise are also exceedingly intricate, so that to
state them satisfactorily is no easy matter. They
have nearly all been brought to light by the research
of the last five-and-twenty years."
Principal Robertson and Professor Sanday agree
in the belief that the "Painful Letter" must be
admitted to have been lost, and cannot be identified
with I Corinthians. With regard to the painful visit,
however, they differ. Dr. Robertson denies the visit ;
not indeed from the exegesis of the passages which
appear to speak of it as having been paid, for he
frankly admits that "the more obvious sense" of
these passages favours it, but because he holds that
"as a matter of fact the assumption of a visit
ev \viry does encounter hopeless obstacles, whether
we seek to place it before or after i Corinthians."
Professor Sanday, on the other hand, rightly holds
that the supposition that the second visit was only
contemplated, not paid, is excluded by 2 Corinthians
xiii. 2. He decides in favour of placing it before
1 Corinthians, and even possibly before the lost
Epistle, which preceded 1 Corinthians.
This decision, in which he is supported by
Schmiedel and other leading critics in Germany,
(2 2

xviii SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
involves the supposition of a duplication of the
conflict between St. Paul and the Corinthians; for
we learn from I Corinthians that St. Paul had only
recently learned of the dissensions at Corinth, and
of the moral offences there ; and that he had learned
them from report. This he repeats three times. If,
therefore, the visit ev \\nry were paid before this
Epistle was written, the causes of its painfulness must
have been different ; and indeed the absolute silence
concerning it in i Corinthians is generally explained
by the supposition that the matter had been so
completely disposed of in the lost Epistle, which
preceded our i Corinthians, that there was no need
to refer to it further. Then (according to this system
of chronology) came a new and more formidable
revolt, and in consequence of this state of things
the Apostle wrote the painful letter which was con
nected with the mission of Titus, and which is
supposed to have been totally lost. Then, finally,
after the second reconciliation, which resulted from
Titus' mission, came our 2 Corinthians.
If this system of chronology were correct, is it
conceivable that St. Paul, when at the close of this
long series of events he wished to enforce a warning
to those who were still rebellious, instead of connect
ing it with anything in his recent letter, or anything
which he had said during the prevalence of the late
rebellion, should pass over three letters and two
reconciliations to revive the memory of words which

PREFACE

xix

had been spoken in a controversy which to all
appearance had been long dead and buried, and to
connect his present warning with these words, as if
nothing had happened in the meantime to change
the situation, " I have warned, and I warn, as when
I was present on my second visit, so also when I
am absent now"? This appears to me to illus
trate the manner in which the many allusions to
current events in the Epistles to the Corinthians
afford formidable tests for ingeniously constructed
theories. The eminent critics who have favoured this system
of chronology were not ignorant that it involved
great difficulties and improbabilities, but considered
themselves coerced to adopt it by the same con
sideration which Dr. Robertson looked on as com
pelling him to deny the reality of the visit — i.e.
the consideration of the purpose referred to in
2 (3) Corinthians i. 15, 16. Professor Sanday speaks
of this point as having a direct and perhaps a crucial
bearing on the question. His authority confirms me
in the opinion of its importance, which before I saw
his article had led me to describe 3 Corinthians i.
12-17 as a "Test Passage," and to devote to it three
chapters (pp. 34-62). I believe that the true exegesis
of this passage furnishes us with the key of the
problem now before us.
I examined Professor Sanday's article with keen
interest, to see what arguments so eminent, acute, and

xx SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
candid a scholar could bring against the theory on
this subject which I believe to be true. I felt that
if a strong case could be made against it, I was
likely to meet with it now. Before concluding his
article Dr. Sanday has brought forward three argu
ments in opposition to the theory in question.
The first is derived from 2 Corinthians x. 10 : " His
letters, say they, are weighty and powerful " ; which
Dr. Sanday looks on as a reference to the " Painful
Letter." If this were so, it would, of course, be
a complete refutation of my theory. But why should
a description of St. Paul's letters, spoken of in
the plural number, and in which no one Epistle
is specially mentioned, be regarded as an identifica
tion ? Why should not I Corinthians and the lost
Epistle which preceded it be thus described? It
cannot be objected that if it were weighty it could
not have been lost ; for, ex hypothesi, the " Painful
Letter" must also be assumed to have been lost.
There is no reason for the assumption that the first
letter written by St. Paul to a church where he had
laboured so long as he had done at Corinth, should
be shorter or feebler than i Thessalonians ; and that
Epistle may, I think, very fairly be described as
"weighty and powerful."
Professor Sanday's second objection is as follows :
" When the Apostle wrote his painful letter, he wrote
in order to avoid the necessity of making a visit
in person (i. 23) ; but when he wrote these chapters

PREFACE xxi
he was on the point of paying a visit (xii. 14,
xiii. 1)."
In the passage referred to above, i.e. i. 23, St. Paul
is not stating the object for which he wrote, but
giving the reason for his not having come again to
Corinth : " To spare you I come no more to Corinth."
^"or his statement of the object for which he wrote
we must look a little lower down, i.e. in ii. 3 : " And I
wrote this same lest when I came I should have
sorrow." His purpose, as it is here described by
himself, was not so much to avoid paying the
Corinthians a visit, as to prevent his visit when he
paid it from being a painful one. This is the very
purpose with which in xiii. 10 he avows that he is
at that moment writing. " For this cause I write
these things when I am absent, that when I am
present I may not use sharpness." The statements
prove more than similarity, they prove absolute
identity of purpose; for "sorrow" (Xvirrjv) in ii. 3
is shown to mean the same with " sharpness " in
xiii. 10, by the words which immediately follow :
"For if I make you sorry" « yap eyw \v-ttw vfiag.*
With this xii. 14 and xiii. 1 are not inconsistent ; for
they are warnings, and warnings are given to avoid
the necessity of actual punishment.
The third objection is that there are too many
* This is one of the pairs of parallel passages which are discussed in
the body of this work.

xxii SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
coincidences of expression connecting the four
chapters with the preceding chapters to allow us
to suppose them to belong to separate Epistles.
Professor Sanday gives a few samples of the use
of these words, and rightly calls attention to Oappelv,
as it is never found in any other Epistle of St. Paul,
while it is used twice in the Four Chapters and twice
in the Nine. But how is it used? In the Four
Chapters, in one verse (x. 2) it is twice employed
in a stern and painful way to express the Apostle's
confidence against his opponents in Corinth; whereas,
not only is this meaning of the word absent from the
Nine Chapters, but the second time that it is used
there the signification is totally reversed, and, instead
of speaking of confidence "against them," he now
writes : " I rejoice therefore that in everything I have
confidence in you."
Another selected instance is ireirolBrjai's, which is
used once in the Four Chapters, twice in the Nine,
and only twice besides. This word, like Qappelv, is
employed in the Four Chapters (x. 2) with the
painful meaning of confidence against the rebels
at Corinth. In the Nine Chapters, each time that
it is used, it is used in a directly contrasted sense.
In iii. 14, after saying affectionately that the Corin
thian Church is his Epistle written in his heart, he
immediately adds : " Such confidence (ireiroldria-iv)
have through Christ toward God." In the only other
passage in which it occurs in these chapters it again

PREFACE xxiii
expresses confidence in the Corinthians (i. 15). This
is the passage in which he speaks of his confidence
that even in the past the Corinthians acknowledged
him in part*
Another word adduced is inraicori, which is used in
x. 5, where the Apostle speaks of the time when
the obedience of the Corinthians shall be fulfilled,
in a way which shows that he did not consider it
as being fulfilled at the time when he was writing.
In the Nine Chapters this word also is used in a
directly contrary way, for there (vii. 15) the Apostle
speaks of Titus as "remembering the obedience
(yiraicoriv) of you all, how with fear and trembling
ye received him." And he adds immediately : " I
rejoice therefore that in everything I have confidence
in you."
There are, no doubt, a great number of words
which appear both in the Four Chapters and in
the Nine; but a striking parallel to this is found
in the verbal links between the Epistle to the
Galatians and the Epistle to the Romans. In each
of these cases the use of the same words and
phrases seems to me to show that the Epistles
which exhibit these points of resemblance were
written about the same time, and when the mind
of the writer was full of the same subject ; but
* I have examined this passage at considerable length in the chapter
which is entitled "A Test Passage."

xxiv SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
not necessarily to prove that they must be parts
of one and the same Epistle.
One of the foremost champions of the theory
which regards 2 and 3 Corinthians as separate
Epistles is Schmiedel, who in his Hand-Commentar
has treated the subject with great learning and
ability. I differ from him, however, on several
points, in which he appears to me to have adopted
hypotheses which, having been originally constructed
to support the traditional account of the matter,
naturally fit in badly with the truer view which he
holds, and (that he may find a place for them) oblige
him to multiply rebellions and reconciliations in a
way which has , been severely criticised by his
opponents. Thus he holds that Titus was accused
of over-reaching ; and that he paid more than one
visit to organise the collection. He also places the
visit ev \1nr11 before 1 Corinthians, and he believes
that a promise to pay the Corinthians a double visit
was made to them by St. Paul, and that its abandon
ment was made a charge against him.*
On the other hand, I hold that there is not the
slightest proof of more than one rebellion or one
reconciliation. That Titus had no commission about

* The body of this work was already in type before I observed a
passage in page 79 of the Hand-Commentar, which anticipates my
point about two of the pairs of parallel passages. It does not seem
to have been noticed by any of Schmiedel's critics, as it is very short,
and the idea is not developed.

PREFACE

XXV

the collection before the time of his last visit ; and
that he was never accused (so far as we know) of
misappropriation of funds, but that his name is
brought forward in 2 Corinthians xii. 18 because he
was one of the last men whom the Corinthians would
have dreamed of suspecting, and because (for that
very reason) the mention of his name strengthened
the force of St. Paul's argument and appeal. I hold
that the reference in that passage is to an early
visit to Corinth, in which he had followed up the
missionary work which St. Paul had begun ; so
that he walked in the same spirit and in the same
steps. It was, probably, because of the influence
which he had thus acquired that he was after
wards chosen for the difficult mission which he so
skilfully carried out ; and his success in that mission
induced St. Paul to send him back to promote the
arrangements about the collection, which had probably
suffered during the time of rebellion. With regard
to St. Paul's wish to pay the Corinthians the double
visit, I think that it was felt by him at some time
between the visit ev Xvvy and the mission of Titus ;
but that it was only a wish, and never developed
into a purpose, or was made the subject of any
communication to them, till it was revealed to them
in St. Paul's last letter in order to show that they
had not been absent from his thoughts, and that he
was not e\atf>po$, but had been earnest in his desire
to come to them. Those commentators who regard

xxvi SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
it as impossible that the Apostle should have formed
such a wish during the continuance of the rebellion,
appear to have overlooked the fact that while the
rebellion still lasted, Paul boasted to Titus about the
Corinthians ; thus showing that hope was all along
mingled with his fear.
In connection with the question of the supposed
improbability that mutilated manuscripts of two
Epistles can have been joined together, Dr. Abbott
has called my attention to the fact that the ninth
and tenth Psalms are treated as one Psalm by the
LXX., while in our present Hebrew text and English
translation they are separate Psalms. We need not
here debate which of these readings is to be pre
ferred. In either case a mistake must have been
made. Either two Psalms have been joined by
some scribe, or one Psalm has been divided.* On
the other hand, Psalm cxlvii. of the Hebrew text
is divided into two by the LXX.
Professor Mahaffy has also reminded me of the
Homeric Hymns to Apollo, which in the existing
manuscripts appear as one poem, but which all
critics agree in believing to have been originally
separate hymns. He has also called my atten
tion to the Egyptian Revenue Papyrus, in which

* See Essays chiefly on the Original Texts of the Old and New
Testaments, by T. K. Abbott, b.d., litt.d., Senior Fellow Trin.
Coll., Dublin, Professor of Hebrew in the University of Dublin.

PREFACE xxvii
Mr. Grenfell has shown that the corrector desired
to fasten on a supplementary roll containing the
revised list of names, but that he made the mistake
of allowing the same chapter to appear twice, im
mediately before, and immediately after, his new
junction. The height of the papyrus, which here
changes, is (Dr. Mahaffy remarks) clearly in favour
of his hypothesis.*
In the prosecution of this enquiry my one aim
has been the ascertainment of truth. At the same
time, I am convinced that the tendency of the theory
which I believe to be true, will be more conservative
than is generally supposed. Dr. Robertson has re
marked that "to this Epistle, more than to any
other, we owe our knowledge to the true 'pectus
Paulinum' — our intimacy with the Apostle's inmost
self." Does not this give a new importance to the
theory, if it be indeed true? Is it well that our
impression of the Apostle should be falsified by
our being led to suppose that the confusion and
chaos which have been caused by the mistake of
a copyist are a reflection of his inmost self?
My best thanks are due to the two scholars whom
I have already mentioned, Rev. T. K. Abbott, Senior

* The Revenue Papyrus, edited by B. P. Grenfell, m.a., Fellow
of Queen's College, Oxford, Craven Fellow. With Introduction by
J. P. Mahaffy, d.d., Hon. d.c.l., Senior Fellow of Trinity College,
Dublin, and Honorary Fellow of Queen's College, Oxford.

xxviii SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin, and Rev. J. P.
Mahaffy, Senior Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin,
for their valuable aid in the passage of this work
through the press, and for the suggestions which
they have made.

ST. PAUL'S SECOND AND
THIRD EPISTLES TO THE
CORINTHIANS

PART I.
THE DATE OF THE FIRST EPISTLE
TO THE CORINTHIANS
THE DISPUTED JOURNEY AND THE DATE
OF FIRST CORINTHIANS
There are three passages in the Second Epistle
to the Corinthians (as it appears in our Bibles) in
which there are apparent references to a visit paid
by St Paul to Corinth at some date intermediate
between the time of his first visit to that city and
the time when these passages were written. They are
2nd Cor. ii. i,"Yiicpiva Se e/uavTip tovto, to ft-n izakiv iv
Xi/7rjy irpos v/j.a? e\6eiv: xii. 14, ISov, Tplrov tovto
eTOt/nws eyw eXdetv irpos ifias: and xiii. 1, 2, TpiTov
tovto epxofiai irpos v/xas' eiri crTO/naTO? Svo fxapTvpwv
Kai Tpiwv CTTaQricreTai Tray prj/xa. JUpoeipqica Kai irpo-
Xeya), a>? irapuiv to Sevrepov, Kai a7rwv vvv, tois
Tpori/jLapTfjKocri, Kai tois \onrols iraariv, oti eav e\0u>
els to irakiv, ov ^elarofiai. These passages have been
B

2 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
dealt with by writers in two different ways. The
earlier commentators, if they noticed them at all,
endeavoured to show that the words used in 2nd
Cor. xii. 14 and in 2nd Cor. xiii. 1, 2 did not neces
sarily imply that a second visit had actually been
paid, but only that it had been purposed ; 2nd Cor.
ii. 1 had to be explained in a different manner, and
was accordingly supposed by them to refer to St.
Paul's first visit to Corinth. Later commentators on
the other hand generally acknowledge that this mode
of explaining the passages in question is unsatis
factory, and consequently admit that there was a
visit paid to Corinth by St. Paul between the visits
mentioned in Acts xvii. and Acts xx. ; but they
endeavour to show that the date of this second visit
was earlier than that of the first Canonical Epistle to
the Corinthians.
This method, however, of dealing with the question
has not found favour with some even of the later
commentators, who, in consequence of the difficulties
which they have found in dating this second visit
before 1st Corinthians, have fallen back on the more
radical plan of denying its existence altogether.
Of these diverse methods of solution, that which
denies the intermediate visit must be considered
first ; for it is clearly the logical course to examine
the evidence for the reality of an event before
attempting to determine its date.
The order in which the three passages above cited

THE DATE OF THE FIRST EPISTLE 3
were written is one of the points in which I differ
from the traditional view. A reference to the text of
the Epistles as they are printed in this Book will show
that that which comes first in our Authorised Version
is placed after the other two and is a separate Epistle.
It would, however, be altogether premature to enter
upon the discussion of this point at present. I shall,
therefore, consider the passages without making any
assumption about their chronological order; taking
first that which is contained in 2nd Cor. xiii. 1, 2,
because it is the longest and the fullest.
This is a passage whose importance and interest
demand and repay a careful exegesis. Two ways
of translating the second verse of Chapter xiii. have
been suggested, and, if it is possible to determine
which of these is the true rendering, it is possible also
to determine whether the disputed visit was really
paid or not. Those commentators who deny the
journey render t»? by "as if," making it introduce a
fictitious supposition, and generally render ko.1 by
"though." This latter rendering indeed appears to
be a necessary consequence of the meaning given by
them to d>y; for if ko.1 were the simple copulative here,
we must either regard both the suppositions which
it connects {i.e. the presence and the absence) as
fictitious, or regard them both as real.
The alternative translation renders ws by " as " and
supposes ovtods to be omitted before Kai This is the
translation which is adopted in the text of the Revised

4 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
Version of the New Testament, "As when I was pre
sent the second time so now, being absent." The other
rendering is given by the Revisers in the margin.
We have an instance of a similar omission of
ovtoos before /cat in Galatians i. 9 — a passage which
furnishes a most striking and suggestive parallel
to this — ojy TrpoeiprjKafiev Kai apri ira\iv \eyu>.
If we confined our attention to the words ws and
Kai, either translation would be admissible. It is
the context which must decide between them.
And first I would note the writer's introduction
of the word wv. It appears from its position in the
sentence to be intended to mark a contrast in time
between the irapwv and the airwv. The probability that
he intended to mark such a time contrast becomes
stronger when we extend our view to the previous
clause " nrpoeiptjKa /cat irpoXeyw" for in this clause
we have an analogous difference in time between
two verbs, which makes them appear to correspond
respectively to the participles, irpoelpr\Ka to irapwv,
and irpoXeyw to airwv wv. Nor can it be objected
that if this were the true connection of the passage,
each participle should have been placed immediately
after its verb ; for the sentence gains in rhetorical
force by the present arrangement which places the
two warnings in juxtaposition. " I have warned
and I warn as when I was present, so also when
I am absent now."
The following clause — "tois wpoijfiapTriKocri /cat

THE DATE OF THE FIRST EPISTLE 5
to?? Xonrois iraa-iv" — continues the parallelism, the
irpo of the irporifxapTriKoa-i marking the same differ
ence of time between the pair contained in this
clause, as has been shown to exist between each
of the pairs in the previous clauses, and in the
same order. We have thus three pairs in perfect
correspondence* It will hardly be denied that the TrpoelptjKa of
xiii. 2 refers to a real occurrence, so that once the
connection between the clauses of the paragraph
is perceived, it becomes impossible any longer to
regard the corresponding participle irapwv as a
fictitious supposition. But the question has further
to be asked, " On what occasion did the Apostle
previously make the announcement ' If I come again
I will not spare'?" The supposition that this
previous warning was given in a letter or through
a messenger appears to be forbidden by the con
nection of the verb with &>? irapwv. In short the
connection between these two clauses excludes two
suppositions either of which would otherwise have
been admissible. If the irpoelpijKa stood alone it
might refer to an announcement made by letter.
If the w? irapwv stood alone it might be interpreted
of a fictitious presence. But the conjunction of the
two must refer to an announcement delivered during
* It may be noticed in passing that those who are spoken of as rols
irporjimprriKSo-i would appear to be the same persons to whom St. Paul
has just referred in xii. 21 as tuv ¦irpoTinapTriK&Tuv Kai pfy iieTavorriG&vTttiv;

6 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
a visit which was really paid by the Apostle to the
Corinthian Church.
There are other considerations which strongly
confirm this view, when we regard the passage in
its entirety ; for, if the journey in question is denied,
the tp'itov of the first verse and the SeiiTepov of the
following verse refer to the same future visit ; the
SevTepov being got by counting only real visits, the
Tphov by adding an intended visit. The latter mode
of enumerating would indeed be somewhat peculiar.
Number one is a visit; number two an intention
which was never carried out, and this is number
three. Such a mode of enumeration would have
suggested the too obvious question — "Will then
number three be like number one or like number
two? Will it be an intention which will be carried
out, or an intention which will not be carried out ? "
But once the reality of the disputed visit is acknow
ledged, the mode of enumerating becomes consistent
and intelligible throughout the paragraph. The
introduction of the word SevTepov so soon after the
mention of Tphov, instead of causing confusion, as
it would do if they both referred to the same ap
proaching visit, becomes apposite and forcible. The
whole paragraph represents an ordered progress to
a foreannounced judicial act. The Apostle had
warned the Corinthians when he was present with
them on his second visit "If I come again I will
not spare." He is now about to come again, and

THE DATE OF THE FIRST EPISTLE 7
on the eve of his third visit he reiterates the warning
which he had given on his second.
I cannot find that any critic or commentator in
England or Germany has ever attempted to suggest
a possible object to account for the introduction of
the supposition of a fictitious presence into the argu
ment, or to give an intelligible reason why St. Paul
should add to his warning the assurance that he
gives it as if he were present the second time. The
introduction of this supposition would not merely
have been objectless, it would actually have destroyed
the force of the warning which the Apostle was utter
ing with such emphasis ; for it would have made him
say that if he were already present on his coming
visit he would utter by word of mouth the identical
warning which he is sending to them by letter;
whereas he is expressly telling them that when he
visits them next he will do something altogether
different — that he will then no longer threaten but
perform. The announcement of an approaching visit had
already been made a little earlier in this Epistle
(2nd Cor. xii. 14) and in connection with a like note
of time ; there as here it is spoken of as tp'itov.
We have, however, in the earlier announcement a
variation to which much importance is attached by
those writers who deny an intermediate visit; for
here he says not as in xiii. 1, tp'itov tovto epxofnai
irpos v/mas, but ISov, Tp'nov tovto eTOi/u.ws exw eXOeiv

8 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
irpos vfjias' this addition is relied on as indicating
that the true meaning of both passages is that this
was the third time that he was ready, that he was
prepared, that he intended to set out on his journey
to Corinth.
The words eT0ip.ws e'x», however, do not of them
selves determine the matter at all ; for it is quite as
admissible to connect the tp'itov tovto with the
iXdeiv as with them ; so that we may either translate
the passage thus " Behold this is the third time that
I am in readiness to come to you," or thus " Behold
I am ready to come to you this third time."
The sentences which immediately follow may, I
think, help us to see which of these renderings gives
us the true meaning of the writer ; for in them he
informs his readers that during his coming visit he
intends to live at his own charges and to make no
demands upon their hospitality; and he reminds
them that all his delegates to them have acted in
the same way, so that this disinterested rule has been
observed throughout. In this connection a reference
to previous visits in which he had adopted the same
independent course would be pertinent and appro
priate ; but visits which had not been paid in the
body, but only in intention, could not possibly have
made demands on the hospitality of the Corinthians ;
so that it would be difficult to discover what possible
connection the mention of them could have with the
Apostle's argument in this passage.

SECOND CORINTHIANS II. 2

SECOND CORINTHIANS II. 2.
In this passage an overwhelming preponderance of
manuscript authority connects irdXiv immediately
with ev Xvirfl — to p.rj irdXiv iv Xvirfl irpos v/xas
eXOeiv. The alteration in the order of the words
which has been adopted by the Textus Receptus was
probably (as Klopper has remarked) caused by the
assumption that St. Paul had only been once at
Corinth.
""^v Whether Klopper be correct or not in his conjec
ture that the alteration of the text here was not
purely accidental, but was caused by the copyist's
belief that St. Paul had paid only one visit to Corinth
before he wrote 2nd Corinthians, there can be little
doubt that this belief has influenced the interpreta
tion given to Xvirfl by some commentators, who have
interpreted it as describing merely sorrow and de
pression of spirit which the Apostle no doubt often
experienced during the visit which is recorded in the
eighteenth chapter of the Acts. Indeed it would be
difficult to fix on any epoch in his heroic career when
he was long free from such experiences.*
The whole context however shows that Xvirtj has a
very different meaning here ; for the paragraph begins
* In this very Epistle he describes himself "as sorrowful yet always
rejoicing."

10 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
with the solemn declaration contained in the twenty-
third verse of the preceding Chapter " But I call God
for a witness upon my soul that it was to spare you
that I came not again unto Corinth " ; and in the
second verse of the second Chapter the writer shows
that he is still pursuing the same train of thought ;
for the meaning which he intended to express by the
word Xvirrj is clearly shown by the reason which he
assigns for his determination not to visit them again
in sorrow '* For if I make you sorry who is he then
that maketh me glad but he that is made sorry by
me?" These expressions show that the word Xvirt} refers
to the severity which, but for the repentance of
the Corinthians, the Apostle would have been com
pelled to exercise; and that it cannot be explained
by any trials of his own such as those which he had
to endure at the time of his first visit to Corinth.
The evidence for the intermediate visit which is
furnished by these three passages is so strong that I
_,. . believe it would long ago have been ad-
to admitting mitted by all commentators were it not
themterme- for the difficulties encountered in recon-
diate visit. ... . ... , ... ... .
cuing it with the date which tradition had
assigned to ist Corinthians. The disinclination to
admit its reality thus caused has, I think, been
strengthened by the notion that if it had really taken
place it must have been mentioned in the Acts. How
little justification there is for this notion may be seen

SECOND CORINTHIANS II. 2 11
from a passage in one of the very epistles with which
we are dealing. In the eleventh chapter of 2nd
Corinthians St. Paul tells us " Of the Jews five times
received I forty stripes save one."
Not one of these occasions is mentioned in the Acts.
" Thrice was I beaten with rods."
Only one of these scourgings is recorded — that
which took place at Philippi. And — most important
of all in its bearing on our subject — we also read
" Thrice I suffered shipwreck, a night and a day have
I been in the deep."
Not one of these shipwrecks is mentioned in the
Acts ; for, of course, the shipwreck recorded in the
27th Chapter of Acts occurred long after the date
of this Epistle.
If such thrilling incidents as shipwrecks have been
passed over without the slightest notice, we have no
right to feel any difficulty because the narrative omits
to mention a voyage of a few days on a frequented
route between two of the greatest sea-ports of the
ancient world, where large vessels were constantly
passing to and fro. St. Luke was not with St.
Paul during the latter's stay at Ephesus, so that
very little is told us of the events of those three
years till we come to the riot which took place
at their close. Not one of those plots of the Jews
which Paul speaks of in his address to the elders
of Ephesus is so much as mentioned in the direct
narrative.

Can the visit

12 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
But if this visit iv Xvirfl came between ist and 2nd
Corinthians, ist Corinthians must have been written
earlier than has hitherto been supposed, and
a further consequence is that it cannot be
be assigned ^
a date the Epistle referred to in 2nd Corinthians
earlier than ji, 4_ Accordingly an attempt is now
thians? generally made to assign to the visit in
question a date earlier than that of ist
Corinthians. We learn, however, from Galatians
iv. 13, that when St. Paul had really visited a Church
twice and had occasion afterwards to refer to one
of those visits, he specified which of them he meant,
speaking in that place of his visit as the earlier one,
to irpoTepov, whereas in ist Corinthians ii. 1 he refers
to his original visit as if it were the only one he
had paid them, /cdyw iXOwv irpos v/xag.
Furthermore, throughout this Epistle everything
is dated from this original visit. When St. Paul
praises the Corinthians, he praises them because they
remember him in all things, and hold fast the tradi
tions even as he delivered them (ist Cor. xi. 2);
and when he blames them, it is for their want of
progress since his visit ; " I fed you with milk, not
with meat, for ye were not able to bear it ; nay, not
even now are ye able." An attempt has been made
to explain away this by saying that the visit iv Xvirfl
was so short that he here ignores it ; but the change
which a painful personal meeting between the Apostle
and his converts (such as that visit plainly was) pro-

SECOND CORINTHIANS II. 2 13
duced, could not be measured merely by the number
of days that the visit lasted.
But a still stronger proof is furnished by the fact
that in ist Corinthians the Apostle in three several
passages expressly says that he derives his informa
tion, both about their party spirit and their moral
disorder, from hearsay evidence. "It hath been
signified unto me concerning you, my Brethren, by
them that are of the household of Chloe, that there
are contentions among you." Again in Chapter v. 1
he writes, " It is actually reported that there is
fornication among you"; and in xi. 18, "I hear that
divisions exist among you, and I partly believe
it." Is it conceivable that he could thus speak if he
had previously paid them a visit in which these
matters had been discussed between him and them,
face to face, so that he spoke of it as a visit iv Xvirfl,
and if he had then uttered such a threat as that
to which he refers in 2nd Corinthians xiii. 2 ?
But if there is conclusive proof that St. Paul must
have paid a visit to Corinth after he wrote our
ist Corinthians and before he wrote 2nd Corinthians
(in which, as we have seen, it is three times referred
to) it becomes necessary to abandon the attempt
to identify ist Corinthians with the Epistle which
is described in 2nd Corinthians ii. 4, and in 2nd
Corinthians vii. 8, for the whole context shows that
from the day when that letter was despatched until
Titus returned, St. Paul was in suspense and anxiety

14 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
about the way in which it would be received : when
he came to Troas after his departure from Ephesus
he was still without news (2nd Cor. ii. 12, 13); and felt
the strain which this absence of tidings caused him
so keenly that he could not avail himself of the open
door for the preaching of the gospel which he found
at Troas, but pressed on eagerly into Macedonia to
find Titus. In Macedonia the Apostle and his
messenger met at last, and he plainly tells us that
then and not till then did he receive the tidings for
which he was so anxious.
Accordingly it has been tacitly recognised by all
commentators that it would be hopeless to attempt
to intercalate a personal visit of St. Paul to Corinth
between the date of the letter referred to in 2nd
Corinthians ii. 4 and the return of Titus. It is the
recognition of the hopelessness of this solution, com
bined with the assumption that ist Corinthians is the
letter referred to in 2nd Corinthians ii. 4, which has
forced some critics to explain away the journey by
strained interpretations of the passages which speak
of it, and has obliged others to place the visit before
ist Corinthians. The proper course in such a con
dition of things is to raise the question : Are we
certain that the assumption which necessitates the
strained interpretations is true?

REFERENCES TO THE COLLECTION 15

THE DATE OF FIRST CORINTHIANS AND
THE REFERENCES TO THE COLLECTION
This course ought to suggest itself even if we had
no other evidence for the earlier date of ist Corin
thians than that which is connected with the question
of the visit ; but we have other and independent
evidence of the strongest kind in favour of this
earlier date. In 2nd Corinthians viii. 10, and also
in 2nd Corinthians ix. 2, St. Paul refers to the
Corinthian collection as having been ready a year
ago ; yet the directions given in ist Corinthians xvi.
make it plain that at that time the weekly collections
had not begun, and the Apostle there gives directions
about them as about a new thing. " But concerning
the collection for the saints as I gave order to the
Churches of Galatia, so also do ye. Upon the first
day of the week let each one of you lay by him in
store as he may be prospered, that no collections be
made when I come." This system of weekly con
tributions was admirably suited to the circumstances
of the Church of Corinth. Poor men, many of
whom were probably weekly wage earners, and some
of whom were perhaps slaves, could not give much
at once; though out of their small earning they
might put by a little every week. This would take
time, so that two or three months at the least must

16 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
elapse before they could be said to be ready. Even
if we suppose that they commenced the system of
weekly collections immediately on Titus's arrival, this
would bring the date of their readiness very near
midsummer. How then could the Apostle writing
in the autumn of the same year say that he had
been boasting of them that they were ready a year
ago? This note of time is, as we have seen, repeated
twice by St. Paul (2nd Cor. viii. 10 and 2nd Cor.
ix. 2), and if it is taken in its natural sense as de
scribing the duration of the time which had elapsed
since the Achseans could be pronounced ready, its
evidence is decisive in favour of the earlier date for
ist Corinthians which is here advocated. An attempt
has indeed been made to evade its force by main
taining that it does not necessarily imply anything
more than the fact that New Year's Day had inter
vened between the time when the Corinthians were
ready and the time when the Apostle boasted of
their readiness, and that we might use a like ex
pression in February when speaking of something
that had taken place in the previous November or
December, especially (it has been added) when as in
these places the writer's intention is to make the
most of the interval which has elapsed.
I think, on the contrary, that these would be the
very circumstances under which we should_have no
right to do anything of the kind ; and that if we did

REFERENCES TO THE COLLECTION 17
so, our hearers or readers would be disposed either
to laugh at or to resent any serious attempt on our
part to employ a purely arbitrary division of time
like New Year's Day in order to make the most of
an interval. This would be the case even now, when
all the nations of western and central Europe have
the same New Year's Day. In St. Paul's time there
would have been still less temptation to adopt this
device ; for different men had different New Year's
Days according as they used the Jewish, or one of
the Greek, or the Roman Calendar. The last-named
Calendar is never mentioned in this connection by
those writers who adopt this line of argument, and
I am not surprised at their avoidance of it ; for the
Roman Calendar puts New Year's Day on the ist
January, which would not suit their argument at all.
Yet it cannot be ignored; for St. Paul was writing
to a Roman Colony, and very possibly from another
Roman Colony.
I think that the least hopeless expedient for those
who adhere to the traditional date of ist Corinthians
is that adopted by Dr. Waite (in the Speaker's Com
mentary), who places the date of their readiness before
the date of ist Corinthians.
He writes as follows " How far the expression
' since last year ' dates back is not clear, but it points
to a time prior to the First Epistle, for ist Cor. xvi.
1, 2, 4 shows that the collection was not prospering."
I have spoken of this as perhaps the least hope-

18 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
less expedient for those who adopt the traditional
date for ist Corinthians; but I certainly cannot
say more ; for it has not an atom of foundation in
ist Corinthians xvi. St. Paul there neither asserts
nor hints that the "collection was not prospering."
He says nothing whatever of any previous pre
paredness of the Corinthians; and, of course, nothing
about his having ever boasted of them to any other
Church on that account. He gives no hint that they
might have been more forward or that there is any
danger of their unpreparedness belying the praise
which he has bestowed upon them ; though we
know from a subsequent Epistle how skilfully and
effectively he was capable of dealing with the very
situation which this hypothesis supposes to exist.
In this Epistle on the contrary there is no mention
of any previous directions on this subject given to
those to whom he is writing, but solely of directions
given to the Churches of Galatia, which are now
repeated to the Corinthian Church. The previous
preparedness of the Corinthians and their subse
quent falling off are not derived from the text, but
imported into it, the sole justification being the
difficulty of otherwise explaining the twice-repeated
words diro iripvai consistently with the late date
assigned to ist Corinthians. As for the Macedonians
to whom St. Paul is supposed to have already been
boasting about the Corinthians, they are not men
tioned as having as yet received any directions in

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 19
the matter of the collection, though they were at
the time present to St. Paul's mind, for in the very
next verse he mentions the fact that he intends to
pass through Macedonia.

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL AND THE DATE
OF FIRST CORINTHIANS
I have endeavoured to trace out two lines of
proof; that which treats of the intermediate visit
paid by St. Paul to Corinth ; and that which depends
on the twice-repeated description of the time which,
when he wrote his final Epistle to the Corinthians
from Macedonia, had already elapsed since they could
be described as ready with their contributions. These
are -perfectly independent of each other in their origin,
but both coincide in the conclusion to which they
lead, viz. that ist Corinthians was not written in
the spring of the year in which St. Paul left
Ephesus, but considerably earlier, probably in the
spring of the year before ; that he stayed at
Ephesus beyond Pentecost by reason of the great
ness of the work ; but that he paid a short visit
to Corinth (the visit iv Xvirfl) and at the close of
this visit promised or warned the Corinthians that
he would come again, or that if he came again he
would not spare.
We have now to inquire whether the notices given

20 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
to us in the Acts and in the Epistles of the plans of
travel formed by St. Paul and of the modifications
of those plans as time went on, confirm or overthrow
the conclusion which we have provisionally adopted.
We read in Acts xix. 21 that "Paul purposed in
the spirit, when he had passed through Macedonia
and Achaia, to go to Jerusalem, saying,
e orma- ^fter j have been there, I must also see
tion of the
Purpose to Rome. And having sent into Macedonia
gotojeru- two of them that ministered unto him,
xix 21) Timotheus and Erastus, he himself stayed
in Asia for a while."
The expression "Purposed in the spirit" is a
remarkable one, and seems intended to describe a
purpose formed with intense earnestness. The promi
nence which is thus given to the mention of the
formation of a particular resolve by St. Paul has not
received the attention which it appears to demand.
Professor Ramsay has* (I think rightly), claimed
for St. Luke a place among authors of history who
seize the critical events, the great crises, the great
agents, and the great movements, omitting a mass of
unimportant details ; and we have already seen inci
dentally that we have in the Acts only a very small
selection from the events of St. Paul's life which he
himself enumerates in one of his letters. When
therefore the author of the Acts makes so remark
able a departure from his usual course of chronicling
* St. Paul the Traveller and the Roman Citizen.

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 21
actions rather than purposes or feelings, he would
seem to imply that the formation of the resolve
to which he calls his reader's attention should
be regarded as one of the critical events in the
Apostle's life. Of course there are many critics
who do not take Professor Ramsay's view of the
historical insight of the author of the Acts; but,
whatever our previous opinion may be on this
point, when the historian makes such emphatic
mention of this resolve, it should not be passed
over lightly, but should be regarded as a possible
clue which may lead to a clearer understanding of
the history.
Nor have we in the first instance to engage in
any elaborate research to ascertain whether the
formation of this purpose is to be regarded as one
of the great crises in St. Paul's history. The whole
course of the events recorded from the beginning
of the twentieth chapter of Acts to the end of
the book was plainly determined by it. Nor are
we left to infer this, for it is more than once forced
on our attention by words which the writer records
as having been uttered by St. Paul himself. First
we have the solemn farewell at Miletus to the Elders
of Ephesus in which their Apostle takes leave of
them thus: "And now, behold I go bound in the
spirit unto Jerusalem, not knowing the things that
shall befall me there : save that the Holy Ghost
testifieth unto me in every city, saying that bonds

22 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
and afflictions abide me. But I hold not my life
of any account, as dear unto myself, in comparison
of accomplishing my course, and the ministry which
I received from the Lord Jesus to testify the Gospel
of the grace of God."
The words "Bound in the spirit" renew and
intensify the impression of strong overmastering
purpose which was first given by the words " Pur
posed in the spirit"; and the whole paragraph shows
how firm was the Apostle's resolve ; so that, though
he had been warned in every city that bonds and
afflictions awaited him at Jerusalem, and though
these warnings gave him a feeling of apprehension
which saddened his whole farewell and found its
fullest expression in the almost despairing words
"And now behold I know that ye all, among whom
I went about preaching the Kingdom, shall see my
face no more," yet he seems never for a moment
to have wavered in his determination to press on
towards Jerusalem.
The same combination of sorrowful apprehension
with intensity of purpose appears in his reply to
the announcement which Agabus made with such
impressive symbolism at Caesarea, and to the
unanimous entreaty of his travelling companions
and of the Christians of Caesarea that he would
not go up to Jerusalem : " What, do ye weeping and
breaking my heart ? for I am ready not to be bound
only, but also to die at Jerusalem for the name of

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 23
the Lord Jesus." We learn further that this im
movable resolve at last so impressed the whole
company that it prevented any further importunity ;
"And when he would not be persuaded, we ceased,
saying, The will of the Lord be done."
This immovable resolution to allow no dangers
from !iis enemies or entreaties of his friends to deter
him from going to one particular locality has no
parallel in the history of the Apostle as recorded
in the Acts prior to Ch. xix. v. 21 ; indeed it stands
out in sharp contrast to all the accounts which we
have of his plans and movements before the forma
tion of this resolve. Soon after his conversion his
preaching at Damascus was interrupted by per
secution, but he escaped and went elsewhere. It
was the same at Jerusalem. When the Grecian Jews
went about to kill him, the brethren brought him
down to Caesarea, and sent him forth to Tarsus.
On his first missionary journey with Barnabas
after they have reached the mainland we see them
driven from city to city. As to leaving Antioch
in Pisidia, indeed, it would appear from the narrative
that no option was left to them ; but from Iconium
their retreat was evidently a matter of precaution
when they became aware of the design of the Jews
to entreat them shamefully and to stone them. In
the second missionary journey, when he was accom
panied by Silas, the same course was followed.
When they were persecuted in one city they fled

24 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS

to another; from Philippi to Thessalonica, fron.
Thessalonica to Bercea and from Bercea to Ather
Nor may we suppose that his being driven in tais
way from Churches which he was engaged in foynd-
ing, cost St. Paul nothing ; for, in the only epistles
which we possess that were written soon iafter
his visit to one of these Churches, we fino him
writing thus to the Thessalonians : "But we,
brethren, being bereaved of you for a short jeason,
in presence, not in heart, endeavoured the more
exceedingly to see your face with great |desire :
because we would fain have come unto you, I Paul,
once and again ; and Satan hindered us."
In both these missionary journeys the plan of the
Apostle clearly was to aim at the great centes of
population, and among these centres to choose those
in which there appeared to be an open door. While
no persecution could turn him from the purpose of
his life — to work for Christ — he again and agiin was
obliged by the violence of his opponents to a ter his
plans with regard to the particular localities ill which
he had intended to work.
We find him acting in accordance with ths prin
ciple even in the case of Rome. We miglt have
conjectured that the great metropolis of the empire
would have a powerful attraction, for such a nission-
ary as St. Paul, even if he had not by his owk words
shown us that this was actually the case ; yel in the
first Chapter of his Epistle to the Romany, after

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 25
telling them how unceasingly he has prayed that
he might be prospered by the will of God to
come to them, he adds "And I would not have
you ignorant, brethren, that oftentimes I purposed
to come to you, and was hindered hitherto " ;
thus showing that the same rule applied here,
and the Apostle held himself ready to sacrifice his
purpose should the force of circumstances seem to
require it.
On the other hand, the formation of the purpose
of which we read in Acts xix. 21, appears to have
been a new departure, and from the day on which
it was definitely adopted, his design to visit Jerusalem
before proceeding to Rome seems to have been ad
hered to with the same intensity and fixedness with
which he had all along clung to his resolve to work
for the Kingdom of Christ.
It was not that St. Paul from this time forth be
came less ready to yield to entreaty or advice, more
determined to resist any modification of purposes
which he had once formed. On the contrary he
continued to show on all points, other than the resolve
to go to Jerusalem, the same willingness as before to
listen to the advice of his friends, and to allow his
plans to be altered by the force of circumstances.
During the riot at Ephesus his first wish was to
enter the theatre ; but the disciples, and some of the
Asiarchs who were his friends, advised him against
this course, and St. Paul allowed himself to be over-

26 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
ruled. Again, when he was about to sail from
Corinth to Syria, it was in some way ascertained
that a plot had been formed against him by the
Jews, (probably to murder him in the ship), and he
at once submitted to an important alteration of his
plan, going round by Macedonia instead of directly
by sea, but still towards the same fixed goal —
Jerusalem. If we inquire why this goal was now sought
with such persistency, we shall not find any expla
nation given by the Author of the Acts speaking
in his own person ; but from utterances by St.
Paul which he has recorded we may learn so
much as this — i.e. that the Apostle regarded his
journey to Jerusalem at that time as being in some
way essential to the discharge of his ministry. This
he shows clearly by words already quoted from his
address to the Ephesian Elders : " But I hold not
my life of any account, as dear unto myself, so that
I may accomplish my course, and the ministry which
I received from the Lord Jesus, to testify the Gospel
of the grace of God." What is the meaning of these
words? St. Paul's companions in travel, and the
Christians of the cities through which he passed,
did not seek to dissuade him from public preaching,
or from going to Rome, or Spain, or to any of the
cities of Europe or Asia, one only excepted. Their
prayer was confined to one point — that he would not
go up to Jerusalem. His words, therefore, must mean

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 27
that this very journey which they besought him to
forego was in some way a condition necessary to the
accomplishment of his course and the ministry which
he had received of the Lord Jesus.
If we press our inquiry further and seek to ascer
tain why the journey to Jerusalem was at this time
essential to the accomplishment of the ministry of
the Apostle of the Gentiles, we may indeed gather
from St. James's words that many of the Christians
of Jerusalem had heard an unfavourable report of
St. Paul's teaching and practice, and we may further
gather from St. Paul's subsequent action that he was
earnestly desirous of removing this unfavourable im
pression ; but we have in the Acts no mention of the
fact that the opinion formed of him in Jerusalem
had produced injurious results among the Gentile
Churches. The Author of the Acts does not appear
to have been with St. Paul during any part of the
controversy with Corinth,* and that controversy is
not once mentioned in his pages. This, however,
renders it only the more noteworthy that he does
indirectly furnish us with a most important clue, by
* The "We" (instead of "They") which denotes the presence of
the author with St. Paul does not appear in the narrative from the time
of St. Paul's first departure from Philippi after his deliverance from
prison there, to the time when he again set out from Philippi, but
in the opposite direction, on his journey to Jerusalem. We find it in
Chapter xvi. verse 17, immediately before the arrest of Paul and Silas ;
and we do not meet it again till Chapter xx. verse 5 — "These going
before tarried for us at Troas."

28 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
attending to which we can perceive the close con
nection which existed between the troubles at Corinth
and the formation of the solemn purpose which is so
remarkable a feature in the twentieth and twenty-
first chapters of the Acts. For the time at which
St. Luke places the adoption of this purpose by
St. Paul was the very time when (as we learn from
quite independent sources of information) he was in
much affliction and anguish of heart, caused by the
defection of the Corinthian Church.
The total omission by the Author of the Acts of
any mention of the Corinthian controversy makes it
most improbable that in writing Acts xix. 21 he had
any deliberate intention of showing the connection
between that controversy and the purpose to go to
Jerusalem, and suggests that the light which this
passage throws upon that connection arises simply
from the fact that it states truly the time when the
purpose was formed. I think that this consideration
is confirmed by the fact that the phrase " Purposed
in the spirit " is characteristically Pauline,* so that all
the phenomena appear to indicate that the corre
spondence which has been already noted between
the phrases "Purposed in the spirit" and "I go
bound in the spirit" in Acts xx. 22, is not to be
accounted for by supposing that Luke has placed the
latter phrase in the mouth of Paul in Acts xx. 22,
* Cf. Rom. i. 9 ; 1 Cor. v. 3, 4; vi. 20; xvi. 18; Phil. iii. 3.

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 29
but rather that Paul has supplied the former phrase
to the pen of Luke for Acts xix. 21.
The Epistle to the Romans can be shown by
internal evidence to have been written after the
occurrence of the events recorded in the nineteenth
chapter of the Acts, so that it is natural to inquire
whether it affords an opportunity of testing the
accuracy of the description given in the Acts of
the strength of St. Paul's purpose, and at the same
time of the strain and burden of spirit which
seemed to oppress him when he contemplated this
journey to Jerusalem. Nor are we disappointed
in our expectation of finding further guidance in
our inquiry; for this Epistle furnishes conclusive
proof that in neither of these points has the Author
of the Acts been guilty of the slightest exaggera
tion. And first as to the strength of the purpose to go
to Jerusalem. I have already referred to one of the
passages in the first chapter of Romans in which the
writer refers to his longing to pay a visit to Rome.
His language in this chapter shows unmistakably
how dear this plan was to his heart. In the fifteenth
Chapter he again refers to it with equal earnestness
and emphasis, and discloses to his readers the fact
that he has cherished this longing for many years.
Yet without hesitation he pushes into the back
ground this cherished project, and adds "But now
I go to Jerusalem." The strength of a purpose is

30 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
sho\vn in a very practical way by the self- denial
which it involves.
Nor does he allow us to imagine that the pleasure
of accompanying to Jerusalem those who bore the
bounty of the Gentile Churches, compensated him
for the joy which he had looked forward to in his
visit to Rome. On the contrary, he shows us in the
following verses that he not only had the gravest
apprehensions of the hostility of the multitude of un
believing Jews who would be assembled in Jerusalem
for the feast, but was also doubtful and anxious about
the way in which the offered gifts would be received
by the believing Jews. And here the strain and
burden of spirit of which there are so many traces
in St. Luke's history, appear in this Epistle in a
very striking way. The thirtieth, thirty-first and
thirty-second verses of the Chapter are such an en
treaty for intercessory prayer on his behalf as has
no parallel in the whole range of his Epistles.
" Now I beseech you, Brethren, for the Lord Jesus
Christ's sake, and for the love of the Spirit, that ye
strive together with me in your prayers to God for
me ; that I may be delivered from them which do not
believe in Judea ; and that my service which I have
for Jerusalem may be accepted of the saints; that
I may come unto you with joy by the will of God,
and may with you be refreshed." At Rome he looks
for joy and refreshment, at Jerusalem bonds and
afflictions seem to await him ; and yet he never

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 31
hesitates in the resolve that to Jerusalem he must
first go.
The result of the foregoing inquiry appears to
be that the statement contained in Acts xix. 21 is
confirmed not only by the consideration that some
thing of the kind is required to account for the
succeeding history, but also by a remarkable passage
in the Epistle to the Romans, as well as by the
apparently undesigned coincidence of the time as
signed for the formation of the purpose to go to
Jerusalem with the date of the crisis at Corinth ;
of which crisis the Author of the Acts makes no
mention. A statement which is thus confirmed
would have a strong claim to be treated as historical,
even if we had started with a prejudice against the
writer. If Acts xix. 21 be admitted to be historical it fur
nishes a new text for the question at issue about the
date of 1st Corinthians ; for one of the rival Acts xix.
theories would place the composition of V" .^ms
1 furnishes a
that epistle before, and the other would new text for
place it after the formation of St. Paul's determining
resolve. If the earlier date be the true one f „a ? °
ist Lorm-
there should be a marked contrast between thians.
ist Corinthians on the one hand, and the Epistle to
the Romans and the speeches in the Acts on the
other, both in the plans themselves and in the tone
and spirit of the utterances concerning them which
we find in these writings.

32 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
There is this marked contrast. In ist Corinthians
xvi. 3, 4 St. Paul shows that when he wrote ist
Corinthians he was hesitating between two alterna
tives, and that among these alternatives Jerusalem
held only the second place. The plan which he puts
forward first is that of sending on the delegates
with letters of introduction to Jerusalem. It does
not matter whether we suppose these letters to be
written by the Churches, or (as I incline to think)
by St. Paul. In either case, by saying " I will send
them (ire/A^lsw) he shows that he contemplates the
possibility of his not going with them himself. He
adds however, as it were by an after-thought, "Or
if it be meet for me to go also, they shall go with
me." Nor is this his only utterance on the subject
in this chapter. A little later he again shows them
that he is doubtful about the direction in which he
will travel when he shall have finally left them ; for
he says " But with you it may be that I shall abide
or even winter, that ye may set me forward on my
journey whithersoever I go."
It seems to me that between these utterances
and the later utterances of intense feeling and
immovable resolve there must have intervened a
turning-point, a mental crisis like that which appears
to be indicated in Acts xix. 21.
I touched briefly on this matter in an article in the
Expositor in October 1898, and a learned and able
biblical scholar, the Rev. Newport White, in a reply

ST. PAUL'S PLANS OF TRAVEL 33
in the following February met it by observing that
if 1st Corinthians was sent, as Mr. White believed it
to have been, with much uncertainty in the writer's
mind as to its probable effect, it was not to be
expected that St. Paul would clearly disclose all the
details of his future movements.
I agree with my critic in thinking that if ist
Corinthians were (as he supposes) the letter written
with anguish at the time of the defection of the
Corinthian Church, St. Paul would not have been
disposed to communicate to the rebels all the details
of his future movements ; but I cannot think it likely
that he would in that case judge it necessary, or
advisable, that he should seem to take them into
his confidence, and communicate to them half-formed
plans and alternatives between which he was hesitat
ing, (which is in truth a greater mark of confidence
than the communication of plans which have been
finally decided on), and that by doing so he should
convey to them an erroneous impression. If he
wished not to disclose his plans, there was a simple
and dignified way of securing this, i.e. by saying
nothing whatever about them.*
* I hope to show later on that this simple and dignified course is in
fact that which appears to have been adopted by St. Paul ; for I shall
endeavour to prove that we have in our possession the last four chapters
of the epistle which he wrote to the Corinthians ' ' out of much
affliction " ; and in these the only reference which he makes to his
future movements is a warning that if he comes again he will not
spare. He did not condescend to add any information about the
direction in which he proposed to travel when he should have finished
that stern visit. , .
D

34 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS

THE ABANDONED INTENTION
The generally accepted explanation of 2nd (3rd)
Corinthians i. 15, 16 is as follows. That the plan
there sketched out was the original plan of the
Apostle for visiting Corinth; and that before he
wrote our 1st Corinthians he had made a promise to
the Corinthian Church to pay them the visit which
is there referred to as a double benefit. That at the
time when he wrote 1st Corinthians he altered his
plan and postponed his visit in order to spare the
Corinthians ; and that by the plan which he pro
pounded in ist Corinthians xvi. he cancelled his
earlier promise. That this revocation of a promise
was made by his opponents in Corinth into an
occasion for bringing against him the charge of
lightness, and that it is against this charge of break
ing his promise that he defends himself in 2nd
Corinthians i. iv.
This interpretation has met with almost universal
acceptance, and the events which it seems to disclose
have apparently taken their place in the opinion of
most biblical scholars among the well-ascertained
facts of St. Paul's life. If we inquire into the
reason of this, we shall, I think, find that the cause

THE ABANDONED INTENTION 35
of the favour in which this interpretation is held is
the recognition by commentators of the fact that
otherwise it would be impossible, on the hypothesis
of the late date assigned to ist Corinthians, to
suggest any conceivable reason for the accusation
of lightness brought against St. Paul. According
to that hypothesis he carried out to the letter the
programme which he had sketched out in ist
Corinthians xvi. ; and, if any unreasonable persons
had attempted to deny this, they could have been
triumphantly refuted by calling attention to the
express statements of that chapter. The current
explanation of 2nd Corinthians i. 15, 16 gets over
this difficulty by making it appear that the cause
of complaint was earlier, and rested on an earlier
promise which the programme in ist Corinthians
is alleged to have superseded.
Let us now test this interpretation by looking at
the language of the passage from which it professes
to be derived.
In that passage (if we confine ourselves to the
meaning of the Greek words used by the writer)
we shall find no mention of any promise. 'E/3oi/XoV>7«'
does not mean " I promised " but " I was wishing ''
and the literal translation of the passage is "And
in this confidence I was wishing to go to you first,
that you might have a second benefit — both to pass
by you into Macedonia, and again from Macedonia
to come to you — and by you to be set forward on

36 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
my journey into Judea* Did I show lightness when
I was wishing this ? "
The simplest explanation of these words seems to
me to be, that St. Paul was telling the Corinthians
of a wish which he had cherished, and of which they
had not been told till now. In short the mention
of this wish is not the rehearsal of an accusation
which had been brought by the Corinthians, but
is the writer's answer to the accusation of iXa^pia.
'EXa<f>pla does not mean change of mind ; but rather
the lightness of character of a man who has no mind
to change, who makes a promise without any real
intention of fulfilling it, or, if he does at the time
intend to do so, forgets it almost as soon as it is
made, and never afterwards gives the matter a
second thought. St. Paul's answer to this charge
seems to be, that, while the Corinthians supposed
him to be careless about them, he was all the time
wishing and planning to visit them, if only he could
do so without having to exercise severity. Accord
ing to this interpretation he gives a clear and com
plete answer to the accusation ; but on the received
interpretation he only rehearses the objection, and
then, before he has given any answer to it, demands
* The decided mention of Judea as his goal after he should have
left Corinth seems to indicate a later stage in the Apostle's plans than
that which is disclosed in 1st Corinthians ; it may indeed be contended
that this arises from his unconsciously using phraseology derived from
his present purpose, but we have no right to make this assumption
unless we can show some proof that this was really an earlier stage. •

THE ABANDONED INTENTION 37
"Did I show lightness?" It is to be noted also
that he takes great pains to show the advantages
of this discarded plan, that he emphasises the fact
that they would have received two visits, and calls
it a double benefit. This is intelligible and is most
apposite to his purpose, if he is vindicating himself
by showing how favourable his intentions towards
them have all along been ; but if he is meeting
an accusation of having broken a particular promise,
it would indeed be a strange way of meeting it, to
dwell on the advantages which that promise would
have brought them if he had kept it. I think that
this distinction between his answer to the accusation
and the accusation itself, explains the distinction
which is evidently intended to be marked between
the words fiovXo/nevog and a fiovXevomai in the
seventeenth verse (which seems to have puzzled
some copyists so that they removed it, substituting
fiovXevofievos for /3ovX6/J.evoi). The a /3ovXevo/j.ai
refers, I think, to St. Paul's fixed determination
to visit the Corinthians as soon as possible, the
fiovXofievos to a wish which he had felt to carry
out this determination in a particular way; which
wish he now mentioned in order to show that the
determination itself had not been lightly formed
or entertained by him.
The hypothesis that St. Paul is in this passage
apologising for not having fulfilled a promise to pay
this double visit (which he is supposed to have made

38 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
some time before he wrote ist Corinthians, and to
have revoked by substituting for it the programme
which we find in that Epistle) has been received with
favour by every writer in this country (so far as I
know) who has expressed any opinion on the subject,
and it has never been subjected to the test of serious
discussion. There is however one objection to it
which is so obvious that it must have forced itself
on the attention of its warmest advocates. I allude
to the fact that, whereas in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians the
writer twice most solemnly assured his readers that
it was to spare them that he had not come again to
Corinth, and called God for a witness upon his soul
to attest the truth of what he was writing, in ist
Corinthians he had given an entirely different reason
for not going to the Corinthians at once, alleging the
importance of the work at Ephesus as the reason
why he must remain there till Pentecost. The only
explanation I have ever seen given of this dis
crepancy is that St. Paul, when he was writing ist
Corinthians, did not wish to reveal his real reason
and therefore substituted another.
This is the second time that we have met with a
reply of this kind. I think it cannot have occurred
to some writers on these epistles to notice how often
they have been obliged to adopt this expedient in the
interests of a particular theory, in order to escape the
force of statements of St. Paul which would other
wise have shattered their theory. The difficulty here

THE ABANDONED INTENTION 39
is, however, a double one and the latter part has
never been noticed. It is not only that they re
present St. Paul as having given in ist Corinthians
a reason which was not his real one, when he need
not have mentioned any reason at all ; but also in
2nd (3rd) Corinthians, where he takes such pains to
assure his readers what his real reason was, he seems
(according to their theory) to have forgotten that he
had lately given to those same readers an entirely
different reason, one which had no reference to their
interests, but to the interest of the work at Ephesus ;
and that this required some explanation. If he had
really acted thus, he would have put a dangerous
weapon into the hands of any of the Corinthians
who might feel disposed to charge him with in
sincerity and double-dealing.
I think that the advocates of this theory un
consciously do almost as much injustice to St. Paul's
diplomacy and powers of memory as they do to
his straightforwardness. I believe that the language
which he uses in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians about this
subject shows that he retained clearly in his mind
the words of the utterance to which he was referring ;
and that that utterance was none other than the
announcement which he had made when he was
leaving Corinth at the close of the visit iv Xvirfl that
if he came again he would not spare.
I would ask the reader particularly to notice
two points in that short announcement. Firstly the

40 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
suggestion of a repetition of the visit (idv eXdw etc to
irdXiv) ; and secondly the question of sparing or not
sparing. " If I come again I will not spare (ov
<j>e'iaop.ai)." Both these points are taken up in each
of the passages in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians in which
St. Paul vindicates himself from the charge of having
made his announcement lightly. We have them
both in 2nd (3rd) Cor. i. 23. "To spare you
(<j>eiS6p.evos) I came not again (ovksti) unto Corinth."
We have them again in 2nd (3rd) Cor. ii. 1. "And
I determined this for myself that I would not come
unto you again (firj irdXiv) with sorrow." The phrase
p.rj vdXiv iv Xvirfl is shown by the words which im
mediately follow it, to express in a most character
istic and delicate way his determination to spare
them ; for he adds, " For if I make you sorry (el yap
eyco Xvirw vfidi)."
This point will be discussed more fully later on, for
it has far-reaching consequences which belong to a
later stage of this inquiry, and affect more than the
date of ist Corinthians.
It may, however, seem to some readers that in
spite of the remarkable appearance of correspond
ence between the words in which St. Paul here
explains the non-fulfilment of a previous announce
ment and the words which he had uttered at the
close of his visit to Corinth, there is still an ante
cedent improbability that that utterance can really
be the one whose non-fulfilment he is explaining,

THE ABANDONED INTENTION 41
as it was a threat rather than a promise and the
Corinthians themselves would scarcely have wished
it to be carried out to the letter. This objection
may derive increased plausibility from the fact that
the general and long acceptance of the hypothesis
which I have been criticising has familiarised men's
minds with the notion that the Apostle is in these
two passages apologising for not having carried out
a promise to pay a double visit to the fulfilment of
which the Corinthians had looked forward with
pleasure. I think, however, that a very little consideration
ought to show us that it is far from being the case
that the non-fulfilment of a threat might not need
explanation, and that on the contrary, the suggestion
that St Paul had endeavoured to intimidate the
Corinthians by announcing a visit which he had
no real intention of paying, might furnish material
for an accusation more envenomed and more mis
chievous in its effects on the minds of the Christians
at Corinth than would be furnished by the delay
of a pastoral visit because he was detained by his
work elsewhere.
Why then, it may be asked, does he endeavour
to refute the accusation of "lightness" by making
known to the Corinthians a wish which he had
cherished to pay them two visits which he evidently
hoped would be pleasant visits ?
I think the true explanation of this is to be found

42 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
in the fact that after the reconciliation of the
Corinthian Church St. Paul shows on his part a
loving desire to avoid saying anything which would
needlessly wound their feelings now that they had
renounced their rebellion. From beginning to end
of these nine Chapters we shall not find a single
instance of the use of the words " punishment " or
"severity" in connection with his purposes towards
the Corinthians, even when he is referring to the
time of their defection ; though he uses one of these
words in speaking of the punishment which they
themselves had inflicted upon an offender. We have
already seen how he substituted the word "sorrow"
for " severity" in Chapter ii. i. Nor was it necessary
here to infringe this self-imposed rule. He might
indeed have met the charge of lightness by speaking
of the earnestness with which he had purposed to
punish them. But he might meet it quite as
effectively by dwelling not on those moments when
he had almost made up his mind that he must not
spare ; but rather on those other moments which
alternated with them, when, in the confidence that
they did partly (diro /xepovs) acknowledge him even
then, he had cherished the hope which he now made
known to them.

A TEST PASSAGE 43

A TEST PASSAGE SECOND (THIRD)
CORINTHIANS I. 13-16
The difference between the explanation which
I have now laid before the reader, and that which
will be found in most commentaries, is connected
with a fundamental difference of interpretation of
the passage 2nd (3rd) Cor. i. 13-16. The divergence
is here so complete and extends to so many points
in these three verses, that the passage seems to afford
a valuable opportunity of bringing the rival interpret
ations to a decisive test.
The first of these verses is always rendered " For
we write none other things unto you than what
ye read or even acknowledge " : and these words
are thus commented on in the introduction to this
Epistle in the Speaker's Commentary. "But his
purpose was also declared by letter; for in 2nd Cor.
i. 13, where he repels the charge of deliberate
equivocation with regard to this promised visit, he
says : ' We write* none other things except what
ye read' It was then in the missing letter that he
gave the first written notice of this third visit. It
could not have been in the First Canonical Epistle,
for the plan of his journey there stated is not the
* The italics are in the Speaker's Commentary.

44 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
one first entertained." This verse then is held to
deal with his first plan ; and the acknowledgment
spoken of in the words which follow in the same
verse is referred back to the same comparatively
early date. In the words of the learned comment
ator whom I have already quoted, " It is a reminder
of a former and happier state of things which he
desires to see restored." This is the interpretation
of the verse generally adopted by commentators ;
but the next verse (the 14th) they refer with
equal unanimity to the reconciliation brought about
by Titus's mission for which St. Paul expresses such
deep thankfulness in the seventh chapter. This verse
is supposed to prove by the words dirb p-epovs that
the reconciliation was only partial after all.
Then in the fifteenth and sixteenth verses the
Apostle is supposed to go back again to the subject
of the original promise which had been made before
he wrote ist Corinthians and had been finally can
celled at the date of that epistle.
In criticising this interpretation I am not person
ally criticising the able and learned writer whose
words I have quoted. His views, as I have already
remarked, are those generally adopted by com
mentators ; and I have quoted him as a prominent
exponent of an interpretation which is almost
universally received.
According to this interpretation, then, the thirteenth
verse speaks of a former and happier state of things

A TEST PASSAGE 45
which had existed before ist Corinthians was written,
and of the original promise which had then been
made ; but in the very next verse the argument
suddenly moves forward to the time of Titus's visit,
and there is absolutely nothing to mark this im
portant change of date, except a most contradictory
indication in a change from the present tense to the
aorist. The writer is supposed to speak of past
events when he uses the present tense, and of the
present when he uses the past. But this is nothing
to what follows ; for in the fifteenth verse we have,
if we attend to the consecutive order of the text
of the Epistle, the plan of the double visit attributed
by St. Paul to his confidence in the partial acknow
ledgment of which he had spoken in the verse
immediately before; yet that partial acknowledg
ment is supposed to have been the result of Titus's
mission, and the plan is supposed to have been not
only formed, but finally abandoned, before Titus was
sent on his mission at all. The only possible ex
pedient for avoiding this startling conclusion, is to
skip arbitrarily over the fourteenth verse, and connect
the fifteenth verse, which is in the past tense, not
with the verse immediately before it which is also in
the past tense, but with the penultimate verse, which
is in the present tense.
Talleyrand is reported to have said of the Duke
of Wellington that he spoke French "with great
courage," and it is impossible to refuse a like meed

46 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
of applause to this exegesis. Still I am not sur
prised that this Epistle, after having been subjected
to treatment of this kind, should be described by a
learned writer as " a trackless forest."
I do not think that the task of discovering a track
through this portion of the Epistle is very difficult, if
we allow our interpretation to be guided by the notes
of time which the writer has given to us in the tenses
which he has employed. The paragraph begins with
the twelfth verse in which St. Paul explains his boast
ing (17 /cai;'x>?o-tc fifuwv avrri).* This is often interpreted
as if St. Paul were telling the Corinthians what he
glories in ; but when he wants to express this idea

* I agree with Meyer in holding that aSnj is to be taken with
ri Kaixrla'ls 7K and that rb iux.pripi.ov k.t.X. is the predicate which
is introduced by iarl, and that Sn k.t.\. is the content of the testi
mony. In confirmation of this view Meyer adduces I Cor. viii. 9 :
i) i^omla ifiup avri). To this I would add that the demonstrative
pronoun is so closely followed by the neuter noun t6 papripiov that, if
it were the predicate here, we should expect tovto instead of aihri. In
iii. 6 we have also tf iirinfila avrni corresponding to it Kaixqvis iifi&v avri)
here. Another passage which I would refer to is 2 Corinthians xi. 10,
where we have the actual phrase, t) KaixtGis aBrij — r] naixqais aiiTi]
oi ippay/jo-eTM els i)i.e iv tois Khljiaai Tr\s 'Arenas. I doubt if there is
any other sentence in this Epistle which would cause the Corinthians so
much pain as this, or which would be more likely to be touched on in
the communication which they seem to have made to St. Paul through
Titus. In this light the occurrence of the same phrase, 7) navxyo-Ls
aflnj, in 2 Corinthians xi. 10 and in 3 Corinthians i. 12, becomes very
significant, and seems to indicate that in the latter passage St. Paul
was explaining to the Corinthians that the assertion which had wounded
their feelings was a defence of his own integrity and purity of motive,
and was not intended as a slight to them.

A TEST PASSAGE 47
in the fourteenth verse he correctly employs the
word KavxWG which seems to show that he uses
Kavxw^s here in its proper sense, which, as Meyer*
rightly observes, is not materies gloriandi, but
gloriatio, the act of boasting. Nor need we depart
from the correct sense of this word in order to
obtain an intelligible meaning for the passage.
In two other passages in this Epistle the writer
employs language which appears to indicate that
in some previous communication he has commended
himself. I refer to Chapter iii. 1, where the question
" Do we begin again to commend ourselves ? " seems
to imply that the- Apostle has been commending
himself, but is not going to do so again ; and to
verse 12, where the assurance which in the former
passage was implied by the form of the question
is more expressly made in the words " We commend
not ourselves again unto you." The occurrence of the
word " again " (irdXiv) in both these passages appears
to indicate that the writer has commended himself
on some former occasion, though he is not going to
repeat it.
These two passages, I think, give us the true clue
to the meaning of Chapter i. verse 12, in which
St. Paul explains his self-commendation (% /cau'x>7<™s)
and maintains that it is simply a vindication of

* Meyer supposes that the boasting is contained in the eleventh
verse of the first chapter of 2nd Corinthians.

48 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
the disinterestedness and honesty which have
characterised his work and ministry in the world
and especially among them. As a proof of this he
appeals to their own consciousness that he has said
nothing which they do not themselves acknowledge,
which they would not themselves say for him. He
speaks of this acknowledgment of himself by the
Corinthian Christians without adding any qualifying
or limiting phrase so long as he speaks in the
present tense. He hopes also that they will thus
acknowledge him to the end, and here again he
speaks absolutely. It is very significant that it is
only when the tense changes to the aorist in the
fourteenth verse, that the limitation, diro fiepovs,
makes its appearance. The mention of the present
and the future seems to have suggested to him the
thought of their attitude in the past. Can he say
that they acknowledged him in that time of painful
misunderstanding ? He feels that to some extent he
can even do this; but truth forbids him to speak
any longer without qualification, and he therefore
adds "As also (or 'even') ye did acknowledge
me in part." The aorist, I need scarcely remind
my readers, does not carry on the action or state
to the present time, as the perfect does.
The word /cat appears intended to emphasise the
statement made in the fourteenth verse, and to mark
it as being a real addition to what has been said
in the verse that goes before it ; yet if we neglect

A TEST PASSAGE 49
the change of tense, it becomes difficult to see how
the strictly qualified and limited assertion which he
now makes can add anything to the stronger state
ment which has preceded it. The change to the
aorist explains the meaning of the writer's insertion
of the /cat, for it shows that he is making an im
portant addition to what he has already said. He is
now asserting that even in the past they did partly
acknowledge him.
The paragraph began with the word Kavxws and
the keynote of the concluding sentence in it is the
cognate word Kavxifia indicating that the Kavxw-i has
been the subject all through. This concluding state
ment gives the substance of all the acknowledgments,
of the present, and of the future, and of the partial
acknowledgment in the past. The connecting link
between it and the kovxw^ °f the twelfth verse is
the assertion in the thirteenth verse that everything
which he has said in self-commendation they would
say for him ; to which thought he gives final ex
pression in the declaration that he is their boast as
they are his in the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.
Then, in the fifteenth verse, he begins a new
subject and tells them that in the confidence which
he felt in this more hopeful view of their feelings
towards him he cherished for some time (i/3ovX6/j.r]v)
the wish to pay them a two-fold visit, of which he
informs them in that verse. That before the re
conciliation he sometimes took this comparatively

SO SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
favourable view of their attachment to him may
also be learned from the fourteenth verse of the
seventh chapter, which shows that he had boasted
of them to Titus when he was sending him on his
mission. This boasting was indeed justified by
the event, for the account which we have of the
Corinthians' reception of Titus seems to show that
before his arrival they were partly at least pre
pared for submission. Konig* has remarked that
St. Paul's visit, and departure, and departing warn
ing may have produced more impression than he
himself at the time was aware of.
Schmiedel in his comments on this passagef has
noticed the apparent incongruity of the introduction
of a detail like the supposed reference to the plan
of a double visit in the midst of the wide and
general statement which the writer is making in
the twelfth verse ; and has also remarked that it is
a very insufficient proof of that general statement,
(though, for a reason which I shall presently notice,
he considers that he is obliged to adopt this inter
pretation of the sentence). I may add that the
words thus interpreted would be an equally in
sufficient answer to the specific accusation to which
they are supposed to be a reply. If St. Paul were
charged with non-fulfilment of a specific promise,
* Zeitschrift fur Wissenschaftliche Theologie, October, 1897.
t Hand-Commentar zum Neuen Testament, Zweiter Band, Erste
Abtheilung, S. 213.

A TEST PASSAGE 51
it would be no answer to say " We write none other
things unto you than what you read," when the
gist of the objection is supposed to be, that he did
not keep the promise which he wrote and they read.
I may be told that I have no right to assume
that St. Paul must have given an adequate answer
to any objection. I should admit the force of this, if
the objection were actually found in the text. But I
maintain that when commentators construct a hypo
thetical objection to account for a sentence in the
text, which is supposed to be a reply to it; the
hypothesis loses its raison d'itre if it can be shown
that the sentence in question would not be any
answer to it at all.

52 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS

INTERPRETATION OF "'AvayivuxTKere" IN SECOND
(THIRD) CORINTHIANS I. 13 ;
AND OF "'Ava.yivoxTKOiJ.evr]" IN III. 2
Before the time of Pindar the most usual meaning
of dvayivwcrKW or aeaytyvcocr/ceo was, to know again,
to recognise, to acknowledge. Pindar is the first
writer who is known to have given it the signification
" to read " ; (ypd/n/xaTa being understood) ; but this
sense is from his time the most frequent in Attic
Greek ; and of course from the nature of the case
prevailed especially in literary circles. The old
meaning did not at once die out but remained side
by side with the later technical sense. From the
nature of the case this older use would continue
longest among non-literary populations whose mother
tongue was Greek. There indeed it would naturally
be the predominant use, long after the literary mean
ing had become the prevalent one in books. The
word is used by St. Paul in 2nd (3rd) Cor. iii. 15
to express this later meaning " to read " ; and, by
the unanimous consent of all commentators, it is
supposed to be employed in the same sense here.
The ancient meaning of dvayivwo-Kere in this
passage, however, was adopted by the Peshito,

MEANING OF ANAITNfiSKOMENH 53
which renders the word by yod'in. This is a sig
nificant fact, and it is strange that it has attracted
so little attention. If the earlier meaning of
dvayivwo-Keiv was sufficiently prevalent in the second
century to be familiar to the writers who made this
translation, so that they believed it to be the sense
in which St. Paul used the word here, it is probable
that it was at least equally prevalent when St. Paul
wrote the passage, a century earlier.*
I have never seen a satisfactory explanation of
the words " We write none other things unto you
than what you read." It certainly cannot mean
" I write none other things than what you read in the
pages of other writers " ; for St. Paul is one of the
last authors of whom this could be said. Alford's
* Dr. Abbott has called my attention to the fact that the Prayer of
Manasses, as edited by Robert Stephens from the Victorian manuscript,
has avayiviio-Kia in a. passage in which it must mean " acknowledge " :
T)/idpT7iKa, Kvpie, THiAprqica, xal ras avofilas fiov avayuithaKu. The
Alexandrine manuscript of the Prayer, indeed, has iyii ytviio-Koj ; but
iyii could not be emphatic here, and there is therefore no reason why
it should be expressed. The Latin translation which is appended to
the Vulgate has agnosco here, which appears to represent avayiviiaxia,
rather than fy&i yivibaKu. The translator of the Latin version in the
Complutensian Polyglot had iyi> yivtlio-Kta before him in the Greek,,
and he rendered it by ego cognosco. "Etyii yivdio-KW was probably a
conjectural emendation for avayivtbo-Kta. But if it be objected that we
may, on the contrary, regard avayiviiaKw as a conjectural emendation,
and iyi> yiviio-Kta as the original text, this would not greatly affect the
argument, for in that case it would appear that the scribe who made
the emendation must have been familiar with the earlier meaning of
avayiviiaKw. In its later meaning it would be utterly unintelligible
here.

54 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
explanation is as follows. "My character in my
writings is one and the same, not fickle and changing,
but such as past facts have substantiated it to be,
and as I hope future facts to the end of my life will
continue to do." The interpretation given in the
Speaker's Commentary is not unlike this. " He re
asserts his sincerity," for " it is not true that his
letters have any other sense than that which presents
itself on the simple reading, or any at variance with
what they well knew of him personally." Klopper
in his commentary gives a somewhat similar para
phrase of the passage.*
These explanations agree with each other in seek
ing to find an intelligible meaning for the words in
question by representing them as making some as
sertion about the character of St. Paul's writings —
their consistency or their clearness of meaning —
rather than about any action, mental or otherwise,
of the Corinthians. This might be a possible ex
planation if the sentence ended with the word dvayi-
vwo-KeTe; but, as it is, the context excludes it. The
relative (a) is governed not only by avayivwa-KeTe
but also by a series of verbs, which are joined by
* " Wir machen euch brieflich keine anderen Mittheilungen als solche
die sich sofort beim Lesen als das herausstellen, was der Wortlaut
besagt, oder von denen Ihr etwa durch Vergleichung mit meiner
sonstigen Sinnes - Denk - und Handlungsweise die Ueberzeugung
gewinnt, das sie der adaquate Ausdruck meines innersten Bewusstseins
sind." — Kommentar tiber das zweite Sendschreiben des Apostel Paulus
auf die Korinther, S. 133.

MEANING OF ANAiTNflSKOMENH 55
conjunctions to avayivwuKere and to each other.
Each of these verbs is in the second person plural,
and makes some emphatic assertion about the agency,
or mental state, of those whom the writer is address
ing, and about that alone. " I write none other things
unto you than what ye ... or even acknowledge, and
I hope will acknowledge to the end." Whatever
may be the character of the action which St. Paul is
ascribing to the Corinthians in the verb which is to
fill the place which I have left blank, its close con
nection with the other verbs shows that he is ascribing
something to them, and is not merely making an
assertion about the character of his own writings.
The words % Kai which connect the dvayivwa-KeTe
with the iiriyivwa-KeTe show that the writer regards
the latter of these verbs as standing to the former in
the relation of a stronger to a weaker assertion, and
that therefore, as used by him, they must be suffici
ently akin to be capable of being compared in this
way. Now, reading and acknowledging are not thus
akin. They are not, and cannot be, related to each
other as a weaker and stronger assertion. We may
read with the most intense approval and belief, or
with an equally intense disbelief, or in a state of mind
which wavers between the two. We might therefore
search the whole range either of English (or Greek)
literature in vain for such an expression as " reading
or even acknowledging." " Reading and acknowledg
ing '' would be the phrase invariably employed. Nor

56 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
is this the only consideration which suggests that the
words must be thus related to each other. I do not
think any commentator has ever called attention to
the fact that the basis x>f each of these words is the
same simple verb; and that they differ from each
other only in the prefix. These are facts which
appear to be inexplicable under the received inter
pretation. I have never seen even an attempt made
to explain them. If, however, we adopt the older
meaning of dvayivwarKeTe they at once become in
telligible and significant ; and the whole passage is
seen to have a clear and connected meaning.
According to this interpretation the two words are
intended to express different degrees of assent. We
might endeavour to preserve the combination of the
same verbal root with varying suffixes by rendering
the sentence "We write none other things unto you
than those to which you assent or even consent";
but, as the writer evidently regards the latter word as
denoting a stronger and more active form of acknow
ledgment, we may perhaps better express the contrast
of meaning thus — "For we write none other things
unto you than what you admit or even maintain, and
I hope will maintain unto the end, as also ye even
did in the past partly maintain of us that we are
your boast."
The use of the stronger term in speaking of the
partial acknowledgment, need create no surprise ;
for its force is sufficiently limited by the words 071-6

MEANING OF ANAlTNftSKOMENH 57
fiipovs- To have reverted to the weaker term, in
addition to inserting this limiting phrase, would have
been needlessly depreciatory; and would therefore
have been at variance with the writer's evident desire
to speak as favourably as truth would permit.
Schmiedel has recognised more fully than other
commentators the confusion which the current
interpretation brings into this verse ; and he has
alluded to the older meaning of dvayivwtrKeiv in such
a way as to suggest that it may for a moment have
presented itself to him as a possible solution of the
difficulty. He rejects the solution, however, on the
ground that in the New Testament dvayivwa-Keiv
always signifies "to read." Meyer also (though
he notices the fact that the Peshito in this place
does not translate dvayivwa-KeTe in this way) confi
dently asserts that in the New Testament the word
invariably has this meaning.
I think that this has been too hastily laid down
as a canon of New Testament interpretation ; and
that there is another passage in this very Epistle
which should have been carefully examined before
this rule was so dogmatically laid down. In Ch. iii.
2, 3, in what is evidently intended to be a connected
statement, dvayivwa-Koixevri is placed between two
other participles, the connection between which is
broken by it, if we translate it " read " ; but is at
once restored if we give it its older meaning
" acknowledged." The first of these participles
e 2

58 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
describes the Corinthian Church as being known by
all men to be the Epistle of Christ; the third as being
made manifest to be so ; the interpolation between
these two assertions of the statement that they were
read by all men introduces a new idea, and interrupts
in a most confusing way the connection between the
yivw<TKop.ivri and the <pavepovp.evoi. If on the other
hand we assign to dvayivwa-KOfj-evr) its older meaning
it will be at once seen to harmonise with the other
two, and complete the sense ; so that the passage
becomes one clear and connected statement. They
were an Epistle of Christ known, and acknowledged
by all men, because they were manifested to all men
as being so.
Though the disturbance of the connection of this
passage, to which I have endeavoured to call atten
tion, has been passed over by all commentators in
silence ; there is another point which has not been
altogether unnoticed by them. I refer to the
strangeness of the phrase, "Known and read"; its
reversal of what seems to be the natural order —
" Read and known." Meyer quotes with approval
Grotius's explanation " Prius agnoscitur manus deinde
legitur epistola." " First the hand of the writer is
recognised, afterwards the letter is read."
This holds good for letters written on paper or
parchment, but not for Epistles like those of which
St. Paul is speaking. Here the world may conclude
from the outward life and conversation that the

MEANING OF ANAITNQSKOMENH 59
Spirit has been writing within ; but the fleshy
tables of the heart on which the Spirit writes are
not open to the eye of man and cannot be read
by him.
This second difficulty, like the first, completely
disappears the moment the older meaning of
dvayivwcrKoixevri is adopted here. In the phrase
" Known and acknowledged " the words are at once
seen to be in an order which is as natural and
appropriate, as " Known and read " is inappropriate.
St. Paul before the date of this Epistle had lived
and worked for two years in Achaia, and had also
spent some time alone at Athens, where there were
very few Jews. In these places he must have been
brought into intimate contact with men who might,
in his own phraseology, be described as " Greeks of
the Greeks " ; and even if we were able to suppose
that he had never previously learned the older
meaning of dvayivwo-Kw he was not unlikely to meet
with it there. For, from the nature of the Religion
which he taught, the idea of the acknowledgment of
truths, and of persons, was one which would recur
again and again in the conversations which he held
with those about him. A mind like his could not
fail to be interested by what he would at once
perceive to be the etymological meaning of the
word. Every reader of his Epistles knows how
often he was wont to illustrate what he had to
say by a play on the various meanings of the

60 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
words which he used ; and it would therefore have
been strange if he had not noted this meaning for
possible future use. It is significant that on each
of the two occasions on which he uses dvayivwerKto
in its etymological sense, he specially calls attention
to its etymology by placing it side by side — first
with the simple verb from which it is derived, and
on the second occasion, with the kindred verb
iiriyivwcTKw. On the other hand, when he uses the
word in its technical sense, he never calls attention
to its etymology.
I think we may also observe that, according to this
hypothesis, St. Paul is consistent in his observance
of the distinction of weaker and stronger which he
draws between dvayivwa-Kw and iiriyivwa-Kw by his use
of the word tj koI before the latter verb in Chap. i. 1 3.
In 1 Cor. xvi. 18 he urges the Corinthians loyally to
acknowledge those who had shown special liberality ;
and he there of course uses the word iiriyivdxrKere ;
but in 2nd (3rd) Cor. iii. 2 he is speaking of the
outside world, (or of other Churches) who were
obliged, by facts which they could not escape noticing,
to recognise the Corinthian Church as the Epistle
of Christ. Here the notion of active, loyal acknow
ledgment would plainly be quite out of place; so
that iiriyivw(TKOfJi.ev>] would be too strong an expres
sion ; and he is, therefore, only acting in accordance
with his own rule when he substitutes dvayivwa-KOfxevri
as having a weaker and more passive meaning.

THE PLAN OF TRAVEL 61

AGREEMENT OF THE PLAN OF TRAVEL
SKETCHED IN FIRST CORINTHIANS XVI. WITH
THAT WHICH WAS FINALLY ADOPTED
I think that the agreement of the plan mentioned
in I Cor. xvi. with that which was finally adopted,
has weight with many minds, and is supposed to be
an important confirmation of the later date of the
formation of this plan. It might fairly be thus
regarded if there were several routes from Ephesus
to Corinth ; but, as Schmiedel has observed,* there
were only two — one by sea, the other through
Macedonia — so that, if St. Paul had changed his
plan more than once, then he must of necessity
in every change he made fall back on' one or
other of his old plans. Under these circumstances
the coincidence of a plan with the course which
was actually followed afterwards is a very insufficient
proof of the date at which it was first sketched out.
This coincidence however would have gone some
way towards giving a primd facie probability to the
later date for this Epistle were it not for the fact
that when St. Paul was writing from Macedonia
* Hand-commentar.

62 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
only a few months after this later date, he alluded
to a charge of lightness which had been brought
against him, and in replying to it did not deny that
he had delayed his visit; whereas if ist Corinthians
was written in the spring of the same year he was
carrying out its programme without any delay. We
have already seen that in his reply to the charge
he did not so much as mention the programme of
ist Corinthians, while he twice referred to the words
which he had addressed to the Corinthians when he
was leaving Corinth.

ST. PAUL'S DESCRIPTION 63

DESCRIPTION IN THE EPISTLE WHICH WAS
WRITTEN FROM MACEDONIA TO THE
CORINTHIANS OF THE LAST EPISTLE SENT
TO THEM BY THE SAME WRITER
The Epistle which was written from Macedonia
furnishes us with four marks for the identification
of the Epistle which had been sent immediately
before it. If these marks are to be found in ist
Corinthians, this circumstance may legitimately be
regarded as a strong proof that it is the Epistle in
question, and may be set against the proofs of its
earlier date to which I have already called attention.
This is a correspondence which may reasonably be
expected between two Epistles written with so short
an interval of time between them.
The first of these notes of identification is given
to us in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians ii. 4, where the writer
says " Out of much affliction and anguish of heart
I wrote unto you with many tears." Emotions so
intense disturbing the mind of the writer could not
but leave their traces in the Epistle which was written
under their influence.

64 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
To this note of identification I maintain that ist
Corinthians answers very imperfectly indeed. In the
fourth verse of the first Chapter its author, after his
opening salutation, gives utterance to an earnest
thanksgiving which is continued for six verses. He
goes on afterwards to speak' 6f the party spirit, and
of the grave disorders of the existence of which he
has been informed, but in doing this he shows no
traces of despondency or anguish of mind. In the
midst of the portion of the Epistle which relates
to these matters he turns aside to answer queries
which his correspondents have addressed to him,
and takes these up point by point, in a calm and
business-like manner, apparently with their letter
lying open before him. He begins the seventh
Chapter with the words "But concerning the things
about which you wrote me" (irepi Se u>v iypdtyaTe)
and proceeds at some length to discuss an important
question, not in a tone of reproof or controversy,
but in that of a teacher answering questions of
disciples who had sought guidance from him. In
the twenty-fifth verse he takes up another of their
enquiries (as is indicated by the recurrence of the
phrase " But concerning " irepi Se twv irapOivwv) and
discusses it likewise in the spirit of a calm instructor.
A third point is introduced with a like formula (" But
concerning things offered to idols" irepi Se twv
elSwXoOvTwv) in the opening of the eighth Chapter, and
the instruction given about it occupies the whole of

ST. PAUL'S DESCRIPTION 65
that Chapter. Then comes a Chapter in which there
is a more controversial tone, followed by two Chapters
in which warning and instruction are blended ; and
then in the first verse of the twelfth Chapter we have
a recurrence of the formula " But concerning " irepi
Se twv irvevfiaTiKuiv. As the opening of the Epistle
was cheerful so is the closing portion ; he seemed
to look forward with pleasure to visiting the
Corinthians, and perhaps abiding or even wintering
with them ; and he gives directions about the
reception of Timothy and their due submission
to the house of Stephanas, briefly, and simply,
and with the tone of a man who is confident that
his direction will have weight with those whom he
regards as being in the main obedient children, in
spite of their faults. From beginning to end of
this Epistle there are no traces of anguish of heart
and much affliction, either in utterances expressing
these feelings, or in the style of the Epistle itself.
Dr. Plummer, in an article in Smith's Dictionary
of the Bible, justly says of its style that it " should
possibly be ranked first among St. Paul's writings."
He adds, "Possibly no such thought was in his
mind ; but the letter might convince the fastidious
Greeks that in clearness of thought and power of
language he was no way inferior to the eloquent
Apollos." In explanation of this it has been urged that St.
Paul " put such chains on his feelings that his letter

66 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
reflects no true image of them " ; but a careful
perusal of the paragraph will show that it was
because his feelings had not been suppressed but
had been strongly expressed that he thought it
necessary that he should explain to the Corinthians
that it was in sorrow rather than in anger that he
had written what had caused them pain.
The second note of identification is given in 2nd
(3rd) Corinthians vii. 8, 9, where the writer lets us
see that his affliction had been caused by the conduct
of the Corinthians and that he had expressed his
sense of this so strongly in the Epistle to which
he there refers, that after he had sent it to them,
he for a time repented having done so, ("though
I did repent," 2nd (3rd) Cor. vii. 8).
Here again ist Corinthians corresponds very im
perfectly; for though in that Epistle the writer
speaks of grave faults this was only what faithful
ness required. The blame occupies but a small por
tion of the letter, which contains also a good deal of
praise and an amount of valuable instruction* which
far exceeds either. The keynote of the warnings in
ist Corinthians is I think given to us in Chap.
iv. 2 1 : " What will ye ? shall I come unto you with

* Dr. Waite in his Introduction to this Epistle in the Speaker's
Commentary has well remarked that "it is scarcely comprehensible
that St. Paul should have said, even in a moment of strong excitement,
of so costly a monument of Christian truth as the First Epistle is, that
he repented for a while of ever having written it."

ST. PAUL'S DESCRIPTION 67
a rod, or in love, and in the spirit of meekness?"
Here the form of the question seems to imply the
hope that it will be in love that he will be enabled
to come.
The third mark of identification may be gathered
from two passages in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians, viz.
iii. 1, where the question, "Do we begin again
to commend ourselves?" seems to imply that the
Apostle has been commending himself, but is not
going to do so again ; and the assurance that this
will not be repeated which is implied here by the
form of the question, is more expressly made in
v. 12, "We commend not ourselves again unto
you," where the repetition of the word "again"
(irdXiv) seems to me to show that the writer has
done this on some former occasion, but is not going
to repeat what it had given him so much pain to
write. This note corresponds with ist Corinthians a little
better than the two former ones, as there is a certain
amount of self-vindication in that Epistle. Still,
self-commendation is not a very marked feature in
it, and the greater part of the self-vindication which
it contains is written with reference to the question
of the Apostle's refusal to accept payment for his
labours among them.
A fourth mark of identification of the Epistle
referred to in 2nd (3rd) Corinthians ii. 4 is furnished
by i. 23 and ii. 1, which show that St. Paul was,

68 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
at the time when he wrote, contemplating, and at the
same time shrinking from, a visit which must be of
a severe character, and that in the end, out of mercy
to them he did not pay it.
With this note of identification the references in
ist Corinthians to St. Paul's intention of visiting
Corinth do not correspond at all ; for he there fixes
the time when he purposes to visit them without the
slightest sign of hesitation, and with the sole proviso
" if the Lord will " and he tells the Corinthians that
his reason for not coming sooner was the absorbing
nature of the work at Ephesus (ist Cor. xvi. 8, 9).
He fixes his visit for the autumn and possibly the
winter, so that if this Epistle was written in the
same year the visit was not deferred at all. In this
Chapter he also speaks of abiding with them ( 1 Cor.
xvi. 6), as if the visit was one to which both he and
they might look forward with pleasure.
This total want of correspondence in some points,
partial correspondence in others, but complete cor
respondence in nothing, is just what might have
been expected between an earlier and later stage of
St. Paul's relations to the Corinthian Church, separ
ated by an interval of a year or more. This enquiry,
therefore, instead of furnishing us with proofs which
might counterbalance the proofs of the earlier date
of 1st Corinthians, tends rather to confirm them.

THE MISSIONS OF TIMOTHY 69

THE MISSION OF TIMOTHY TO CORINTH,
AND HIS MISSION TO MACEDONIA
The mention in Acts xix. 22 of the mission of
Timothy to Macedonia is regarded by Paley in his
Hora Paulina as furnishing a striking coincidence
with the mention in ist Corinthians of his mission to
Corinth ; and many later writers seem to consider
that these statements coincide closely enough to
entitle them to assume that the two documents refer
to one and the same mission. Some indeed are so
confident of this that they write as if they had found
their theory in the text; and more than one com
mentator speaks of our "learning from the Acts
that Timothy was sent to Corinth by way of
Macedonia." This is not an inference which should
be introduced without discussion as if it were on the
same footing with the statements of the historian.
There is, however, one inference, which has been
made by all critics who have written on this subject,
to which I unreservedly subscribe. All seem to
agree that Timothy was not merely sent to Corinth

70 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
vid Macedonia, but was entrusted with a mission to
the latter place (probably in connection with the
collection for Jerusalem). This appears to be a most
reasonable conclusion from the words of St. Luke.
If an ambassador was sent from London or Paris
to St. Petersburg, and travelled thither through
Germany, without delaying, or transacting business
there ; no historian who knew the facts would de
scribe them by saying that his Government "sent
him to Germany."
My agreement, however, with this inference forms
a barrier to my yielding assent to the further infer
ence (made by most of these writers) that Timothy
was entrusted also with the mission to Corinth.
When St. Paul wrote (as he has himself told us)
to the Corinthian Church "out of much affliction
and anguish of heart and many tears " ; I cannot
but think that he must have regarded the business
which obliged him to write that letter as being
of sufficient importance to demand the undivided
time and attention of the best envoy that he could
send ; that it must have been the epyov and not
the irapepyov of whoever it was entrusted to. It
seems evident from the words of Acts xix. 22 that
he was not altogether deprived of the power of
choice in such a matter; for Timothy and Erastus
are there described as " two of them that waited on
him." One other possible envoy at least — Titus —
cannot have been very far off.

THE MISSIONS OF TIMOTHY 71
I think, therefore, that even if we had no other
evidence, and were confined to two documents —
ist Corinthians, and the Book of "the Acts"— the
balance of probability would be in favour of the
conclusion that the mission to Corinth was not en
trusted to Timothy at the same time as the mission
to Macedonia.
But there is another document whose total silence
about any mission of Timothy to Corinth at the later
date, throws a heavy weight into the same scale.
According to the traditional theory, ist Corinthians
was the Epistle which was written with tears from
Ephesus, and was therefore the very Epistle about
which so much is said in the earlier part of 2nd
Corinthians where its effect upon the minds of the
Corinthian Christians is described.
It is admitted therefore by every writer on this
subject that they should have expected beforehand
to find the mission of Timothy a prominent topic
in the latter Epistle, as it had been expressly an
nounced in the former one. " For this cause have
I sent unto you Timothy, who is my beloved and
faithful child in the Lord, who shall put you in
remembrance of my ways which be in Christ, even as
I teach everywhere in every Church."
Nevertheless, the ingenuity of all the commentators
who have written on 2nd Corinthians has never been
able to discover in it the slightest allusion to any
mission of Timothy to Corinth at the time when the

72 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
Epistle there spoken of was sent, or to any news
brought by him from Corinth to Macedonia ; though
the original preaching of the Gospel at Corinth by
Timothy as well as by Paul and Silas is referred
to in the nineteenth verse of the first Chapter ; and
what makes this silence even more remarkable is the
circumstance that the place in this Epistle which we
should have expected to have been filled by Timothy
is not left vacant, but is filled by Titus, whose name
is introduced abruptly, and without explanation, in
the thirteenth verse of the second Chapter, in such
a way as to show that the writer felt that every
Corinthian reader was prepared for the reference
to him as the bringer of news to Macedonia.
In every reference in this Epistle to the repentance
of the Corinthians or to the mission which led to
it, Titus alone is spoken of as the agent of St. Paul
and no hint is given indicating that there had been
any other envoy.
Some explanation of what appears to be a
strange omission has been felt to be necessary,
and three distinct theories have been framed to
account for it. The first of these theories, (which
has the support of such writers as Bertholdt,
Credner, De Wette, Maier, Neander, Reuss, and
Ziegler), endeavours to account for the silence of
2nd Corinthians by supposing that Timothy had
regarded the mission to Corinth so much in the
light of a irdpepyov that he had spent all his time

THE MISSIONS OF TIMOTHY 73
in Macedonia, and had not gone on to Corinth at
all; but that, having finished his mission in Mace
donia, he had returned to Paul at Ephesus. Against
this theory Meyer objects that since Timothy was
(according to ist Corinthians iv. 17) so distinctly
delegated to Corinth, we are not justified in believ
ing that he left the Apostolic mission unfulfilled, or
that Paul himself had cancelled it; otherwise we
should necessarily expect the Apostle in his Second
Epistle to have explained to his readers why Timothy
had not come ; especially as the anti-Pauline party
would not have failed to turn the non-appearance of
Timothy to account in their controversy.
The second theory is that of Eichhorn who held
that Timothy had finished his visit to Corinth and
left it again before the arrival of our First Epistle
in that city. To this Meyer objects "that it pre
supposes that the bearers of the first Epistle lingered
on the journey (ist Cor. xvi. 17), which there is the
less ground to assume as these men presumably had
no other aim than to return from Ephesus to Corinth."
Indeed the supposition of gross negligence on the
part of one or other of St. Paul's messengers is a
vital element in all these theories. None of them
can dispense with it.
The third hypothesis which has been framed in
explanation of the silence of 2nd Corinthians about
the mission of Timothy to Corinth is, I think, the
one which is most generally accepted, and it has

74 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
the support of Meyer whose forcible objections to
the other explanations have just been quoted. Ac
cording to this theory, Timothy having discharged
his commission in Macedonia went on to Corinth,
and endeavoured to enforce the message of ist Corin
thians, but failed, and returned to St. Paul to Ephesus
to inform him of the unfavourable reception of his
letter. This explanation, indeed, avoids making the
improbable supposition that Timothy left Corinth
prematurely instead of waiting till the important
letter arrived ; but it avoids this only to come into
collision with St. Paul's distinct assertion that it
was the letter which made the Corinthians sorry :
"For though I made you sorry with my Epistle, I
do not regret it though I did regret, for I see that
that Epistle made you sorry, though but for a
season." According to this account, though the
letter came to the Corinthian Church at the time
of Timothy's visit or before it, it remained without
effect ; and it was not till he had journeyed back to
Ephesus and Titus had been sent to take his place
that they repented. The haste too with which,
according to this theory, Timothy must be sup
posed to have left Corinth, in order to bring all
the events within the short space of time between
spring and summer, is another difficulty. He is
represented as first spending time in Macedonia,
then after completing his task there, attempting to

THE MISSIONS OF TIMOTHY 75
|irry through the vitally important negotiations at
Corinth, then hastening back to St. Paul to report his
failure, thus leaving time for a new envoy to be sent
to make good his failure. If we had read all this in
the narrative we must have accepted it as an account
of the order of events, though we might have thought
it a strange method of conducting so critical and
delicate a negotiation. But there is not a word of
it in the text, except the statement that Timothy
was sent into Macedonia. All the rest is a purely
imaginary narrative constructed by advocates of the
later date of ist Corinthians to explain the total
(and for them highly inconvenient) silence of 2nd
Corinthians about any mission of Timothy to the
Corinthians at the time of their rebellion.
Dr. Waite in the Speaker's Commentary, and the
celebrated German critics Schmiedel and Klopper,
adopt in the main what I believe to be the true
solution, for they abandon the attempt to represent
ist Corinthians to be the Epistle which caused the
repentance of the Corinthians ; though they seem to
me to involve their account of the matter in needless
difficulty by retaining too much of the traditional
view, and dating ist Corinthians after the inter
mediate visit of St. Paul to Corinth. The Speaker's
Commentary supposes the date of ist Corinthians
and of the mission of Timothy to have been only
a few weeks earlier than that of the severe Epistle
and of the mission of Titus.

76 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
I believe that the earlier date of ist Corinthians
(which is established, as I have endeavoured to show,
by so many independent lines of proof) gives us
the true explanation of the silence of 2nd (3rd)
Corinthians about the mission of Timothy to Corinth.
Once that date is accepted we no longer expect
to find any allusion to his mission in an Epistle
which we now know to have been written a
year later, especially as St. Paul himself had paid
a short visit to Corinth in the interval. But the
missions of Timothy and Titus to Corinth were
not only separated by an interval of time, they
were also to some extent different in their aim,
and this circumstance explains the difference in the
Apostle's choice of envoys on the two occasions.
This difference in the character of the missions will
be apparent if we attend to the account given in ist
Corinthians of the mission to Corinth with which
Timothy was entrusted. The charge given to the
Corinthians " See that he be with you without
fear, for he worketh the work of God, as I also do "
would have been a strange introduction of an envoy
to rebels whom he had been commissioned to bring
to their knees. It was appropriate to the case of
one who was young and of a retiring disposition,
but who was able to give the Corinthians valuable
instruction about St. Paul's ways and his teaching
in every Church. For this there was probably no
other envoy that could have been found who was

THE MISSIONS OF TIMOTHY 77
so well fitted as Timothy, and this is expressly
stated in ist Corinthians iv. 17 to have been the
object for which Timothy was then sent. "Be ye
imitators of me. For this cause have I sent unto
you Timothy, who is my beloved and faithful child
in the Lord, who shall put you in remembrance of
my ways which be in Christ, even as I teach every
where in every Church." Some of his instruction
no doubt would be about things of which they
should not have been ignorant ; but we have already
seen that there are indications in ist Corinthians
that the Corinthian Church had asked for additional
information concerning several points in St. Paul's
teaching. It was no slight to Timothy if a year later a new
envoy was selected for a new mission to Corinth.
The situation had changed in the interval, and
assumed a critical character which made it advisable
that the man who was sent to deal with it should
have very special qualifications. St. Paul, therefore,
whose insight into character was not obscured even
by his love, allotted to Timothy the loyal province
, of Macedonia, while he entrusted Corinth to Titus.

Part II.
THE IDENTIFICATION
If 1st Corinthians is not the letter which was re
ferred to by St. Paul in the Epistle which he wrote
to Corinth from Macedonia, the question at once
arises, Has that letter then been lost? I shall now
state some reasons which have led me to the con
clusion that it has not totally perished, but that
the concluding portion of it has all along been
preserved in our Bibles, having been placed by
those who copied the original manuscript at the
end of the very letter in which reference is made
to it, so that in the document which appears in
our Canon as 2nd Corinthians there are really two
Epistles, of which the last written stands first
The first comment of most readers will probably
be, that it would take very strong proof to con
vince them of such a theory. This is a reasonable
comment, and I shall add to it the statement
that the theory is one which from the nature of
the case should, if it be true, be capable of being
established by strong proofs of various kinds. Not
only should there be so marked a difference of tone
79

80 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
and spirit as to present great difficulty to all readers
who regard the document as one whole ; but also,
(unless the transition was bridged by an altera
tion of the text) there should be a sudden break
in the sense at the place where one letter ends
and another begins. In addition to this, the fact
that these two Epistles must have been written by
the same writer, to the same Church, and with only
a short interval between them, and that, if they be
really separate Epistles, they must refer to the
same circumstances seen from very different stand
points, makes it highly probable that if the theory
be true, there ought to be passages in which the
Epistle which was written later refers back either
to the very phraseology of passages in the earlier
Epistle, or to the acts and purposes there spoken
of. I shall begin with some references of this kind,
which I regard as the most important proofs, because
they are of the nature of positive evidence.
In the second Chapter of the Epistle which was
written from Macedonia and which I have designated
3rd Corinthians St. Paul three times expressly men
tions the Epistle which he had written a short time
before to the Corinthians from Ephesus. In the
third verse he explains one of the objects for which
he wrote it; in the fourth verse he tells them what
his mental state was at the time when it was being
written ; and in the ninth verse he informs them
of another object which he had in view in writing

THE IDENTIFICATION 81
St, which object was however intimately connected
with that which is referred to in the third verse.
The first identification is furnished by the first
of these passages. In verse 3, writing in the past
tense, he says, "And I wrote this same thing that
when I came I might not have sorrow."
If we now turn to 2nd Corinthians xiii. 10, we
there find him using the present tense when he
says " For this cause I write these things while
absent that I may not when present deal sharply."
The parallelism is complete but for one apparent
discrepancy. In the passage where he writes in the
present tense St. Paul says " That I may not use
sharpness," but when he speaks in the past tense
he says "That I might not have sorrow." This
apparent discrepancy is, however, converted into a
coincidence full of significance by the fact that in
the verses which immediately precede we are shown
that " sorrow " is in this paragraph an euphemism for
"severity"; for the expression in the first verse "Come
unto you in sorrow" is, as we have already seen,
shown to be an euphemism of this kind, by the
reason given in the second verse for the determina
tion not to come to them again in sorrow, "For
if I make you sorry who is he then that maketh
me glad but the same that is made sorry by me?"
This fixes the meaning of "sorrow" for us in this
paragraph, so that the " That I might not have
sorrow" of the third verse is seen to be the

82 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
equivalent of "That I may not use sharpness" in
the thirteenth Chapter of 2nd Corinthians.
Now, when his Corinthian Christians have re
pented, and when he is able to speak of the time
of estrangement in the past tense, St. Paul seems
to dislike speaking of using severity, even when he
is explaining that he had shrunk from it, and had
endeavoured successfully to avoid using it. It is to
be noted that the words " severity," " sharpness," and
"punishment" are never once found in these nine
Chapters in connection with the purposes of St.
Paul. The paragraph from which the first of this pair
of corresponding sentences is taken, is the very
paragraph in which the Apostle is speaking of having
written out of much affliction, so that unless the
correspondence be merely apparent, it is a direct
identification of 2nd Corinthians xii. 10 as part of
the Epistle referred to in 3rd Corinthians ii. 4 as
written e/c iroXXijs OXfyews.
The second passage which I shall adduce as
referring to words in 2nd Corinthians, is to be found
in 3rd Corinthians i. 23, " To spare you I came not
again unto Corinth."
This is one of the two passages in which St. Paul,
following up his vindication of himself from the
charge of lightness, explains his reasons for not
having paid a visit which he had previously an-

THE IDENTIFICATION 83
nounced. We have already seen that each of these
two passages (i. 23 and ii. 1) takes up two points
which are to be found in the announcement made
by the Apostle when leaving Corinth ("If I come
again I will not spare "), viz., the question of a repe
tition of the visit, and the question of sparing or not
sparing. But I have now to call attention to the fact
that that announcement was adopted and repeated
by St. Paul in 2nd Corinthians xiii. 2 as expressing
his intention at the time when he was writing, and
that he then endeavoured to impress on the minds
of the Corinthians the fact that he was repeating
by a letter, in his absence from them, the very words
which he had uttered orally when he was present
with them. " If I come again I will not spare." idv
eXOw els to iraXiv, ov ^eicro/xai : so that, (unless the
double resemblance be set aside as entirely acci
dental), we are met by the fact that a purposed visit
which in xii/, 2 is spoken of as a future possibility,
is in i. 23 and in ii. 1 treated as an abandoned plan,
a purpose of the past, which the writer mentions only
in order to explain his reasons for not having carried
it out. It is noteworthy that the translators both of the
Authorised and Revised Versions, from not observing
the correspondence with the previous announcement,
seem to have regarded the ov/ceTt in i. 23 as unintel
ligible if given the plain meaning "no longer," "no
more," "not again," which it always bears, alike in

84 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
classical and in Biblical Greek.* The translators of
the Authorised Version ventured so far as to render
it as if it were equivalent to " Not as yet " ; which it
never is. The editors of the Revised Version were
too accomplished scholars to repeat so palpable a
mistranslation : yet they seem to have regarded the
simple meaning of ovkbti as being so utterly inex
plicable here, that they have taken refuge in an
extraordinary periphrasis " I forbare to come." An
English reader would naturally be led to suppose
that " I forbare " represented a corresponding verb
in the original. No one could possibly conjecture
that it was intended to represent the Greek word
OVK6TI. The third sentence which I shall adduce is to be
found, like the first, in the paragraph in which
St. Paul is speaking to the Corinthians of the Epistle
which he had lately sent to them before their repent
ance. It occurs only six verses later than the first
sentence, i.e. in ii. 9, " For to this end also did I write,
that I might know the proof of you, whether ye are
obedient in all things " ; with which I would compare
2nd Corinthians x. 6, " Being in a readiness to
avenge all disobedience when your obedience shall
be fulfilled." The words of ii. 9 imply that St. Paul,
when he wrote them, was satisfied that the Corinthian
* Compare Matt. xix. 6 ; Mark x. 8 ; Luke xv. 19, 21 ; John iv. 22 ;
vi. 66 ; Acts xx. 25, 38 ; Rom. vi. 9 ; xiv. 15 ; 2nd Cor. v. 16 ; Gal.
iii. 25 ; iv. 7 ; Eph. ii. 19 ; Philem. 16 ; Heb. x. 18, 26.

THE IDENTIFICATION 85
Church was now obedient in all things ; and later on
he expressly asserts this ; 'for in viii. 15, 16 he says
(speaking of the result of Titus's mission), "Whilst
he remembereth the obedience of you all, how with
fear and trembling ye received him. I rejoice there
fore that I have confidence in you in all things." He
is now so far from any longer entertaining the pur
pose "to avenge disobedience" that he gives the
Corinthian Church a carte blanche in the matter
of forgiveness, in the very next verse to the one
which I have quoted as a parallel, "To whom ye
forgive anything I forgive also" (ii. 10).
There are two considerations which should be
borne in mind in estimating the importance which
should be attached to the correspondence of these
three pairs of parallel passages. First, that in each of
these pairs, the act, or purpose, or feeling, which in
the four chapters (x.-xiii.) is present, or future, in the
nine Chapters (i-ix.) is spoken of as belonging to the
past. And secondly — that these parallel passages
have not been obtained by pressing into the service
everything which looked like a parallelism in a long
Epistle, without regard to the subject-matter of which
the writer was treating; but that, on the contrary,
one term of each of these pairs has been found in
the brief compass of a paragraph of twelve verses
(from i. 23 to ii. 10) in which the writer is expressly
speaking to the Corinthians of the epistle which he
wrote to them out of much affliction and anguish

86 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
of heart. It should also be observed that while this
paragraph occurs in the opening part of the Epistle,
two of the corresponding sentences from 2nd Corin
thians have been found in the closing Chapter of that
epistle. This is what might have been expected, a
priori, in letters standing to each other in the relation
in which I contend that these epistles stand. It
would in such a case be highly probable that the
opening part of the later letter would contain
references to the thoughts and plans of the writer
when he was concluding the letter which immediately
preceded it, though not necessarily confined to the
concluding portion.
In addition to the proofs of identification fur
nished by these passages, St. Paul has given us an
opportunity of applying marks of identification on
a larger scale, in the four particulars about the
missing epistle which are mentioned in the epistle
which he wrote from Macedonia, and which have
already been compared with ist Corinthians. Taking
them in the same order, let us compare them with
2nd Corinthians, Chapters x.-xiii.
The first note of identification, (to which it is
admitted by all that ist Corinthians corresponds very
imperfectly), is furnished to us by the statement that
it was written "out of much affliction, and anguish
of heart with many tears."
It will scarcely be denied that the contents of
Chapters x.-xiii. are such as we might on a priori

THE IDENTIFICATION 87
grounds have conjectured to have been written under
the influence of feelings like these. Not only do we
find many passages which we can well believe to
have been blotted with tears (as, for instance, xi. 11,
15, 20, 21); but the style and manner of the whole
writing present the very characteristics which we
should expect to find in a letter written out of much
anguish of heart. From the very beginning of
Chapter x. to the farewell blessing at the close of
Chapter xiii., they correspond, and correspond in a
most striking manner with the description given by
St. Paul in 3rd Corinthians Chapter ii. 4 of the emo
tions under the influence of which he had written to
the Corinthians a short time before.
The second note of identification is given in 3rd
Corinthians Chapters vii. 8, 9, where the writer lets
us see that his affliction had been caused by the
conduct of the Corinthians, and that he had ex
pressed his sense of this so strongly in the epistle to
which he there refers, that after he had sent it to
them he for a time repented having done so (" Though
I did repent," 3rd Cor. vii. 8).
In 1st Corinthians the blame occupies but a small
portion of the letter, which contains also a good deal
of praise, and an amount of valuable instruction
which far exceeds either ; but in 2nd Corinthians
x.-xiii. the expressions of displeasure are no longer
a small portion of the whole, and they are blended
with no praise. The keynote here is "If I come

88 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
again I will not spare." There is only one other
epistle of St. Paul (the Epistle to the Galatians)
which shows anything approaching the displeasure
which is here apparent throughout.
The third mark may be gathered from 3rd Corin
thians iii. 1, where the question " Do we begin again
to commend ourselves?" implies that the writer has
done this on some previous occasion but is not going
to do so again ; and from v. 12 where he makes a
positive assertion that he is not going to repeat it, in
which he repeats the word " again " (irdXiv).
When we turn to 2nd Corinthians x.-xiii. the word
irdXiv, and the references to self-commendation be
come full of meaning; for he must be indeed a
careless reader who has never been struck by this
characteristic in these Chapters. Indeed the writer
again and again calls attention to what he is doing.
In these four Chapters the word KavxdcrOai occurs
fifteen times, and the word Kavxw-s twice, — i.e. in
xi. 10 and xi. 17. The first of these passages would
be especially likely to leave a painful feeling in the
minds of the Corinthian Christians even after their
reconciliation. A comparison of the way in which the writer
employs these words, and the cognate word Kavxma>
in Chapters i.-ix., with his use of them in x.-xiii.,
reveals a contrast so delicate and so suggestive that,
I think, it alone would convince me that he wrote
Chapters i.-ix. with recollection of Chapters x.-xiii.,

THE IDENTIFICATION 89
and with the conviction that his readers recollected
them also. The first time that he employs the word
Kavxicis is in the passage which has been already
discussed (i. 12), and he there uses the definite article,
and proceeds, as we have seen, to explain what it
had really meant : " The boasting is this." Then in
the fourteenth verse, with a delicate touch, which is
peculiarly characteristic of St. Paul, he brings in the
word Kavxma> and gives it a new application "Ye
are our boast"; and having given this turn to the
word, it is in this way that he employs it and its
cognate words henceforth in these Chapters.
Thus in vii. 4 he writes : " Great is my boasting
(/cai/XJjcrtc) on your behalf" ; in vii. 14 he speaks of
having boasted of them to Titus, and in the ninth
Chapter of having boasted of them to the Macedonians.
There is only one exception, i.e. in v. 12, and in that
passage he is their boast, as they are his in all the
other passages. But he never once reverts to the
painful meaning of self-assertion rendered necessary
by their depreciation of him, in which sense he so
constantly used the word in 2nd Corinthians x.-xiii.
I do not think it is possible that this can be merely
accidental, but I have never seen it noticed by any
commentator ; when they allude to the words at all,
they speak solely of the number of times that they
are used, without taking notice of the remarkable and
significant difference of meaning.
These are not the only instances in which St. Paul

90 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
gives a similar turn in Chapters i.-ix. to expres
sions which he had used in x.-xiii. When a word
used at the time of their estrangement in a stern
and painful sense, is capable of being used in a
gracious sense he seems purposely to do this when
he writes to the Corinthians after their repentance.
Thus the Oap'pw els vp.ds of x. I, 2 (confidence
against you) is replaced in vii. 16 by dappw iv
vp.lv (I have confidence in you); and ireiroiQijais*
which was similarly used in an unfavourable way in
x. 2, is given a favourable meaning in i. 15. When a
word is not capable of being thus transformed, and
when the idea which it represents cannot be alto
gether excluded in making some needful explanation,
we have seen how he substitutes another word, as
" sorrow " for severity ii. 1 " I determined not to come
unto you again in sorrow," and in ii. 3 " That when I
came I might not have sorrow " instead of " That
when I came I might not use severity " ; whereas in
xiii. 10 the sterner word had been used " That when
present I may not use severity."
I have spoken of these last points as if I assumed
the priority of Chapters x.-xiii. I was obliged to do
so in order to bring out their meaning. Taken in this
order of time these contrasts are full of significance
and beauty ; but they cannot be read in the reverse
order. They are like the valves of the veins which
* This point about irevoWTfo-is was suggested to me by the Rev.
F. R. M. Hitchcock.

THE IDENTIFICATION 91
revealed to Harvey the secret of the circulation of
the blood by opening in one direction only.
A fourth mark of identification of the Epistle
referred to in Chapter ii. 4 is furnished by i. 23 and
ii. 1, which show that the Apostle was at the time
when he wrote, contemplating and at the same time
shrinking from, the payment of a visit which must
be of a severe character, and that in the end, out of
mercy to them, he did not pay it.
With this mark we have seen already that the
references to St. Paul's intentions in ist Corinthi
ans xvi. do not correspond at all. On the other hand
2nd Corinthians x.-xiii. corresponds as perfectly with
this note of identification as it does with the three
previous ones ; for 2nd Corinthians xii. 20, 2 1 and
xiii. 1, 2 show that the Apostle was when he wrote
these passages contemplating a visit of the very
character which the identification requires; and the
last-mentioned verse proves in addition the fact that
he was hesitating about it. The words " If I come
again I will not spare," show that, at the time when
they were written, the coming itself was uncertain,
but that there seemed to be only too much certainty
about the character of the visit, if it were paid
then. That these notes of identification do not form a
key which would fit any lock, may be seen from the
fact that there is not one of the eleven remaining
epistles of St. Paul which would answer to any one of

92 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
them, except the Epistle to the Galatians, and that
it would not answer to the last-mentioned mark.
If these proofs are valid, it follows of necessity
that Chapters x.-xiii. must have been written, not
from Macedonia, as were Chapters i.-ix.,
x.-xiii. not hut from Ephesus : and this consequence
written of the theory lays it open either to re-
from futation or confirmation if it be found
Macedonia. ...
to contain any descriptive phrase in
dicating the geographical position of the writer. It
does contain such a phrase.* In x. 16 the Apostle
speaks of preaching "the Gospel even unto the
lands on the other side of you," els Ta virepeKeiva
v/xSiv where the addition of vp.wv seems intended to
define the locality of these lands as being on the
other side of Corinth. Now a straight line drawn
from Macedonia to Achaia would, if produced, not
touch land till it reached the coast of Africa ;
whereas a straight line drawn from Ephesus to
Corinth would be continued through Italy and
Spain, the very lands which, as we learn from the
Epistle to the Romans, St. Paul was planning to
visit. I feel certain that if it were the received
theory which placed the writer of this sentence at
Ephesus, the coincidence would have been noticed
by every commentator, and it would have been
regarded as a fatal objection to any new theory if
* This has been noticed by Professor Hausrath in his pamphlet Der
Vier-Capitel-Brief des Paulus an die Korinther. Heidelberg, 1870.

THE IDENTIFICATION 93
it necessitated a change which would deprive this
phrase of any part of its point and force. A new
theory of course requires far more proof than would
be thought sufficient for an old one ; but it is an
indication that we are on the right track when a
conclusion to which we have been led on altogether
different grounds, gives to a geographical expression
an appropriateness which it has never had for any
readers since that day, now more than eighteen
hundred years ago, when this epistle was read for
the last time in the original manuscript by some
member of the Corinthian Church.
If Chapters x.-xiii. appeared in our Bibles, in
the same order as they do now, but as a separate
Epistle, I think that it would be generally ad
mitted that the marks of identification which have
been adduced would justify the conclusion that that
Epistle was the same, or part of the same, Epistle
which is referred to in Chapter ii. 4; and that we
had no need and no right to resort to the hypothesis
of a lost epistle, when we were in possession of a
document which corresponded in so many and so
remarkable particulars with the description given
by the Author himself. The rule entia non sunt
multiplicanda praeter necessitatem would in that
case be applicable. But as it is, it will no doubt
be objected that these Chapters are not an ens;
but have come down to us as part of the very
epistle that contains the description to which they

94 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
appear to correspond. We have now to test the
conclusiveness of the reply by an examination of
the document in question.

THE COMPOSITE NATURE OF THE DOCU
MENT WHICH APPEARS IN THE CANON
AS SECOND CORINTHIANS
The occasion of St. Paul's writing Chapters i.-ix.
was the successful result of the mission of Titus
and of a letter which the Apostle had himself
written. This is admitted by all. The keynote of
these Chapters is truly described in the Speaker's
Commentary as " Comfort in affliction " ; the word
irapaKXr\(ns occurring eleven times in these nine
Chapters. St Paul does not leave us in doubt as
to the cause of this comfort and of the joy with
which he now overflows (vii. 4). It was the
coming of Titus, and not his coming only, but
the tidings which he brought with him of the
repentance and zeal of the Corinthian Church,
which had changed his great sorrow into great
joy. This keynote of irapaKXticris is struck in the
very beginning of the first Chapter and it is main
tained to the close of the ninth. Whenever thej»
writer digresses in order to give counsel or warn
ing he comes back again to the subject of his
thankfulness and joy, and the completeness of the

COMPOSITE NATURE OF DOCUMENT 95
reconciliation which has been effected ; and at the
end of the seventh Chapter he concludes the subjects
which he has been discussing with the words " I
rejoice, therefore, that I have confidence in you in
all things."
The two following Chapters deal with the question
of the collection, and in them the same affectionate
and cheerful tone is maintained. The writer's ap
proaching visit to Corinth seems to be looked forward
to with pleasure, the only cause of apprehension
being lest, as he has been praising the Corinthian
Church so highly to the Macedonians, they may not
in that one particular be found to be quite so good
as he has depicted them ; this apprehension being
expressed in language which is affectionate and
almost playful. "Lest we (that we say not, ye)
should be ashamed in this same confident boasting."
He closes these Chapters with the ejaculation
"Thanks be unto God for his unspeakable gift."
Then, after this climax of adoring gratitude, with
out the least explanation, all is suddenly changed,
and a torrent of mingled pathos and indignation
is poured out, being continued through four Chapters
till the final farewell and blessing of the last four
verses; the cheerful tone being never resumed for
a moment. These four verses indeed express earnest
affection, but I cannot agree with Weber that there
is in this anything inconsistent with the argument of
the four Chapters at the close of which they stand ;

96 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
for these four Chapters are, after all, the utterances
of love, though it be wounded love. We need not
therefore think it strange if the Apostle, before he
closes his letter, allows the expression of his love to
predominate in the four verses in which he bids
farewell to those who were so dear to him. Even
in the severe Epistle to the Galatians the last word
before the final amen is " Brothers " dSeX<pol, and the
last sentence is a blessing. There is, however, at
the close of these four Chapters no return to the
attitude of joy and thankfulness with which Chapters
i.-ix. both began and ended.
If, seeking for a clue to guide us through these
difficulties, we scrutinise the first sentence where
this change makes its appearance, we not only find
no reason or explanation furnished by the writer,
but are further confronted with the strange fact that
the second word of this sentence is the conjunction
Se, seeming to connect the sentence with something
which has gone before, and that the passage has all
the appearance of being the continuation of an argu
ment homogeneous with itself; for, in addition to
the fact that it begins with a conjunction, it contains
an allusion to an objection which had been brought
against the Apostle, which it brings before us not as
if the subject were now for the first time introduced,
but as if it had been already mentioned. Further
more, St Paul in this opening sentence accosts those
to whom his reproaches are addressed simply as

COMPOSITE NATURE OF DOCUMENT 97
"ye," without any addition or qualification to show
that he is no longer addressing the Church at large,
or the repentant majority, but an unrepentant
minority, who have dissociated themselves from the
submission of their fellow Churchmen.
Prof. Hausrath in his treatise, Der Vier-Capitel-
Brief puts forward a curious hypothesis about this
sentence. According to him the clue is to be found
in the word ovtos, which denotes that what follows
belongs to the Apostle in a sense in which that
which preceded it did not. He conjectures that
these four Chapters were probably an appendix to
an epistle written by the brethren at Ephesus in
support of St. Paul, and that the name of Aquila may
have been the most prominent in it, as he would
be likely to have special influence, having helped
to found the Corinthian Church.
Prof. Hausrath might have found in the Epistle
to the Galatians phrases not unlike that which he
regards as so significant, especially "'I6e iyw ILavXos
Xiyw vp.lv" in Galatians v. 2, where, instead of
pointing a contrast with something preceding it,
which had not been said by St. Paul, the expression
continues with added emphasis a connected argu
ment. This is the function which, as I think, was
discharged by the phrase avTos Se iyw ILavXos as
it stood in the original manuscript which was written
at St. Paul's dictation ; for my conjecture is that
the destruction by some accident of the earlier part

98 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
of the manuscript has broken off the connection
at a point which is now the beginning of the tenth
Chapter, but which appears to have been originally
the middle of an impassioned argument or appeal.
Avtos would seem to be used in connection with the
taunts to which the Apostle was referring in the dis
course of which we have now only the latter portion.
" I myself who am thus depreciated by you."
Klopper, in his commentary, quotes Hausrath's
surmise with glee, exclaiming triumphantly that the
father of the theory of the four-Chaptered Epistle
has dug its grave with his own hands. Klopper is,
I think, a little hasty in jumping to the conclusion
that the theory which he defends is the only alter
native to this conjecture of Hausrath.
It is not so much in the employment of the word
avTos as in that of the conjunction Se that, in my
opinion, the true clue is to be found. Si, as Winer
teaches, connects while it opposes, whereas dXXd
expresses proper and sharp opposition. Se is indeed
frequently used by St. Paul almost as an equivalent
to " and." * But, at the beginning of Chapter x. even
dXXd would be utterly inadequate to express the
sharpness of the opposition between the contents of
that Chapter and the ejaculation, "Thanks be unto
God for his unspeakable gift," with which Chapter ix.
so appropriately concluded.
* Professor Mahaffy informs me that the same use is found in all the
Papyrus Greek of this time.

THE MAJORITY AND MINORITY 99
The startling abruptness of the transition at this
point is to some extent concealed from ordinary
readers by the division into Chapters ; but all com
mentators have noticed it, and have felt the necessity
for some explanation. The explanation generally
adopted is that the tidings brought by Titus were
not altogether favourable. All who were well dis
posed had been humbled by the Apostle's rebukes ;
but his adversaries had been further embittered. The
first nine Chapters of 2nd Corinthians are accordingly
supposed to be addressed to the repentant majority,
and the four concluding chapters to the rebellious
minority. An objection to this theory which at once suggests
itself is that where St. Paul is supposed to turn to
the rebellious minority, he addresses them simply as
" you," as if they were the same persons whom he had
been addressing all along. Indeed the only appear
ance of a distinction which he makes is not between
them and a majority better than themselves, but
rather between them and a still more rebellious
minority. " I beseech you, that I may not, when
present, shew courage with the confidence wherewith
I count to be bold against some, which count of us
as if we walked according to the flesh."
But beside this objection, the description which
St. Paul gives in Chapters i.-ix. of the manner in
which his letter was received, plainly describes a
state of feeling so universal and so strong as to be

ioo SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
inconsistent with the existence of such an openly
rebellious minority as would be required to account
for the language of x.-xiii. He speaks of the Corin
thians as having received Titus "with fear and
trembling " (vii. 15); he records how Titus " told us
your earnest desire, your mourning, your fervent
mind toward me " (vii. 7) ; and he adds, " For behold
this self-same thing that ye sorrowed after a godly
sort, what carefulness it wrought in you, yea, what
clearing of yourselves, yea, what indignation, yea,
what fear, yea, what vehement desire, yea, what
zeal, yea, what revenge ; In all things ye have
approved yourselves to be clear in the matter."
And at the close of the seventh chapter he twice
emphatically speaks of the universality of this move
ment of zeal and Godly fear. In vii. 13 he says,
" His spirit was refreshed by you all." Again, in the
fifteenth verse, "Whilst he remembereth the obe
dience of you all, how with fear and trembling ye
received him." Even the chief offender himself was
not only overwhelmed by the force of public opinion
within the Church, but was also moved to true re
pentance, so that the Apostle was satisfied that his
case no longer called for punishment, but rather for
forgiveness and reconciliation.
Professor Klopper (whose commentary on 2nd
Corinthians is referred to by eminent English com
mentators as conclusively establishing its unity)
finds himself so hard pressed by some of these

CHARACTER OF THE MINORITY 101
passages that he has recourse to a summary method
of disposing of them by describing them as " ideal
istic" and "to be taken cum grano salis." His
adoption of this heroic method of exposition is a
tribute to the strength of the proof which St. Paul's
language furnishes if we allow him only to speak.
But — it will be said — St. Paul does undoubtedly
speak of a majority in Chapter ii. 6, and this im
plies that there was a minority, which must have
been composed of persons who were opposed to the
majority on this point.
I fully agree that this is the obvious meaning of
his language ; and I believe that the facts which
his reference to this circumstance discloses, and
the way in which he deals with them, give us a
glimpse of an incident in early Church History
(which would otherwise have escaped us), and of
the great Apostle's treatment of a situation of some
delicacy. But if we wish to gain all the information
which this passage is capable of furnishing, we must
come to it without prejudice, and endeavour to ascer
tain from it what the real character of the minority
was, instead of settling beforehand what it must have
been. I think the interpretation of these verses has
suffered from having been mixed up with the question
of Chapters x.-xiii. The result of this has been that
critics have approached it with a keen desire to find
in the mention of a majority some explanation of
the severity of those Chapters ; so that they have
H

102 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
at once jumped to the conclusion that the minority
must have been composed of mischievous and evil-
disposed persons, who had resisted the punishment
of the offender, and still refused to acknowledge its
justice. The eminent commentator, Meyer, for
instance, thus comments upon the passage. "To
the minority there may have belonged — partly the
most lax in morality, and partly also opponents of
the Apostle, the latter resisting on principle."
If, instead of prejudging the question, we seek to
ascertain the character of the Minority by interro-
gating the passage in which the Majority
Character is spoken of, we are confronted with the
of the fact that St. Paul devotes himself alto-
R) gether to defending the adequacy (ucavov)
of the sentence, and says nothing about its justice ;
nor is there a single word in the paragraph which
either asserts or implies that its justice had been
disputed by anyone. We may next notice that he
is addressing certain persons in the second person
as "you" (vp.ds), and that he appears to distinguish
them from the Majority ; for he speaks to them of
the majority in the third person, and defends the
adequacy of their sentence. This, even if we had
no further guidance, would make it probable that
the Minority are addressed here, and that they
were composed of ultra-Paulinists, or, at any rate,
of members of the Church of Corinth who were
dissatisfied with the punishment inflicted by the

CHARACTER OF THE MINORITY 103
Majority, because, in their opinion, it was too
light But this probability is converted into certainty
by the phrase rowavriov, which immediately follows.
The words " You should on the contrary forgive
him" would have had no meaning if those who
were being thus exhorted were not pursuing or
proposing to pursue a contrary course ; and the
contrary of forgiveness is the refusal to forgive, the
demand for further punishment.
If we would understand aright St. Paul's attitude
towards this minority, we must not fail further to
notice the sensitive care with which he avoids saying
a single word of censure beyond what was absolutely
necessary to dissuade them from their purpose. He
says " contrariwise " but he does not complete the
sentence by adding " contrariwise to what you
propose." He does not even say "You ought to
forgive " but " It is for you to forgive." He evidently
felt that their demand for severity sprang from their
loyalty and affection, and not from any evil or
corrupt motive.
Yet — partly for that very reason — the situation
was a delicate and critical one. If the Apostle had
encouraged the complaint of the Minority, and de
clared the decision of the majority to be inadequate,
he might have given the Corinthians the impression
that he regarded the Minority as his only true
friends, and might thus have revived the baneful

104 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
party spirit which had been the germ from which
such terrible evil had so lately developed. He did
not wish that the reconciliation in which he so
greatly rejoiced should be marred, as was David's
return to his kingdom, when the boast of the men
of Judah about the king's nearer kinship to them
selves, changed the loyal enthusiasm of the Israelites
into jealousy and ill-will. St. Paul was resolved that
Satan should not thus get an advantage over them,
But the Apostle had also another reason for his
decision. He was convinced that the offender was
sincerely and deeply repentant, and he believed him
to be in danger of being overwhelmed by the pangs
of remorse. It is a very significant circumstance
that, believing this, he seems to have looked specially
to the members of the Minority (by the expression
of their full forgiveness to the penitent) to prevent
him from being swallowed up by excess of sorrow,
It is to them that he appeals in the sixth and
seventh verses ; and he does not seem merely to
apprehend that the penitent would be crushed if
a further punishment were inflicted by the vote of
the community — the Majority were able to prevent
that — but rather that he may be crushed in spirit
unless the very persons to whom St. Paul is now
appealing, pursue a course directly contrary to that
which they had chosen ; unless they forgive, and
comfort him, and confirm their love towards him. It
would appear that the Apostle must have received

CHARACTER OF THE MINORITY 105
information which convinced him that the man in the
bitterness of his repentance did not take comfort from
the fact that the Majority looked upon his offence as
sufficiently punished. They might forgive him, but
he did not forgive himself, and could not be brought
to do so unless those whom he regarded as the
special friends of the Apostle ceased to frown on him,
and confirmed their love toward him.*
These zealous adherents of St. Paul, whom he
thought worthy of being treated with so great
tenderness, and to whose moral influence he
attached so much importance, have, I maintain,
been grievously maligned by modern commentators.
* It is generally assumed that this offender is to be identified with the
incestuous person who is mentioned in 1st Corinthians. I shall confine
myself to stating some reasons which have led me to look on this iden
tification as being at least very doubtful. Is it probable that St. Paul,
who always speaks so solemnly of the enormity of offences against purity,
would have said that he had written of so terrible a moral offence
as that of the committer of incest, merely that the Corinthians' care
for himself in the sight of God might appear? "I wrote not for
his cause that did the wrong, nor for his cause that suffered the
wrong, but that your earnest care for us might be made manifest
in the sight of God" (vii. 12). It would not be any great proof
either of their obedience to St. Paul or of their care for him in
the sight of God, that they had condemned an abomination which
even without the light of Christianity, the law written in the hearts
of men led many to condemn. In 1st Corinthians he seems expressly
to declare that he has written about the case of incest " for his sake
that did the wrong," i.e. that his spirit might be saved in the day of the
Lord Jesus. It appears more likely that the offence mentioned in
3rd Corinthians was of an altogether different kind, but what it was we
can never know with certainty, owing to the loss of the first part of
2nd Corinthians.

106 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
They have been transformed into a party of
obstinate rebels, whose opposition to the Apostle
was only inflamed by the submission of their fellow
Churchmen. Even when some critics have been
struck by the fact of the mention of the adequacy
of the sentence, and have thereby been constrained
to admit that the Minority must have advocated a
severer one, the remark is invariably added that
they must have done this from malignant and
treacherous motives, wishing to entrap the Apostle
into an act of severity, and then to use this as a
means of undermining his influence. They have
actually been identified with Satan, and it has been
supposed that it is their devices which are referred
to in the eleventh verse. I believe that when St.
Paul in that passage spoke of Satan, he meant
Satan, and not any member of the Church, either of
the Minority or Majority. Satan he regarded as the
author of strife and ill-will ; and, as he recalled the
events of the last twelve months, whose painful
history had, as it were, been burned into his memory ;
as he recollected the startling rapidity with which
the party spirit noticed in ist Corinthians had
developed into the strife, jealousy, wraths, factions,
backbitings, whisperings, swellings, tumults spoken
of in 2nd Corinthians ; it is not surprising that he
should have exclaimed, " We are not ignorant of his
devices." I think that any appearance of obscurity, which

CHARACTER OF THE MINORITY 107
later readers may find in this passage, has arisen
from St. Paul's desire to give as little recognition
as he possibly could to the division of the Church
of Corinth into parties, as well as from his anxiety
not to wound the feelings of the Minority whose
proposal he was setting aside. He must necessarily
have received some communication on the subject
to which he here refers — either by a verbal com
munication through Titus or in a letter or letters
brought by him. As the difference of opinion had
been sufficient to require a vote of some kind to
be taken, and as the community at Corinth had
already, (as we have seen), adopted the plan of
writing letters to St. Paul ; it is not at all im
probable that he received from both parties com
munications in which they gave their reasons for
the course which they had adopted. If to these
communications the Apostle had written separate
replies, this course would have involved a recog
nition of the Corinthian parties ; and it would
have had the further inconvenience that the reply
intended for one party would sooner or later be
certain to come into the hands of members of the
opposite party. To warn them against this would
have been useless, and would also have been abso
lutely inconsistent with his condemnation of divisions
in the Church. The only alternative, then, was to
touch on the matter in the letter written to the
whole Church. This he does as briefly as possible,

108 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
yet in a manner which would make his meaning
quite clear to those whom he wished to influence.
It is not improbable that the Minority had com
plained of having been outvoted by the Majority and
that the words i\ iiriTipia avTrj y viro twi/ irXeiovwv
referred to some passage in their letter. At any
rate, the reference must have been perfectly in
telligible to them. But St. Paul makes this appeal
to a section as brief as possible, and he takes the
greatest pains to show that in the remainder of his
letter he is addressing the whole community and that
his praise is intended for all. It can scarcely be
an accidental circumstance that immediately before
turning for a moment to a section, he declared that
the offence had grieved them all; and in his praise
of their obedience he afterwards twice repeats and
emphasises this word "all." In vii. 13 he is not
content with saying " Titus's spirit was refreshed by
you " but adds " by you all" dird irdvTwv vpwv, and in
the fifteenth verse of the same Chapter he described
Titus as "remembering the obedience of you all,"
iravTwv ipwv. This emphatic repetition of the word
"all" seems to show that the writer intended to
make it clear that he was not the Apostle of a party,
but of the whole Church of Corinth, and that he was
anxious that every member — alike of the Majority
and Minority — should feel that he had a share in
St. Paul's commendation.
The attempt, then, to explain the severity of

CHARACTER OF THE MINORITY 109
Chapters x.-xiii. by the hypothesis of the existence
of an openly rebellious minority in the Church of
Corinth breaks down in two ways : firstly, because
the language used about the umversality_as well
as enthusiasm of the submission made by the
Corinthian Christians, at the time of Titus's visit,
leaves us no room for the existence of such an
openly rebellious minority as is required ; and
secondly because St. Paul plainly indicates to us the
real character of the minority by the words which
he addresses to them, and shows that character to
be the very reverse of what it has been supposed
to be.
But these are not the only difficulties which beset
this hypothesis. While the description of the re
pentance of the Corinthian Church given in
Chapters i.-ix., seems to leave no room for an
openly rebellious minority, the language of Chapters
x.-xiii. leaves no room for a repentant majority.
The rebels are from first to last addressed, not as
a -section of the Church, but as the Church of
Corinth itself.
Thus in xi. 8 the Apostle says, " I robbed other
Churches," implying by his words that it is a Church
that he is addressing ; and in xii. 1 3 he says, " In
what were ye inferior to other Churches?" In
Chapters i.-ix. St. Paul interrupts his exhortations
to assure his readers that he does not write to
condemn them, and he shows in different places

no SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
in these Chapters a keen anxiety that nothing
may revive the painful feelings of the past. If
Chapters x.-xiii. were part of the same letter
addressed to an unrepentant minority whose re
bellious spirit was in sharp contrast to that of the
repentant majority, it is inconceivable that the
Apostle should never once from beginning to end
of these four Chapters have written a single sentence
to assure the Majority that his reproaches were
not intended for them, but only for the rebellious
section. Instead of doing this, he again and again
uses language the plain meaning of which would
seem to include the whole community. For instance,
in xi. 10: "As the truth of Christ is in me, no man
shall stop me of this boasting in the regions of
Achaia"; and in xiii. 2 he expressly includes all,
in language which it seems impossible to mistake,
" Being absent now I write to them which heretofore
have sinned and to all the rest, that if I come again
I will not spare." Even if the Apostle had not
used the unmistakable words, Tot? Xot7rot? irdaiv,
the mere fact that he was here referring back to
a threat uttered when his relations with the com
munity were evidently greatly strained, and that he
now expressly declared that his present warning was
a repetition of that threat, would almost of necessity
give to the second threat as wide an application
as had been given to the first.
Some commentators of eminence have employed

THE HYPOTHESIS OF LATER NEWS in
another hypothesis to explain the divergence between
Chapters i.-ix. and x.-xiii. They have Th
supposed that when St. Paul had written Hypothesis
as far as to the end of the ninth Chapter of later
News
fresh news arrived, this time of a dis
tinctly unfavourable character, and that the four
Chapters which close the Epistle, as we have it,
were written in consequence of the receipt of this
information. If this hypothesis be true, and if we are to take
ist Corinthians as indicating by its tone the gravity
of the situation when the Apostle wrote with many
tears out of much affliction and anguish of heart
at the time of the mission of Titus, and 2nd
Corinthians x.-xiii. as indicating the gravity of the
situation which arose in consequence of this new,
development, then must these later tidings have
caused the complete destruction of all the hopes
which had been excited by the result of Titus's
mission, and showed the state of things at Corinth to
be worse than ever. For the tone of 2nd Corinthians
x.-xiii. is beyond all comparison more sorrowful and
more indignant than that of ist Corinthians. Is it
possible that, if news so momentous had arrived,
St. Paul should never have mentioned it, never
alluded to it in any way ; that he should have sent
to the rebellious Church the praise of them which
he had already written, adding on the blame without
explanation, joining the blame to the praise by the

112 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
conjunction Se, and (strangest of all) falling back on
a declaration* which he had made before the
mission of Titus, as if nothing had happened in the
meantime? Klopper admits that it is surprising
(auffallend) that the writer should say nothing of
any unfavourable news, and should instead go back
to the threat which he had uttered during his second
visit to Corinth. For " surprising " I would substitute
"incredible." The fact that 2nd Corinthians xiii. 2
thus goes back to the time of the visit is a strong
proof that, when it was written, there could not have
intervened any change in the situation of such
critical importance as that which had been brought
about (as St. Paul shows us in i.-ix.) by Titus's
mission and by the letter of the Apostle. I am
convinced that the true way of escape from this
difficulty is to assign to Chapters x.-xiii. a date
earlier than that of the mission of Titus.
Another way has, however, been suggested by
a German theologian named Drescher, writing in
the number of Studien und Kritiken for January
1897. Instead of dating 2nd Corinthians xiii. 2
before Titus's mission, he seeks to place the visit
to which it refers after that mission, and thus
assigns to Chapters x.-xiii. a date later than
Chapters i.-ix. While this view is, of course, opposed
to the view of Klopper with regard to the unity
of 2nd Corinthians, it agrees with him in what I .
* Ch. xiii. 2.

THE HYPOTHESIS OF LATER NEWS 113
believe to be a much more important matter ; i.e.
in holding that Titus made an incorrect diagnosis
of the situation at Corinth, and misled St. Paul,
so that the nine Chapters were written under the
influence of an illusion. He quotes with warm
approval Klopper's remarks on this point ; and gives
it as his opinion that St. Paul's choleric tempera
ment was easily carried away, by excessive and
exaggerated alternations of hope and fear, so that he
formed an opinion of the state of things from the
report of Titus which he afterwards found to be
false. The theory of Titus's mistake and St.
Paul's illusion, which is so uncompromisingly put
forward by this writer, is also the logical result of
the hypothesis of the arrival of fresh news of a
contradictory character before the letter was
finished. If Titus's account of the repentance of
the Corinthian Church, as it is given to us by
St. Paul, be correct, it would be impossible, unless
some new subject of dispute had been introduced,
that the old causes of bitterness could have so soon
revived, and in so acute a form ; and it is the old
causes of bitterness, very much intensified but
without any new element, which we find in Chapters
x.-xiii. Another hypothesis intended to explain the
divergence between Chapters i.-ix. and x.-xiii. has
been suggested by a learned, able, and ingenious
scholar, the Rev. Newport White, in a reply which

114 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
he published in the Expositor to two articles of
mine which had appeared in the same periodical
on this subject. His explanation is that "the same
persons are addressed but from totally different
points of view, the motive of the first part of the
letter being the repentance of the Corinthians for
their immorality and profanity, the theme of the
second being the increased encouragement which
at the same time they were giving to the party who
depreciated the apostolic character of St. Paul."
Mr. White has not quoted any passages from these
nine Chapters in support of his theory ; and, as
a matter of fact, there is not a single passage in the
praise, of which they are so full, which makes
express mention of their previous immorality and
profanity. The prominent subject is their ac
knowledgment of St. Paul, whose messenger they
received with fear and trembling. But this is the
very topic which if Mr. White's theory were true
should be conspicuous by its absence. I think that
the theory must rest on the assumption that the
offender, mentioned in the second and seventh of
these Chapters, is to be identified with the incestuous
person whose case is mentioned in ist Corinthians.
If this be so, it is rather unfortunate for the theory
that St. Paul in the seventh Chapter expressly says
that his only reason for referring to the case of this
offender (whoever he was) was the bearing of his
case on the relation of the Corinthian Church to

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 115
himself. " I wrote not for his cause that did the
wrong, nor for his cause that suffered wrong, but
that your earnest care for us might be made manifest
unto you in the sight of God." In Chapters x.-xiii.
the same subject is prominent amid its blame, which
is prominent in the praise of i.-ix. ; but there is one
passage which Mr. White evidently feels to be a
difficulty for his hypothesis. I refer to xii. 21 where
St. Paul says " Lest, when I come again, my God
will humble me among you, and I should mourn
for many that have sinned heretofore, and repented
not of the uncleanness and fornication and lascivious-
ness which they committed."
Mr. White's comment on this passage is " After all
their seeming repentance, and his acceptance of it,
it might well be that disloyalty and impurity went
hand in hand." After this admission it is somewhat
difficult to see how much of the theory is left, or to
comprehend what it was for which St. Paul so
warmly praised them in i.-ix., if "disloyalty and
impurity " were going " hand in hand " among them.

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH
The subject of the visits which were paid by Titus
to Corinth is one which is of capital importance in
this enquiry. Two such visits are spoken of in
Chapters i.-ix. The first being that from which he

116 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
returned to St. Paul with tidings of the repentance
and renewed loyalty of the Corinthian Church ; and
the second the visit on which he had just been sent
in order to forward the business of the collection
at Corinth.
In Chapters x.-xiii. there is also reference made to
a visit of Titus to Corinth, i.e. in xii. 18. "I sum
moned Titus, and with him I sent a brother. Did
Titus make a gain of you? Walked we not by the
same Spirit ? walked we not in the same steps ? "
Two opinions about these visits are held generally
by commentators on these Epistles. First, that the
visit mentioned in xii. 18 is to be identified with
one or other of those spoken of in Chapters i.-ix. ;
secondly, that Titus had been accused of dishonesty,
and that St. Paul is defending him from this charge
when he asks, " Did Titus make a gain of you ? "
While critics agree in these general principles, they
differ as to the visit with which the visit of Chapter
xii. 1 8 is to be identified.
Meyer says that the majority of commentators
identify it with the latter of the visits, i.e. that
mentioned in viii. 6; but he objects that Titus had
only started on this second mission ; so that St. Paul
could not ask, " Did Titus make a gain of you ? " in
reference to a visit which had yet to be paid.
Jiilicher on the other hand, who identifies it with
this latter visit, brings against the other view the
objection that, if Titus had been accused of pecula-

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 117
tion during the first visit, St. Paul would not have
chosen him to arrange the matter of the Collection
in a second visit. This argument against the oppo
site view seems very strong; but I cannot attach
much weight to a positive argument which Jiilicher
advances in favour of his own view — viz. that
the word irapaKaXea-at occurs in viii. 6, and that
irapeKaXecra is found in xii. 18. We must remember
that St Paul had persons who "waited on him con
tinually," and were employed as messengers to the
Churches. Under such conditions phrases such as
the above would become almost technical, being in
constant use ; so that the occurrence of one of them
twice is a very insufficient mark of identification.
But beside the objections which lie against these
views taken separately, there is a further objection to
which they are both exposed, but which does not
seem to have occurred to their advocates. These
identifications are necessarily connected with the
theory that xii. 18 was written after the missions
with which it is identified ; and (as a necessary
corollary from this) that St. Paul in xii. 18 is writing
to persons whom the first of these visits had stirred
into more bitter opposition than before.
To have asked the question "Did Titus make a
gain of you?" of persons who had been already
irritated by his mission, would have been worse than
useless, and would probably have led to the retort
" If he did not do so, it was because we were on our

118 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
guard against him. He tried to deceive us with fair
speeches ; but he failed." Nor is it easy to see how
Titus's abstention from making a gain of the Corin
thians during a short embassy when he was sent to
bring them to submission, could be regarded as a
proof of his honesty. To have attempted it at such
a moment would have been an act of folly so short
sighted that abstention from it would not prove
sterling honesty, but only common prudence ; which
would lead even a designing knave first to catch
them with guile, in the hope that he might afterwards
make a gain of them, when their suspicions had been
laid aside.
Amid these difficulties and conflicting views the
most legitimate and most hopeful way of seeking
to solve the problem is by a careful examination
of the whole paragraph.
We must begin as far back as the twelfth verse
where St. Paul speaks of his work among his converts
during his first visit, and of his having refrained from
receiving any contributions from them for his own
support. This abstinence had been his practice on
both his visits ; but, of course, the chief proof of his
disinterestedness lay in his not having sought any help
from his converts during the two years when he had
laboured among them, and they had confided in him.
He is thus appealing to the memory of earlier and
happier days, and he evidently feels that his readers
must go with him so far. The next objection is

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 119
stated in a way which implies that they have done
this. " But be it so, I did not myself burden you ;
but, . being crafty, I caught you with guile." This
objection he meets by asking the question, "Did
I take advantage of you by any one of them whom
I have sent unto you ? " The form of the question
shows that he confidently expects the answer, " No " ;
that he feels certain that they must admit that those
whom he sent to continue the work which he had
begun, followed the same disinterested course which
he had followed. In the next verse he singles out,
and mentions by name, one of those whom he had
thus sent; and asks "Did Titus make a gain of you?"
He evidently asks this with at least as much con
fidence as that with which he had asked the former
question. He feels that he is driving his accusers
from point to point, and the ov of the next sentence
shows that he is certain that they have already
given the answer he wishes. "Walked we not," he
triumphantly exclaims, "by the same Spirit? Walked
we not in the same steps ? "
The whole context shows that it is to some early
missionary work of Titus among them that he is
referring ; and that Titus's name is singled out by
him from all those whom he had sent to continue
his pastoral work, not because he had been ever
accused by the Corinthians, but because he was the
last man whom they would have thought of accusing.
In mentioning him St. Paul is not touching on a

120 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
new accusation against another person, the intro
duction of which here would have interrupted and
embarrassed the progress of his argument, but he
is giving an effective answer to the original objection
which he has been driving back from point to point.
I believe, therefore, that the only connection which
this passage has with the missions which are spoken
of in the Epistle which was written from Macedonia,
is to be found in the fact that the same confidence
in Titus's influence and popularity which led St. Paul
to single him out here from all his fellow-workers,
decided him to send him as his ambassador on the
difficult mission which we know that he so success
fully discharged.
The nature of the mission which is referred to in
Chapter xii. 18 is not the only question about the
visits of Titus on which I feel constrained to differ
from the popular view. There appears to be a
consensus of opinion among commentators in favour
of the assumption that Titus, when sent to bring the
Corinthians to submission, was at the same time
enjoined to urge them to contribute to the collection
for the poor saints at Jerusalem ; and I believe that
this assumption has caused the seventh verse of the
eighth Chapter to be mistranslated in a manner
which seriously affects its meaning. In that verse
the translators of the Revised Version have followed
the Authorised Version in the insertion of the word
" see." " See that ye abound in this grace also."

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 121
They thus change the verse into a command. They
have no precedent in the New Testament to support
this interpolation. St. Paul, as well as the other
sacred writers, invariably supplies the verb dpaTe or
/SXeVere himself, and does not leave it to his trans
lators to do it for him. Nor is there any precedent
in the Septuagint, nor, as I believe, in classical Greek.
Alford, indeed, attempts to establish one, quoting the
hundred and fifty-sixth line of the CEdipus Coloneus
dXX' Iva twS' iv d(j>6eyKTw. But the best commentators
point out an antecedent for Iva a little further down,
in the hundred and sixty-second line p-eTacrTaQ',
dirofiaOi * and do not so much as mention Alford's
interpretation. In the passage which Alford has adduced, the true
antecedent appears to have escaped his notice, being
out of the proper place of an antecedent, following
the tVa at a considerable interval, instead of preceding
it. But in the passage which we are considering there
is not even this excuse for making any interpolation.
• The passage is as follows : — a\\' iva TC/ib" iv a-
ipBtyKTip /it] irpoTrio-jis v&ttci
iroidevn K&6v$pos 08
KpaTTjp fieihixfav TTOTWV
pei/ian awrpixei,
tCov, i-ive irdfi/iop' , eS <pv\a£cu
Her&o~Ta6' airbpaBt,
Which Jebb thus translates. "But, lest thy rash steps intrude on the
sward of yonder voiceless glade, (be thou well ware of such
trespass, unhappy stranger) retire, withdraw."

122 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
The author has supplied us with an antecedent in the
preceding verse, and has actually taken pains to
furnish us with what may fairly be described as
verbal finger-posts to direct our attention to it, by so
constructing the sixth and seventh verses, that there
is a threefold parallelism between them. We have
wcrirep in the seventh verse answering to KaOws in the
sixth ; ha answering to Iva ; and in the seventh
verse we have /cat iv tovta Tfl xa'/»Tt answering to
Kai tt/v x«/°"/ TavTyv in the sixth, showing that the
'iva of the seventh verse is to be connected with
the same antecedent as the "iva of the sixth, and that
they both refer to the purpose of Titus's second visit.
The aAXa need not cause us any difficulty ; for it is
employed a little earlier in this very Epistle (i. 9) to
express an ascensive transition, or gradation, and is
there correctly translated by "yea" in the Revised
Version. If we adopt this rendering here the two
verses will yield a clear and connected sense. " I
summoned Titus, that as he had made a beginning,
so he might accomplish in you this grace also ; yea
that, as ye abound in everything, in faith, and utter
ance, and in all diligence, and in your love towards us
so ye may abound in this grace also." The seventh
verse appears to have been added by St. Paul in
order to avoid any appearance of depreciating the
work which Titus had already accomplished among
the Corinthian Christians, by the description of it in
the sixth verse as a beginning. The seventh verse

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 123
shows how much was included in that irpoevrip^aTO ;
substituting for it the enumeration of the graces
which had already been accomplished in them.
The parallelism of the verses shows not only that
the Iva of the seventh must have the same antecedent
as the Iva of the sixth ; but also that TavTtjv in the
sixth, must have the same force as TavTfl in the
seventh. This is strenuously denied by Alford. He admits
that TavTfl in the seventh verse must be taken to
be emphatic ; but warns his readers against making
Tavrtjv emphatic in the sixth ; insisting that the
Kai does not belong to it there, and that it does not
mean " this grace also as well as other graces " ;
though he acknowledges that in the seventh verse
the /cat does belong to the TavTfl and that the two
words are to be interpreted in the very way which
he forbids in the sixth verse.
The reason for this anxiety to break the connection
between the two verses, and to establish a distinction
between them, is obvious. Translators and com
mentators who believed that ist Corinthians was the
epistle which Titus was sent to explain and enforce
in the earlier of the two visits spoken of here could
not regard any interpretation as admissible which
would show that the furtherance of the collection for
Jerusalem was the purpose of the later visit only,
and formed no part of Titus's commission in the
earlier visit.

124 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
When, however, we are no longer tied to this
assumption, we may ask the question, Is there any
antecedent improbability that there was this distinc
tion between the purpose of the two visits, which
St. Paul appears to mark for us, when we allow him
to speak for himself? I believe that there is no such
improbability. It is rather the contrary supposition
which is unlikely. Is it probable that the Apostle,
who was so jealous of his own independence, that he
would not accept assistance even from loyal Churches
which reverenced him as their founder and apostle,
would when he was sending an ambassador to bring
rebels to repentance, commission him at the same
time to obtain money contributions towards an object,
which, though not connected with St. Paul's material
wants, was nevertheless known to be one of his
favourite projects, and likely to increase his influence
in the mother Church of Christendom? Such a
course would have been as inconsistent with wise
diplomacy as with the self-respect which formed
so marked a feature in St. Paul's character. Pru
dence would suggest in such a crisis to attempt one
thing at a time, and not to mix up objects so incon
gruous as reducing a rebellious Church to obedience,
and asking it for money. But, apart altogether from
considerations of diplomacy, I believe that St. Paul
would have died before he condescended thus to sue
to rebels for what might be represented as a favour
to himself. Nor is the passage before us the only one

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 125
in his writings which shows that his methods in an
emergency of this kind were very different from those
which have been attributed to him.
The Churches of Galatia appear to have been
among the first (perhaps the very first) to receive
directions about the collection for the poor The Epjstie
at Jerusalem. We learn from ist Cor. xvi. 1 to the
that they had previously received the order Galatians.
which is there repeated to the Corinthians. When,
however, the Epistle to the Romans was written,
as St. Paul was about to start for Jerusalem with
the contributions of the Gentile Churches ; the
Churches of Macedonia and Achaia were mentioned
as contributors, but the Churches of Galatia were
passed over in silence. This silence is not, of course,
conclusive proof that they were not to be numbered
among the contributors, though it is rather ominous ;
but it derives additional significance from the fact
that there is a corresponding silence about the
collection in the Epistle to the Galatians, which is
shown by very strong internal evidence to have
been written shortly before the Epistle to the
Romans.* * When the Epistle to the Romans was written the mind of the
writer was evidently full of the same ideas which we find in his Epistle
to the Galatians. In Galatians iii. 12 we read, " And the law is not of
faith : but, The man that doeth them shall live in them " ; and in
Romans x. 5, "But Moses describeth the righteousness of the law,
That the man which doeth those things shall live in them." In
Galatians iii. 22, " But the Scripture hath concluded all under sin that
the promise by faith of Jesus Christ might be given to them that

126 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
The Galatian Epistle closes without any directions
about the collection, or any renewal of the invitation
to contribute which had been made to them some
time before.
The Apostle does indeed mention in Chapter ii. 10
his zeal for the cause of the poor of Jerusalem, but
he does not ask the Galatians to help him in the
good work. Near the close of the Epistle, in the
place where a reference to this collection might
have been expected, we have instead a reference to
the duty of providing for their own local clergy,
which, of course, could not be regarded as any
personal compliment to St Paul ; but the direction
on this subject is given with a studied brevity and
severity of tone which presents a striking contrast to
the affectionate appeal at the close of 3rd Corinthians,
or even to that which is found in the last Chapter of
ist Corinthians. In Galatians we have only the brief
command (Gal. vi. 6) " Let him that is taught in the
word communicate unto him that teacheth in all good
believe " ; and in Romans xi. 32, " But God hath concluded them all in
unbelief that He might have mercy upon all." In some passages we
not only have the same ideas expressed in almost the same language
but also occurring in the same order. We may compare Galatians
iii. 14, 15, 29 with Romans iv. 13, 14, 16. Compare also Galatians
iv. 6, 7 with Romans viii. 14, 15, 16, 17. Resemblances such as these
between these two Epistles cannot have been caused by any resem
blance between the occasions of the two letters ; for St. Paul had no
controversy with the Romans, and his Epistle to them was of the
nature of a treatise ; while the Epistle to the Galatians is a vehemently
controversial letter.

THE VISITS OF TITUS TO CORINTH 127
things " ; followed immediately by the stern warning
" Be not deceived ; God is not mocked : for what
soever a man soweth, that shall he also reap."
Bishop Wordsworth in his Commentary founds
upon this silence an argument for assigning to the
Epistle to the Galatians a date earlier than the
inception of St Paul's plans about the collection.
The advocates of the later date for this Epistle, while
they successfully reply to the Bishop's other argu
ments, attempt no answer to this, although he dwells
upon it at considerable length. It is indeed not
easy to imagine what possible reply could be made
to it by critics who believed that Titus was com
missioned to make arrangements at Corinth for this
very collection, when the rebellion there was at its
height ; and that the affectionate appeals in the later
references to this subject were made while the
Corinthians were challenging St. Paul's authority
and impugning the disinterestedness of his motives,
and that they were inserted by him in the same
epistle in which he replies to these taunts by de
claring that no man " in the regions of Achaia shall
stop him of his boasting" that he has never been
beholden to them for any pecuniary help.
But the objection of Bishop Wordsworth would
never have had any force had not the latter part
of the stern second epistle been placed at the close
of the Epistle which was written after the reconcilia
tion had taken place, and when Titus had been

128 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
despatched to Corinth on his final mission to arrange
about the collection, as he had during his previous
visit arranged the still more important matters which
had been entrusted to him. At the close of 2nd
Corinthians (A.V. II. ch. x.-xiii.) the collection for
Jerusalem is as completely ignored as it is at the
close of Galatians ; but the union of two manuscripts
has obscured this fact by placing the directions which
belonged to another letter in their present anomalous
position in the middle of the composite epistle. Upon
our theory they come in their natural place at the
end of the third Epistle (A.V. II. viii. ix.).
In this way we can also explain the otherwise
perplexing circumstance that St. Paul when he wrote
to Corinth after the reconciliation was evidently
doubtful whether the Corinthians were ready, although
at some previous period he had boasted that they
had been ready a year ago. It would appear from
the directions originally given that each man was
to be his own treasurer for the money which he laid
by each week, and that diocesan treasurers were not
to take charge of the contributions before St. Paul's
arrival at Corinth. " Upon the first day of the week
let each one of you lay by hipi in store as he may
prosper, that collections may not be made after my
coming. And when I arrive, whomsoever ye shall
approve, them will I send with letters to Jerusalem."
Under conditions such as these St. Paul might
naturally fear that during the period of anarchy and

ST. PAUL'S DIPLOMACY 129
confusion which intervened, the collection might
have suffered as well as other still more important
interests ; and that many individual members of
the Church, without being conscious of any dis
honesty, might have dissipated part of the store
which they had previously laid by, looking on it
as their own money. Thus, though he had reason
to believe that they were ready a year ago, he might
not be certain, (and indeed he evidently did not feel
certain) that they were ready now.
The Epistle to the Galatians may also help us
in another way, by giving us an idea of what the
opening of 2nd Corinthians would have
been like if it had been preserved for us. f1gt°IIpacyi
A great deal has been said about St. Paul's
diplomacy in connection with the Epistles to the
Corinthians, and it has been suggested that the
extraordinary combination of praise and blame,
which has been produced by the fusion of two
Epistles in the canonical 2nd Corinthians, is to be
explained by his habit of diplomatically softening
censure, in saying something complimentary before
hand. That St Paul had diplomatic skill is certain ; but
there are two uses to which such skill may be put.
It may be used, and is too often used, to deceive, to
convey false impressions of the speaker's meaning,
and make his sentiments appear different from what
they really are. But it has a worthier use, and one

130 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
which may be of the greatest importance. It may
be employed, not for the purpose of giving a false
impression, but for the directly opposite purpose
of giving a true impression of the thoughts and
feelings of the speaker, guarding skilfully against
misunderstanding, and removing it when it already
exists. I believe that it was to the latter of these
two purposes, and to that alone, that Paul directed
his diplomatic skill, whether he had to do with
individuals or with Churches. When he was in the
power of a governor whose public life was full of
oppression and injustice, as was his private life
of profligacy, the diplomacy of Paul did not lead
him to direct his discourse to those points which
would be least likely to give offence, but rather to
strike home at the besetting sins of the man with
whom he had to deal ; so that when Felix sent for
him, and heard him concerning the faith in Christ,
it was of righteousness, temperance, and judgment
to come, that he reasoned till Felix trembled, and
cut short the interview.
In dealing with Churches too, when he was
on the whole pleased with a Church but had
some matters to censure, the first Epistle to the
Corinthians shows us what his procedure was. He
first tells them in earnest words how he thanks
God for what has been wrought in them, and then
earnestly entreats them to unity, telling them that
he has heard that there are divisions among them.

ST. PAUL'S DIPLOMACY 131
But the Epistle to the Galatians shows us that
when St. Paul was seriously displeased with a
Church he did not preface his censure with com
pliments. Even the opening sentence of that
Epistle has an ominous ring, and prepares us for
something startling to follow. "Paul an Apostle,
not of men, neither by man, but by Jesus Christ
and God who raised him from the dead " ; then,
after bestowing on his readers his blessing, but
without a word of preliminary praise, the Apostle
in the sixth verse of the first Chapter goes straight
at the subject of which his mind was full. The
Epistle ends with a blessing, as it began with a
blessing, but it also ends, as it began, without a
single compliment, or a word of praise.
The Epistle to the Galatians presents the true
parallel, and the only parallel which we possess, to
the indignation, the vehemence, and the pathos of
which 2nd Corinthians x.-xiii. is full, and the parallel
which it affords gives us no encouragement to attri
bute to St. Paul the habit of softening his censure
beforehand by compliments so inconsistent and even
contradictory as would be the declaration " I rejoice
therefore that I have confidence in you in all things "
(Chap. vii. 16) ; if he was about to write in the
very same letter " I fear lest, when I come, I shall
not find you such as I would, and that I shall be
found unto you such as ye would not" (Chap.
xii. 20).

132 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
It is indeed difficult to see what diplomacy there
would be in combining statements so contradictory
as these, statements which would afford such material
for the accusation of saying "Yea yea and nay nay";
or what could be the object of explaining that to
spare them he had not come again unto Corinth, and
of going on to show that this was not merely a
postponement but an abandonment of his threat,*
if the writer intended to repeat later on with
earnest emphasis the very threat which he had can
celled " I have warned, and I warn, as when I was
present on the second visit, so also when I am absent
now, to those who have sinned before and to all the
rest, that, if I come again I will not spare." If the
writer had changed his mind in the interval, a very
moderate amount of diplomatic skill would have sug
gested omitting the sentence in which the threat had
been cancelled, if changed circumstances had rendered
it necessary to fall back upon the warning he had
intended to revoke.
Nor could a diplomatist like St. Paul (who in the
nine Chapters takes such pains to explain any state
ment or act which might appear to be inconsistent)
have left standing the twice repeated assurance
that he was not going to commend himself again,
* As he does by the words which follow, "And I determined this for
myself that I would not again come to you with sorrow ; for if I make
you sorry, who is he then that maketh me glad but the same that is
made sorry by me ? "

ST. PAUL'S DIPLOMACY 133
if he had found it necessary to commend him
self (as he does in Chapters x.-xiii.) at far greater
length and in far stronger terms than he had done
in ist Corinthians. He would indeed have a perfect
right to cancel the assurance, if the situation had
changed from what it was when he wrote it ; but the
commonest diplomatic prudence would have sug
gested that it was not advisable to despatch to the
Corinthians, without the slightest explanation, the
promise and the falsification of the promise by
the same messenger, in the same letter. Nor can
either the one or the other have been an oversight.
They are both too prominent in the letter to admit
of this explanation. In the nine Chapters we not
only have the assurance that he is not going again
to commend himself, but (as we have already
seen) we have in the first Chapter a careful ex
planation of his previous self-commendation, and a
declaration that he knows that the Corinthians
acknowledge the truth of all that he there has said.
His boasting in the four chapters is equally de
liberate, for he calls attention to it both by his
constant use of the word KavxdaOai, and also by
an express statement in xii. 11, where he employs
the same verb o-vvlo-Tacrdai which he employs when
assuring them that he will not again commend him
self ; the reason too which he here assigns is in direct
contradiction to the assurance in i. 12 that they do
acknowledge him and acknowledge all that he says.

134 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
If the declaration in xii. n was written before the
reconciliation effected by Titus and the explanation
in i. 12 after, there is of course no confusion; but
if they were both written after that reconciliation
and sent in the same letter it would be impossible
to suggest any explanation of a contradiction the in
tentional character of which is nevertheless apparent
from the employment of the same terms avvitrTaardai
and kovxw'S in the contradictory statements.
There is also a grave psychological difficulty in the
supposition that indignation and anguish so intense
and vehement could have been so long and so com
pletely suppressed through nine Chapters; and that
a writer like St. Paul could have maintained during
all that time a frame of mind so opposite to those
feelings as that which finds utterance in the earnest
expressions of approval, of joy, and of thanksgiving
with which these Chapters are filled. We have seen
how in his Epistle to the Galatians he plunged at
once into the subject of which his heart was full ;
but even in ist Corinthians, where there is no trace
of such vehement emotion, he begins early in the
first Chapter the discussion of the points which he
wishes to censure, and continues the consideration
of them till, in the beginning of the seventh Chapter,
he turns to the points which have been suggested
by the letter from the Corinthian Church.

EVIDENCE INTERNAL & EXTERNAL 135

INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL EVIDENCE
Among the proofs which I have laid before the
reader, I attach most weight to the references in
the nine Chapters, (which I have described as
3rd Corinthians) to corresponding passages in the
four Chapters, and to the circumstance that in those
references, the Apostle speaks in the past tense of
acts and plans which in the corresponding passages
in the four Chapters are present or future ; and that
this time order is never reversed. These proofs
derive additional weight from the circumstance that
the three references in the nine Chapters are all
to be found in the very paragraph in which St. Paul
expressly refers to the Epistle which he had so
lately written to Corinth, and one of them is to be
found in the very sentence in which he makes this
express mention of his previous letter. We have
also seen that all the marks which could have been
expected beforehand to be present in documents
originally separate, which had been by mistake
joined together, are actually present here ; we have
a sharp contrast of tone, and (a circumstance which
is not to be confounded with the preceding one, and
which by no means follows from it), we have, at
the very point where this change of tone begins,
a break not only in the sense, but also in the syntax ;

136 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
for we have a copulative conjunction which cannot
be connected with anything that has preceded it,
as the text now stands ; and we have an objection
alluded to as if it had been spoken of already, yet
for which nothing that has gone before prepares us.
A further indication that there has been some dis
placement of the text is the anomalous position of
the Chapters which deal with the subject of the
collection, coming before the Chapters, which, if the
present composite document were really one epistle,
must necessarily be regarded as the most important
as well as the most painful part of it, instead of the
natural and appropriate position, which they occupy
in ist Corinthians, immediately before the final
salutations, and after the writer has disposed of all
the important questions of doctrine and discipline
which have come before him. Here on the contrary
the references to the collection come immediately
before the sudden break in sense and syntax, which
as the document now stands, ushers in the four
Chapters. Additional light on this point seems to be
supplied by the sixth and seventh verses of the eighth
Chapter which, (taken in their connection with each
other), plainly teach us that the collection formed no
part of Titus's commission when he was sent to
explain and enforce the message of the Epistle which
the Apostle had written to Corinth during the revolt
against his authority, and that it was only when the
Corinthian Church acknowledged his claims and re-

INTERNAL EVIDENCE 137
turned to their loyalty that Titus was sent back with
a commission to encourage the work of the collection
among them.
It is not surprising that translators and comment
ators should have endeavoured by an interpolation
in verse 7 to avoid a translation of the two verses
which would lead to this conclusion, for it is sharply
opposed, not only to the assumption that the epistle
brought by Titus was ist Corinthians with its express
directions about the collection, but also to the unity
of 2nd Corinthians, as it is found in our Canon.
In that document, as we have it now, further direc
tions about this contribution enforced by earnest
and affectionate appeals seem to be followed by
a long and indignant vindication of the writer's
authority, and of his honesty and purpose, which
can leave no doubt in the mind of any attentive
reader that both the one and the other had been
impugned. The personal character of these epistles, and their
references to recent events such as the visits to
Corinth of Timothy and Titus, have furnished us
with additional and independent tests. Owing to
their references to these personal matters they would
be full of unexpected pitfalls for a false theory,
which had been hastily constructed for a one-sided
consideration of some of their features. Yet, instead
of this being the case here, it is, on the contrary, the
traditional theory whose advocates have found these

138 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
references full of difficulties ; while we have seen how
these difficulties one by one disappear when the four
Chapters are recognised as part of an epistle earlier
in date than the nine.
Nor are these the only difficulties which are thus
removed. It has been admitted, (as we have seen),
by Klopper, a leading advocate of the theory of the
priority to the date of ist Corinthians of the inter
mediate visit of St. Paul to Corinth, that it is sur
prising that this visit occupies so prominent a place
in the four Chapters of 2nd Corinthians while it is
never mentioned in ist Corinthians. For this per
plexing difficulty we can now furnish the simple
solution, that the visit is not mentioned in ist
Corinthians because it had not taken place when
that epistle was written ; and that it is prominent
in 2nd Corinthians because that was the first epistle
which was sent to Corinth by St. Paul after his return
from his visit. It also explains the otherwise inex
plicable circumstance that the repentance of the
majority of the Corinthian Christians is never once
mentioned, or so much as hinted at in the four
Chapters, though St. Paul would have known so well
how to ground on it an effective appeal to the rebels
not to dissociate themselves from their fellow Church
men who had returned to their allegiance, and might
also have reminded them that this circumstance
would, if they remained impenitent, be an aggrava
tion of their guilt.

EXTERNAL EVIDENCE 139
We have also seen that an examination of the
paragraph in which Paul addresses the minority,
shows, not only by the gentleness and delicacy with
which he dissuaded them from pressing for further
punishment of the offender, but still more by the
great importance which he evidently attached to
their forgiveness of his offence, that they must have
been, in his judgment, persons of a very different,
and indeed totally opposite character to that which
has been commonly attributed to them.

EXTERNAL EVIDENCE
We have now to enquire what is to be set in the
other scale to outweigh this cumulative evidence
derived from so many independent sources. There
is apparently in many minds an impression that in
the opposite scale must be placed the whole weight
of external evidence which is derived from all the
manuscripts, and all the versions of this epistle,
and that this mass of opposing external evidence
must outweigh any amount of internal evidence,
however seemingly convincing.
There is, in reality, no conflict of evidence here.
Evidence in favour of an occurrence cannot be
disproved by the evidence of a thousand trustworthy
witnesses who visited the spot without seeing
anything, if their visit was considerably later than

HO SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
the date of the alleged occurrence. There is not
a shred of evidence in any of the manuscripts,
versions, or early Christian writers, for the existence
of an Epistle to the Corinthians prior to our
ist Corinthians, yet this apparently overwhelming
negative evidence does not prevent the majority of
Biblical critics from believing that such an epistle
once existed, on the strength of a single allusion
in ist Corinthians v. 9. The business of later scribes
was simply to copy the manuscript of each epistle
as it was delivered to the Church at large by the
local Church to which it was originally addressed.
If a mistake had been made in the first copy, and
the original had been destroyed, they had no means
of getting behind the copy to correct the mistake.
To demand from early manuscripts or Christian
writers a direct answer to the present question
would be to commit the absurdity of supposing
that, if a mistake of this kind had been made, the
men of that day must have been aware of it ;
whereas, if they had been aware of the mistake, it
would, of course, not have been made, or would have
been corrected. Indirectly, however, external testi
mony might conceivably throw a formidable weight
into the opposite scale by showing that 2nd Corin
thians was in the hands of the Christian Church at
so early a date as to render it improbable that a
mistake of this kind could have been made at
Corinth, when the recollection of the circumstances

EXTERNAL EVIDENCE 141
under which the manuscript letters had been received
by the Church must have been preserved by some of
its members.
Evidence of this kind might also be fairly assumed
to show that ist and 2nd Corinthians must have
been published by the Corinthian Church and
circulated in the Church at large about the same
time, and without apparent hesitation ; which would
be improbable if some of the manuscripts were
perfect, and others in a mutilated condition. If, on
the other hand, there is evidence which strongly
suggests that 2nd Corinthians must have been given
to the world considerably later than ist Corinthians,
this will favour the theory before us in two ways :
First it diminishes or altogether removes the im
probability that a mistake of this kind could have
been made; which is to many minds the strongest
objection. Of course the later the date of pub
lication, the less likely would it be that those in
authority at Corinth would remember the circum
stances under which the manuscripts had originally
been received from the Apostle. But indications
of this kind would also in another way supply an
important link in the evidence. Delay in the
publication of a letter, the greater part of which
was so complimentary to the Corinthian Church,
and so full of affection to them, would be difficult
to explain except by the supposition that there
was something amiss with the manuscript.

142 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
There is only one Christian work external to the
Canon of Scripture which is sufficiently early to
furnish evidence on this question. Fortunately, how
ever, this one work is addressed to the same Church
to which these Epistles were sent. It is also of
considerable length ; and contains abundant proof
that its author was a diligent student of St. Paul's
writings as well as of the other Scriptures.

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT OF ROME TO
THE CORINTHIANS
This epistle was written in the name of the
Church of Rome to the Church of Corinth. It is
referred to by Hermas, and is recognised by He-
gesippus, who speaks of it in connection with his
visit to Corinth, and as Dr. Salmon remarks,*
probably found it in use there ; as for some genera
tions it was read in the Corinthian Church from time
to time on Sundays. Bishop Lightfoot has drawn up
a table of parallel passages showing the copious use
which Polycarp made of this letter,! and the be
ginning and ending of the letter of the Church of
Smyrna about Polycarp's martyrdom are modelled
after it. Patrick Young, the first editor (1633),
* Introduction to the New Testament.
t S. Clement of Rome, by Lightfoot, vol. i. p. 49.

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT 143
placed its date about the close of the reign of
Domitian, or immediately after (A.D. 95-6). Bishop
Lightfoot agreed with this, and remarked that it has
so commended itself to critics of various schools and
has now become so general that it may be regarded
as the received opinion ; though some critics have
placed it earlier and others later. Harnack in his
Chronologie der Altchristlichen Literatur (1897)
places it between 93 A.D. and 95 A.D.
It is admitted by Lightfoot and other leading
critics that this epistle of Clement does not contain
a single reference to 2nd Corinthians. This fact
shows, at any rate, that the only writer whose date
is early enough to enable him to be a witness on
this disputed point, does not furnish any external
evidence which can be placed in the scale against
the internal evidence which has been adduced. We
have, however, to enquire whether an examination
of the contents of Clement's letter will, or will not,
warrant a conclusion which shall go beyond this
negative result.
In estimating the force of an argument, which,
from the silence of a writer about a particular book
of Scripture, infers his ignorance of that
book, there are several considerations The Ar£u"
ment from
which have to be attended to. We have siIence_
to consider the mental characteristics of
the later writer, particularly his fondness for quota
tion, or the reverse ; the character of the book of

144 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
Scripture in question, and its appropriateness to the
subject of which the later writer treats ; then we
must take account of the circumstances of the
persons whom the later writer is addressing and
their relation to the book of Scripture, and to its
author ; and, of course, we must also take into con
sideration the amount of the writings which we
possess from the pen of the later writer. I believe
that careful attention to these considerations will
show that the argument from silence here is one of
altogether exceptional strength.
Clement's epistle shows him to have been a great
student of Scripture ; as Bishop Lightfoot has re
marked, "his knowledge of the Septuagint version
is very thorough and intimate. He quotes profusely."
With regard to the New Testament, Lightfoot calls
attention to Clement's "comprehensiveness" which,
as he remarks, "is tested by the range of the
Apostolic writings with which the Author is con
versant and of which he makes use. . . . The influence
of St Peter's First Epistle may be traced in more
than one passage, while expressions scattered up and
down Clement's letter recall the language of several
of St. Paul's Epistles belonging to different epochs
and representing different types in his literary career.
Nor is the comprehensiveness of Clement's letter
restricted to a recognition of the two leading
Apostles, Peter and Paul. It is so largely inter
spersed with thoughts and expressions from the

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT 145
Epistle to the Hebrews, that many ancient writers
attributed this canonical epistle to Clement. Again
the writer shows himself conversant with the type
of doctrine and modes of expression characteristic
of the Epistle of St. James."* Dr. Lightfoot finally
sums up by saying, "We have thus a full recog
nition of four out of the five types of Apostolic
teaching, which confront us in the canonical writings.
If the fifth, of which St. John is the exponent, is not
clearly affirmed in Clement's letter, the reason is,
that the Gospel and Epistles of this Apostle had
not yet been written, or if written had not been
circulated beyond his own immediate band of personal
disciples." While, however, Clement's Epistle is in many
places interspersed with thoughts and expressions
from the writings of St. Paul and from the Epistle
to the Hebrews, there is only one Book of the New
Testament which he expressly names, and that, as
we might have anticipated, was a letter of St. Paul
to the very Church which Clement was addressing.
"Take up,"f he writes, "the epistle of the blessed
Paul the Apostle. What wrote he first unto you in
the beginning of the Gospel ? Of a truth he charged
you in the Spirit concerning himself and Cephas and
Apollos, because then even then ye had made parties.
Yet that making parties brought less sin upon you ;
* Lightfoot, St. Clement of Rome, vol. i. pp. 95-96.
t I quote from Bishop Lightfoot's translation.

146 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
for ye were partisans of Apostles that were highly
reputed, and of a man approved in their sight. But
now, mark ye, who they are that have perverted
you and diminished the glory of your renowned love
for the brotherhood ? It is shameful, dearly beloved,
yes, utterly shameful, and unworthy of your conduct
in Christ, that it should be reported that the very
stedfast and ancient Church of the Corinthians for
the sake of one or two persons maketh sedition
against its presbyters."
' It is not surprising that Clement writing to the
Corinthians should desire thus to mark and empha
sise his quotation from an epistle which the great
Apostle of the Gentiles had addressed to that very
Church; nor is it surprising that he should have
chosen the particular passage which he has referred
to, if he had only that one Epistle to the Corinthians
in his own hands. For the party spirit which is
rebuked in that passage is perhaps the nearest
approach to a parallel which is to be found in
ist Corinthians to the rebellion and sedition which
he himself had to rebuke in the same Church now.
He shows indeed that he recognises that the parallel
is not a close one, and his argument is an argument
a fortiori; if St. Paul rebuked you for party spirit
how much more disgraceful is sedition and rebellion.
Now Chapters x.-xiii. of 2nd Corinthians are full of
rebukes of the Corinthians for sedition and rebellion
— the very sins which Clement had to censure ; and

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT 147
if it be objected to me that he might from policy
have avoided quoting such severe rebukes as are to
be found in those chapters ; he might at least have
found in Chapters i.-ix. warm praise of the same
Church for their repentance and submission, of which
he might have made effective use in his appeal to
them. Yet in the sixty-five Chapters of Clement's
epistle there is not a single sentence which indicates
that he had ever heard that the Corinthians had before
his own time rebelled against those set over them,
or that they had ever repented of their rebellion ;
though he tells the Corinthians that he " has handled
every argument."
In addition to the express reference to ist Cor
inthians which I have quoted, Clement in other
passages in his epistle shows that either his mind
was saturated with the language of that epistle, or
that he had it open beside him while he wrote and
purposely interwove its phraseology with his own.
In the forty-ninth Chapter, for instance, he has
occasion to mention charity, and at once, his lan
guage becomes coloured by the thirteenth Chapter
of ist Corinthians. There are many other instances
in his letter. There is at the same time no trace
to be found in it of the influence of any passage
which is peculiar to 2nd Corinthians. St. Paul in
2nd Corinthians iii. 3 derives a metaphor from
Proverbs viii. 3 which he employs in a passage
bestowing high praise on the Corinthians. In

148 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
the passage from which he quotes the Septuagint
renders the Hebrew inaccurately, using 7rXaTos to
express the tables of the heart, though irXdg is the
natural equivalent of the Hebrew. Bishop Lightfoot
thought that it was not improbable that the "ex
pression arose from a very early corruption of the
LXX. text, a confusion of irXaTos and irXaKos"
St. Paul in 2nd Corinthians iii. 3 avoids the incorrect
LXX. rendering, and translates directly from the
Hebrew, using the term iv irXa£l instead of iirl
Ta irXaTrj. Clement, having occasion in his second
Chapter to quote this very sentence from Proverbs,
does it in a passage which contains no reference to
the passage in 2nd Corinthians, and he quotes the
incorrect Septuagint rendering, completely ignoring
the correct translation of St. Paul.
It is only by reading Clement's letter and by
noting how frequently he touches on topics for which
apt illustrations and arguments are to be found in
both divisions of 2nd Corinthians, that anyone can
gain an adequate idea of the extent of the im
probability that he could have refrained from making
a single allusion to it from beginning to end of the
sixty-five Chapters into which his long letter is
divided. The force of an argument from silence is
(more than other arguments) cumulative. The
omission of a reference in any one passage where
we might think it suitable, may prove nothing or
very little ; but it is not so when the passages are

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT 149
multiplied indefinitely, and when the document to
which appeal might have been made is an earlier
epistle to the same Church to which the later epistle
is addressed, and an epistle by the revered founder
of that Church, revered alike by the writer and the
readers of the later letter. The improbability is still
further increased by Clement's fondness for quotation
and illustration, and by his evident desire (to use his
own words) to " handle every argument."
Among these many passages, however, there is one
which is too remarkable to be passed over. In the
fifth Chapter Clement wishes to show the Corinthians
how " the most righteous pillars of the Church were
persecuted, and contended even unto death " ; and
after speaking of Peter he turns to the consideration
of the labours and sufferings of Paul. "By reason
of jealousy and strife Paul by his example pointed
out the prize of patient endurance. After that he
had been seven times in bonds, had been driven into
exile, had been stoned, had preached in the East and
in the West, had won the noble renown which was
the reward of his faith."
In 2nd Corinthians we have a now well-known
enumeration of St. Paul's labours and sufferings
made by himself. "Of the Jews five times received
I forty stripes save one : thrice was I beaten with
rods, once was I stoned, thrice I suffered shipwreck,
a night and a day I have been in the deep ; in
journeyings often, in perils of rivers, in perils of rob-

ISO SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
bers, in perils by mine own countrymen, in perils by
the heathen, in perils in the City, in perils in the
wilderness, in perils in the sea, in perils among false
brethren ; in weariness and painfulness, in hunger
and thirst, in fastings often, in cold and nakedness.
Beside those things that are without, that which
cometh upon me daily, the care of all the Churches.
Who is weak, and I am not weak ? Who is offended
and I burn not? ... In Damascus the governor
of the City under Aretas the king kept the city
of the Damascenes with a garrison, desirous to
apprehend me : and through a window in a basket
was I let down by the wall, and escaped his
hands." Is it conceivable that a man like Clement, when he
wished to call the attention of his readers to the
greatness of St. Paul's labours and sufferings, would
have totally ignored so striking an enumeration of
them, if he knew that it had been received by the
same Church to which he was writing, from St. Paul
himself, and had by them been published and dis
seminated among the Churches of Christendom ?
Surely it was an occasion on which he might be
expected to say " Take up the epistle of the blessed
Paul the Apostle," if he himself had ever previously
held that epistle in his hands.
In the closing paragraphs of his letter Clement
speaks to the Corinthians of his solicitude for them,
and of the joy which he will feel if he receives from

THE EPISTLE OF ST. CLEMENT 151
them a favourable response. " For ye will give us
great joy and gladness if ye render obedience unto
the things written by us through the Holy Spirit,
and root out the unrighteous anger of your jealousy,
according to the entreaty which we have made for
peace and concord in this letter. And we have also
sent faithful and prudent men that have walked
among us from youth to old age unblameably, who
shall also be witnesses between you and us, and this
we have done that ye might know that we have had,
and still have every solicitude that ye should be
speedily at peace. . . ." " Now send ye back
speedily unto us our messengers Claudius Ephebus
and Valerius Bito, together with Fortunatus also, in
peace and with joy, to the end that they may the
more quickly report the peace and concord which
is prayed for and earnestly desired by us, that we
also may the more speedily rejoice over your good
order." The position in which Clement at that moment
found himself was one to which 3rd Corinthians
contains a parallel of the most striking kind. It
tells how Paul had, like Clement, looked anxiously
for the return of a messenger whom he had
despatched to the very same Church ; so anxiously
that he had no rest in his spirit because he did
not find his messenger at Troas, and how he had
pressed on from thence into Macedonia that he
might sooner receive the report which he expected

152 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
that Titus would bring from Corinth. Clement's
anxiety was, no doubt, less overpowering than Paul's
had been. But his letter shows clearly that he was
anxious, and to a man like Clement in anxiety
about the result of his letter the parallel could not
have failed to be an intensely interesting one, and
a parallel of the happiest omen. Nor would the
interest of the parallel have been merely sentimental.
The portion of the Epistle in which St. Paul com
mends the repentance of the Corinthians, and speaks
of the joy which the announcement of it had caused
him, would have furnished Clement with arguments
of the most telling kind. What effective use might
he not have made of such a passage as vii. 9 " Now
I rejoice not that ye were made sorry, but that ye
sorrowed to repentance ; for ye were sorry after a
godly manner, that ye might receive damage by us
in nothing. For godly sorrow worketh repentance
unto salvation not to be repented of ! "
This is a parallel of no ordinary kind. There is
indeed no other book of the New Testament which
bears any comparison with this epistle in the amount
of material which it supplies for enforcing Clement's
appeal. Yet he, who was so fond of quotation, never
once quoted it, and persistently ignored in his letter
every circumstance about St. Paul or the Corinthian
Church of which it is our sole source of information.
There is not a line to show us that he had ever heard
of the mission of Titus, or of the rebellion of the

THE PROPOSED SOLUTION 153
Corinthians, or of their repentance and of St. Paul
rejoicing over their return to allegiance.
Corinth, both from its nearness to Rome and from
the fact of its being a Roman Colony, was in such
close communication with the Imperial City that it
would be impossible for an epistle of St. Paul which
had been published by the Church of Corinth to be
unknown to the Church of Rome, or to have totally
escaped the notice of so diligent a student of Scrip
ture and so ardent an admirer of St. Paul as the
Bishop of Rome was ; unless, indeed, it had been
published very recently. We may also, I think,
dismiss the notion that it could have been published
shortly before Clement wrote his letter, for amid the
confusion and anarchy which then prevailed in the
Church of Corinth it is most improbable that the
Corinthians should have had either leisure or in
clination to occupy themselves with editing such an
epistle.

THE PROBABILITY OR IMPROBABILITY OF
THE PROPOSED SOLUTION
I have never seen it expressly stated as extremely
improbable that the Corinthian Church can have
made the mistake of joining two epistles together
in the copies which they issued to the Christian
world. I believe, nevertheless, that this a priori

154 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
assumption is the stronge'st support of the tradi
tional theory, and that, therefore, no examination of
this question can be regarded as complete without an
examination of this supposition. The conclusion
which the evidence appears to me to suggest is this,
that the beginning of the epistle which I have desig
nated as 2nd Corinthians and the end of that which I
have spoken of as 3rd Corinthians had from some
cause perished, and that the manuscripts being thus
imperfect were not given to the world when our ist
Corinthians was published ; but that after a con
siderable interval the suggestion was made by some
one that the mutilated manuscripts were really parts
of one and the same letter, and that, this suggestion
having found favour, they were copied and sent to
other Christian Churches in their present form.
If we analyse this conclusion, we may divide it
into two parts, which, for the sake of greater clear
ness, it may be well to consider separately one at a
time. The first supposition, then, whose probability
or improbability we have to estimate is, that two
manuscript letters of St. Paul to Corinth had, before
they were copied, lost, the one its beginning and the
other its concluding portion.
I do not think that anyone who knows much of
manuscripts will seriously assert that this part of the
conclusion is in itself improbable. It would appear
from 2nd John 12 and 3rd John 13, that some at
least of the epistles were written on papyrus, which

THE PROPOSED SOLUTION 155
is a very delicate material and could easily be
destroyed by any one of the many accidents to
which papers are exposed. Bishop Lightfoot was
of opinion that letters of St. Paul to the Philip-
pians have totally perished, and in his note on
the subject he reminded his readers that " on the
ground of inspiration we cannot assuredly claim for
the letters of the Apostle an immunity from the
ravages of time, which was denied to the words
of the Saviour Himself." But experience teaches us
not only generally that papers are perishable, but
also that the beginnings and endings of books and
manuscripts are the most likely portions to be torn,
lost, or otherwise destroyed. For an illustration of
this fact we have not to go further than the epistles
attributed to Clement, the very author whom we
have just been considering. Both these works were,
till lately, in a mutilated condition. The First
Epistle had lost a leaf near the end, and the, so-
called Second Epistle all its concluding portion.
Examples of this kind might easily be multiplied,
but it would be a needless waste of time to do this
in proof of a fact which is so well known, and which,
not students of manuscripts only, but most members
of the very much larger circle of book owners, have
had obtruded on their notice oftener than they would
wish. It cannot be alleged that the information which
we possess about the Church of Corinth makes it

156 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
specially unlikely that such disasters should have
happened to manuscripts which were in their care.
From everything which we can learn of them it does
not appear that order, carefulness, and method were
their strong points; so that it would not have been
unlikely beforehand that such accidents should occur.
But we have also the fact (as is now almost univer
sally admitted) that an epistle referred to in ist
Corinthians v. 9 did actually perish before any copy
was made.
To this it may be objected that, however true it
may be that there was no antecedent improbability
that manuscripts or portions of manuscripts might
perish, and though it may be the fact that an epistle
which was written before our ist Corinthians and
which was once under the care of the Corinthian
Church, has perished, there is, nevertheless, a strong
improbability that anything of the kind can have
occurred in the case which we are considering,
because we have had 2nd Corinthians delivered to
us as one letter, whole and complete. We have,
therefore, to consider the further question, How far is
it improbable that in this case two mutilated manu
scripts may have been joined in one document ?
The assertion that an alleged event is improbable
may be met in two ways. We may adduce evidence
(if such is to be had) tending to show that such an
event must have actually occurred, however im
probable it might beforehand have seemed. This I

THE PROPOSED SOLUTION 157
have already endeavoured to do, and the proofs
which I have adduced have been submitted to my
readers in the preceding pages. But we also
very fairly meet this objection by suggesting a
way in which the event, which is alleged to be
improbable, might have occurred. This could not
of course be accepted as a substitute for evidence ;
for to suggest a probable way in which a mistake
may have occurred is not the same as proving that
it has occurred ; but when proof has been already
brought forward in support of a conclusion, and has
been met by the assertion that the conclusion is in
itself too improbable to permit the proof to be
seriously considered, a legitimate (and indeed the
only direct) way of meeting this particular form of
opposition is, to show that the conclusion is not really
in itself an improbable one.
We have seen, I think, that it is probable, to a
very high degree, that the document which we have
known as 2nd Corinthians had not yet been given
to the world when Clement wrote his Epistle to
Corinth, about the year 96 A.D. That epistle in
forms us that Claudius Ephebus and Valerius Bito
were sent at that time as messengers from the
Church of Rome to the Church of Corinth, that
they might report the result of Clement's letter.
Of the result of their mission we have not any
explicit information ; but the fact that Dionysius,
Bishop of Corinth A.D. 170, informs us that Clement's

158 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
letter was from time to time read on Sundays in the
Church of Corinth, makes it more than probable that
it was favourably received there. As Clement evi
dently attached great importance to this mission,
and to the settlement of the disorders at Corinth,
his messengers would naturally remain there for
some days, or perhaps even weeks ; and during that
time it would be highly improbable that the
Corinthian sedition would be the sole subject of
conversation, or that other matters of interest
would not sometimes be discussed. Among such
topics there is none which would more inevitably
be suggested than St. Paul's correspondence with
Corinth ; for Clement's letter would almost force
this subject on the attention of the readers of his
letter by the words "Take up the epistle of the
blessed Paul the Apostle." To intelligent eccle
siastics, such as we may fairly assume Claudius
Ephebus and Valerius Bito to have been, it would
be most interesting to talk on this subject with
members of a Church which had received a letter
from the great Apostle of the Gentiles ; and to the
Corinthians it could not but be pleasant to learn how
highly the letter which their Church had received
was prized by the Church of the Imperial City. If
this subject was often spoken of, it would be most
natural that some member of the Corinthian Church
who was aware of the existence of fragments of an
unpublished letter, or letters, of the Apostle, should

THE PROPOSED SOLUTION 159
mention the fact, and that the news should awaken
eager interest in the minds of the visitors, and lead
to their being shown the manuscripts. What, then,
would they see, according to the hypothesis whose
probability we are now testing? Two mutilated
manuscripts, of unequal length ; the longer manu
script wanting its conclusion and apostolic signature,
the shorter wanting its beginning. It would certainly
not be improbable that one of the visitors should
be struck by the fact that, though there were here
apparently two manuscripts, there was only one
opening salutation, and one conclusion, and one
apostolic signature, and that the idea should occur
to him that the shorter manuscript might be the
conclusion of the longer one. The idea would
thrill him and his companions with joy, for, if true,
it would give them a priceless treasure, a complete
epistle of St. Paul, a most welcome gift for their
bishop, and the Church of Rome, and all the
Churches of Christendom. As they further examined
the documents with eager interest, they might find
the suggestion apparently confirmed by the fact that
the longer and shorter manuscripts both seemed to
speak of an approaching visit of Paul to Corinth.
The references indeed were to visits of very different
character ; there was a deep-seated discrepancy con
cealed under a superficial resemblance ; but the resem
blance would attract attention in a hasty examination
made with a strong desire to find confirmation of a

160 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
discovery which promised so glorious a result. The
idea would be almost as welcome to the Corinthians
as to the visitors, and the natural result of the con
ference would be that a skilful scribe or scribes
would be set to work to make two copies of the
restored epistle, one for the Church of Rome, and
one for the Church of Corinth. The epistle when
copied would be presented to the Christian Church
with the imprimatur of the Church to which it had
been originally addressed, and that of the premier
Church of Christendom, and would thus, of course,
meet with universal acceptance. This would certainly
harmonise in a striking way with the fact noticed by
Dr. Robertson in his article on 2nd Corinthians in
Clark's Dictionary of the Bible, i.e. that " the traces
of this Epistle in the post-apostolic age are as slight
as those of the first Epistle are exceptionally strong,"
and yet that from the time when it begins to be
mentioned it appears to have been received without
the slightest doubt, and does not seem to have been
absent from any list of writings of St. Paul.*
* We possess no Epistle of St. Paul; or of any other Apostle, in
an incomplete form ; yet it is highly improbable that at the time when
the Churches which had received Epistles began to copy them, they
had no imperfect manuscripts in their possession. Bishop Lightfoot,
in a note on Lost Epistles to the Philippians, has remarked that, " if
we extend our range of view beyond the Philippians to the many
Churches of his founding, if we take into account not these ten years
only, but the whole period of his missionary life, we can hardly
resist the conclusion that in the epistles of our Canon we have only a
part — perhaps not a. very large part — of the whole correspondence

THE PROPOSED SOLUTION 161
I do not, of course, for a moment assert that the
mistake must have occurred at the time of the visit
of Clement's messengers. All I maintain is that
there is no improbability in it, and that therefore
the objection which founds itself on the supposed
improbability of any such occurrence falls to the
ground. The actual date may have been somewhat
later, for every time that Clement's letter was
publicly read at Corinth it would call the attention
of the hearers to St Paul's correspondence with
their city, by the direction to "take up the epistle
of the blessed Paul the Apostle." The interval

of the Apostle either with Churches or with individuals.'' Now if we
suppose that the letters which we possess were half of the total
number which were written and received (and this is apparently a
larger proportion than Bishop Lightfoot would have thought probable),
it is scarcely possible that all the letters written by St. Paul should
have either been preserved intact, or have totally perished by the time
when the Churches began to copy his Epistles, probably soon after his
martyrdom. According to the law of chances there should be a
certain proportion which had neither totally perished nor remained
intact, but of which a part was lost ; and if this was so, our not
having any letters of this kind would appear to be due to the fact
that in the first century the authorities of the Churches did not copy
any epistles except those which appeared to be perfect. This would
account for the delay in the publication of 2nd Corinthians. If the
original letter, however, was a single manuscript in a defective con
dition, it would be plainly impossible for the Church ever to supply
the defect, or even to fancy that they could do so. The supposition,
which will therefore best explain both the delay in publication and the
publication later on, is that to which I believe we are led by a number
of circumstances, i.e. that there were two or more fragments, which at
the time of publication were combined by the copyists.

162 SECOND AND THIRD CORINTHIANS
during which I believe that 2nd Corinthians must
have been given to the world has its terminus a quo
in the date of Clement's letter, and its terminus
ad quern some time before the date of Polycarp's
letter, in which 2nd Corinthians is quoted.

IIAYAOY TOY AII02T0A0Y
h hpos
K0PIN9I0Y2 EII12T0AH AEYTEPA
* * * Avros Se iyw HavXos irapaKaXw vpds Sid 10
Trjs irpaoTtyros Kai eirieiKeias tov HLpicrTOV, by KaTa
irpocrwirov p.ev Taireivos ev vp.lv, airwv Se Oappw etc vpds.
Seopai Se, to p.r) irapwv Qapprjcrai Tfl ireiroidrjcrei rj 2
Xoyl£op.ai ToXp.rjcrai iirl Tivas tovs Xoyi£op.evovs t)p.ds
ws KaTa arapKa irepiiraTOvvras- ev crapKi yap irepiira- 3
TOWTec, ov KaTa crapKa <TTpaTevop.eQa' ra yap oirXa Trjs *
(TTpareias t)pwv ov erapKiKa, dXXa SvvaTa tw Gew irpos
KaQalpecriv oxypwpdrwv' Xoyicrpiovs KaQaipovvres Kai 5
irav v\frwp.a eiraipopevov KaTa Trjs yvwcrews tov Qeov,
Kai alxpaXwrl^ovres irav vorjpa els Tr)v viraKor)v tov
XpierTOv, Kai iv eTOip.w exovTes iKSiKrjcrai irdcrav irapa- 6
Korjv, otov irXtjpwOfl vp.wv r) viraKor).
Ta KaTa irpocrwirov fSXeireTe ; e'l tis ireiroiOev eavrw 7
XyotrrTot/ elvai, tovto Xoyi^ecrdw iraXiv a<p' eavTOv, 6ti
KaQws avTOs XptcrTOi', ovtw Kai qpels XpierTov. iav Te8
yap Kai irepicrcroTepov ti Kavxwwpai irepi Trjs i^ovcrias
r)p.wv, rjs e'SwKev 6 K.vpios r)piv, etc olKoSop,rjv Kai ovk
els KaQalpecriv vpwv, ovk alcrxyvQrjcropai' 'iva p.n So£w9
ws av iK(poj3elv vpds Sta twv eiricrToXwv. oti al pevlD
163

164 EniSTOAH
iiricrToXal, (jtrjcrl, /3apeiat Kai layypai' *) Se irapovcria tov
11 crwpaTOs darQevr)s, Kai 6 Xoyos igov&evrjpevos- tovto
Xoyi^ecrdw 6 toiovtos, oti olol icrpev too Xoyto Si eiri-
cttoXwv airovTes, toiovtoi Kai irapovres too epyw.
12 On yap ToXp.wp.ev iyKplvai r\ avyKplvai eavrovs ticti
twv eavTovs arwicrTavovTWV, aXXa avTOi ev eavrots eav-
tovs peTpovvres, /cat crvyKplvovTes eavrovs eavTols, ov
13 crvviovcriv. r)pels Se ovx} els Ta apeTpa KavxrjcropeOa,
aXXa KaTa to peTpov tov kovovos ov epepicrev rjpiv o
14 0eo? perpov, itpiKecrdai d-xpi /cat vpwv' ov yap cby pri
i<j>iKvovpevoi els vpds virepeKTeivopev eavrovs' axpi
yap Kai vpwv i$6acrapev iv too evayyeXiw tov XptcrTOV-
15 ovk els Ta aperpa Kavxwpevoi iv dXXoTpiois koitois,
iXiriSa Se exovTes, av£avopevr]s Trjs iricrTews vp.wv, iv
vplv peyaXvvQrjvai, KaTa tov Kavova r)pwv, eis irepicr-
16 creiav, els Ta virepeKeiva vpwv evayyeXicracrOai, ovk ev
17 aXXoT/ot'oo Kavovi els Ta eroipa KavxycracrQai. 0 Se
18 Kavxwpevos, iv Ku/ota) KavxacrOw' ov yap 6 eavrov
o-vvkttwv, e/ceti/oy eo-Tt SoKipos, aXX ov 6 Kvptoy crvv-
icrTrjcriv.
11 "0<peXov dvelxecrOe pov piKpbv Tfl d<f>pocrvvfl' dXXa
2 Kai dvexecrOe pov. £rjX£> yap vpds Qeov ^?Xft)' r)ppocraprjv
yap vpds evi avSpi irapdevov ayvijv irapacrTtjcrai tco
3 XptcrTft) ' (poftovpai Se prJTrws toy 6 o^iy Eyav i^rjiraTrjcrev
iv Tfl iravovpyia avTov, ovtw (pQapfl Ta vorjpaTa vpwv
4 airo Trjs airXoTrjTOS Trjs els tov XptcrToV. el pev yap 6
ipxdpevos aXXov Irjcrovv Krjpvacrei ov ovk iKrjpv^apev, rj
irvevpa eTepov Xap/3aveTe o ovk eXafieTe, r) evayyiXiov
6 erepov o ovk iSe£acr6e, /caXwy rjvetxecrOe. Aoyl^opai yap

nPOS KOPIN0IOY2 B 165
pt]Sev vcrTepr/Kevai tow i;7re/9Xta>> aTroa-ToXeov. et (Se /cat 6
iSiwtijs tw Xoyw, aXX ov Tfl yvwcrei' aXX' ev iravTi
(pavepwOevTes ev iracriv eis vpds- h apapTiav eiroirjcra, 7
ip.avTov Taireivwv iva vpels v^rwQrJTe, oti Swpeav to tov
Qeov evayyeXiov evrjyyeXicraprjv vplv ; aXXay e/c/cX>/cria? 8
ecrJX>;cra, Xa/3wv 6\p-wviov irpos Tr)v vpwv SiaKov'iav' /cat
irapwv irpos vpds Kai vcrTeprjdets, ov KarevapK^cra ovSevos'
to yap vcrreprjpa p.ov irpocraveirXripwcrav ol aSeX<poi 9
eX#oVrey dirb Ma/cerJowa?" /cat iv iravTi aj3aprj vplv
epavrov erriprjcra Kai Trjprjcrw. ecrTiv aXrjOeta XpicrTOv 10
iv ip.01, oti r) KavxW-S avTrj ov (ppayrjcreTai eis epe ev
tois KXipacri Trjs Axaiay. Smt'i ; 6Vt ovk ayairw vp.ds ', 11
o 0eoy olSev. o Se iroiw, Kai iroirjcrw, Iva e/c/coi/rw t>?i>12
a<f>opp.r]v Tftii/ OeXovrwv acpopprjv, 'iva ev w KavxwvTai,
evpeOwcri /caflcoy /cat rjpels- ol yap toiovtoi ^evSairo- 13
cnroXoi, ipydrai S0X101, peTacrxripaTi^opevoi els airo-
cttoXovs XpicrTOv' /cat ov QavpacrTov' avTos yap 0 14
SaTai/ay p.erao~xripaT'i^eTai els dyyeXov 0WToy ' ov 15
peya ovv el Kai ol Smkovoi avTOV peTacrxripaTifrvTai
soy StaKOVOi SiKaiocrvvrjs, &v to TeXoy earTai KaTa Ta
epya avTwv. HdXiv Xiyw, pr) Tty pe So£fl acjtpova 16
etvai' el Se prj ye, Kav ooy d<ppova Se£acrOe pe, 'iva
piKpdv ti Kayw Kavxrjcrwpai. b XaXw, ov XaXw KaTa 17
K.vpiov, aXX' wy iv d<ppoarvvfl, iv TavTfl Tfl virocrTacrei
t^s Kavxricrews. eirei iroXXoi KavxwvTai KaTa ty\v 18
cra/j/ca, Kayw Kavxricropai. r]Sews yap dvexecrOe tws 19
acppovwv, (ppovipoi oVrey' avexeaQe yap, et Tty vpds 20
/taTaooi/Xot, et Tty KaTecrdlei, e'l Tty Xapfiavei, e'l Tty
iiralperai, ei Tty vpds e£? irpocrwirov Sepei. KaTa aTt-21
M

166 EniSTOAH
piav Xeyoo, wy oti r)pels rjerdevrjcrapev' ev w S av tiv
22ToXpa, iv d(j>pocrvvfl Xiyw, ToXpw Kayw. ^ppaioi
elai ; Kayw' ,Icrpar]XiTal elcri ; Kayw' crireppa ' Afipaap.
23 elcri ; Kayw ' Siokovoi XpicrTov elm ; irapacfrpovwv
XaXw, virep iyw' iv kottois irepicrcroTepws, ev irXr/yals
virep/3aXXovTWS, iv (pvXaKals irepicrcroTepws, iv OavaTOis
24 7roXXa/cty. viro lovSaiwv irevraKis TecrcrapaKOVTa irapa
25 piav eXa/3ov, Tpis ippaftSlcrOriv, aira£ iXiOacrdrjv, Tpis
26 ivavayijcra, vvxOrjpepov iv too fivOw ireirolrjKa' oSoiiro-
piais iroXXaKis, KivSvvois iroTapwv, kivSvvois XycrTwv,
kivSvvois e/c yevovs, kivSvvois ii iOvwv, KivSvvois iv
iroXei, kivSvvois iv iprjpia, kivSvvois iv OaXacrcrfl,
27 kivSvvois ev yfsevSaSeX(j>ois' iv kottw /cat p.6x0w, iv
aypvirviais iroXXaKis, ev Xipw Kai Si\frei, ev vr/crTeiais
28 iroXXaKis, ev \}svxei Kai yvpvoTrrri' X03/0'? Taw irapeKTOS,
r) eiricrvcrTacris pov rj /caO rjpepav, r) pepipva iracrwv
29 Taw iKKXrjo-iwv. Tty acrOevei, Kai ovk dcrdevw ; t'is (TKav-
30 SaXl^eTai, Kai ovk iyw irvpovpai ; el Kavxdrrdai Sel, Ta
31 tj?? dcrOevelas pov Kavxwopai. '0 Geoy /cat iraTrjp tov
ILvpiov r)pwv li]crov XpicrTov oTSev, 6 wv evXoyrjTOS els
32 TOyy aiwvas, oti ov yp-evSopai. iv Aapa&Kw 6 idvdpxris
' ApeTa tov fiacriXews i^povpei Tr)v AapacrKrjvwv irdXiv,
33 iriacrai pe OeXwv' Kai Sid QvplSos iv crapydvfl ixaXa-
crOrjv Sia tov Teixovs, /cat i^ecjtvyov Tay xeipa$ avTOv.
12 JLavxacrOai Srj ov <rvp<j>ipei poi ' iXevcropai yap els
2 oiTTttcrias Kai airoKaXv\fseis Kf/otou. olSa dvQpwirov iv
XjotcrTft), irpo eTaw SeKaTecrcrapwv' etVe iv crwpaTi, ovk
olSa' e'cre e/cToy tov crwpaTOs, ovk olSa' 6 0eo? otSev'
3 apirayevTa tov toiovtov ewy tp'itov ovpavov. /cat oiSa

nPOE K0PINGI0Y2 B 167
tov toiovtov avdpwirov' eiTe iv crwpaTi, etTe e/CToy tov
crwp.aTOS, ovk oiSa' 6 Geoy olSev' oti r)pir ay r\ els tov 4
irapaSeicrov, Kai r/KOvcrev dpprjTa prjpaTa, a ovk i£dv
avdpwirw XaXrjcrai. virep tov toiovtov Kavxwopai ' 5
virep Se ep.avTOV ov Kavxy<rop.ai, el pri iv Tals dcrde-
veiais pov. iav yap OeXrjcrw Kavxycrao-Oai, ovk earopai 6
d<f>pwv' aXrjdeiav yap ipw' cjtelSopai Se, prj Tty els ipe
\oyio~rrrai virep o pAeirei pe, rj aKovei ti eg- epov.
Kat Tfl iirepfioXfl tow diroKaXv\frewv "iva pr) virepal- 7
pwpai, eSoOrj poi crKoXoyJr Tfl crapKi, ayyeXoy SaTaV "va
p.e KoXa(pi£fl, iva pr) virepalpwpat. virep toxitov Tpis tov 8
liLvpiov irapeKaXecra, iva airoiTTfl air epov' Kai ei'/oij/ceg
p.01, Ap/cet crot r) xaPl? fxov' h "/aP Svvapis p.ov iv
acrdeveia TeXeiovTai. r)SicrTa oiiv p.aXXov Kavxwopai
iv Tals acrOeveiais p.ov, 'iva eiri<7Kr]vwcrfl eir ipe r)
Svvapis tov XpicrTOv. Sio evSoKW iv acrdeveiais, eVlO
v/3pecriv, iv avay/caty, iv Siwypois, iv crTevox^plais>
virep XpicrTOv' OTav yap acrOevw, totb SvvaTOs elpi.
Yeyova acftpwv Kavxwpevos' ip.els p.e r)vayKa<raTe. iyw 11
yap w<peiXov v<p' vpwv crvvlcrTacrdai' ovSev yap vaTe-
prjcra twv virepXiav dirocrToXwv, el Kai ovSev elpi.
Ta pev rrtjpeia tov airocrToXov KaTeipyacrdrj iv vplv 12
iv iraarfl virop.ovfl, ev crrjpeiois Kai Tepacri Kai Svvapecri.
tI yap icrriv o rfTTrfirrre virep Tay Xot7ray e/c/cXz/a-tay, et'i3
pr) oti avTOs eyoo ov KaTevapKrjcra vpwv ; xaP£<ra<7^e
poi Tr)v aSiKiav TavTrjv. iSov TpiTov eToipws e'xoo iXOelv 14
7rpo? vpds, Kai ov KaTavapKrjcrw vpwv' ov yap £rjrw Ta
vp.wv, aXX' vpds- ov yap 6<j>elXei Ta Teicva toIs yovevai
6rj<ravpl£eiv, aXX' ol yovels toIs tbkvois' eyoo Se rjSirrral5

168 EHI2T0AH
Sairavrjcrw Kai iKSairavr)6t)cropai virep twv \pvxwv vp.wv'
et Kai irepicrcroTepws vpds ayairwv, %ttov ayairwpai.
16vEo-Ta> Se, iyw ov KaTepaprjcra vp.ds. dXX virapxwv
17 iravovpyos, SoXw vpds eXa/3ov. p.r) Tiva wv airecrTaXKa
18 7rpoy vpds, Si avTov iirXeoveKTricra vpds ', irapeKaXecra
Titov, Kai crwairecTTeiXa tov aSeX<j>ov' pryn eirXeove-
KTrjcrev vp.ds Titos ', ov too avTW irvevpaTi irepieiraTt)-
crapev ; 01/ TOty axiTols ix^ecri ;
19 naXtv SoKelTe oti vplv airoXoyovpeOa ; KaTevwiriov
tov Qeov, iv Xptcrra) XaXovpiev ' Ta Se iravTa ayairryroi,
20 U7rep Trjs ip.wv olKoSop.rjs. cpofiovpai yap, pr) irws eXQwv
ovx o'iovs OeXw evpw vpds, Kayw evpedw vplv olov ov
OiXeTe' prjirws epety, £rjXoi, Qvpol, ipiQelai, /caTaXaXtat,
21 \JsiQvptcrp.oi, (pvcriwcreis, aKaTacrTacriai' p.rj iraXiv iXQovra
pe Taireivwcrfl 6 Geoy p.ov irpos vp.ds, Kai irevdrjcrw iroX-
Xovs tow irporjpapTrjKOTWv, Kai prj p.eravoriaravTWv eiri
Tfl axaQapcria Kai iropvelq. Kai dcreXyela fj eirpa£av.
13 TpiTov tovto epxopai irpos vpds^ iirl crTopaTOS
2 Svo papTvpwv Kai Tpiwv crTadrjaeTai irav prjpa. irpoei-
pr\Ka Kai irpoXeyw, ws irapwv to SevTepov, /cat airwv
vvv ypa<f>w, TOty ir por)papTr\KOcri Kai Tot? Xoiirols irdcriv,
3oTt eav eXdw eis to iraXiv, ov <pelcropai' iirel SoKiprjv
firretTe tov ev epoi XaXovvTOs Xpio~TOv, os els vp'as ovk
4 acrdevel, aXXa SvvaTel iv vplv. /cat yap el ecrTavpwdi]
i^ acrOeveias, aXXa f?/ e/c Svvdpews Qeov' Kai yap
r)pels dcrOevovpev iv avTw, dXXd facropeOa crvv avTW
5 e/c Svvapews Qeov eis vpds. eavTOvs ireipd^ere el eWe
ev Tfl iricrcei, eavTovs SoKipa^eTe' q ovk iiriyivwcrKeTe
eavrovs, oti Irjaovs Xptg-Toy iv vplv icrTiv; el prJTi

IIP02 K0PINGI0Y2 B 169
aSoKipoi icrTe. eXirt£w Se oti yvwcreaQe oti r)pels ovk 6
ecrpev aSoKipoi. evxop-ai Se irpos tov Qeov, pr) iroirjaai 7
vp.ds KaKOv prjSev, ovx Iva rjpels SoKipoi <j>avwpev,
aXX' iva vpels to KaXov iroirJTe, r)pels Se ws aSoKipoi
wpev. ov yap SvvapeQd ti KaTa Trjs aXrjQeias, aXX'8
H7rep Trjs aXrjdeias. xaiP°fJLev V"/° orav rjpeis dcrQevw- 9
p.ev, vpels Se SwaTOi qTe* tovto Se Kai evxopeQa, Tr)v
vp.wv KaTapTicrw. Sia tovto Tavra airwv ypd<pw, "vaio
irapwv p.rj airoTop.ws xprf(TWl'JLal> ^aTa Tr\v eiovcriav rjv
eSwKe poi o Ki/ptoy ety oiKoSoptjv, Kai ovk els KaQalpecriv.
Aoiirov dSeXcftoi, xat'peTe, KaTapTl^ecrQe, irapaKaXelcrQe, 11
to avTO <f>povetre, eiprjveveTe' /cat 6 Geoy Trjs ayairrjs
Kai eiprjvrjs ecrTai ped' vpwv. AcriracracrQe aXXrfXovs 12
iv dylw fpiXrjpaTi' acrird^ovrai vp.as 01 d'ytot TraVrey.
H XaPlS T°v Kwptow Ir/crov XpicrTOv, Kai r) dyairrj tovIZ
Qeov, Kai r) Koivwvta tov Ayiov JlvevpaTOs pera irav-
twv vpwv. aprjv.

IIAYAOY TOY AII02T0A0Y
h npos
K0PIN9I0Y2 EIII2T0AH TPITH
1 TlavXos airocrToXos Irjcrov Xpio-Tov, Sia QeXrjpaTOs
Qeov, Kai TipoQeos 6 aSeXipos, Tfl eKKXrjcria tov Qeov
Tfl ovcrfl iv KoplvQw, crvv toIs dyiois irdcri toIs oScriv ev
2 oXfl Tfl Axa'i'a' XaPl? vp.lv Kai elprjvij airo Qeov irarpos
r)pwv /cat Kvpiov 'Irjcrov Xpto-Tou.
3 YiiiXoyrfros 6 Qeos Kai iraTtjp tov Kvpiov r)pwv Irjcrov
XptcrTOi/, 6 iraTr/p tow oiKTippwv Kai Qeos iracrrjs irapa-
4 KXrjcrews, 6 irapaKaXwv r)pds iiri irdcrrj Tfl QXixJsei r)pwv,
els to SvvacrQai t)pas irapaKaXelv tovs iv iracrfl QXnfrei,
Sia Trjs irapaKXrjcrews rjs irapaKaXovpeda avTOi viro tov
5 Geof' oti KaQws irepicrcrevei Ta iraQrjpaTa tov "Kpicrrov
ety r)pds, ovtw Sia Xpirrrov irepicrcrevei Kai i) Trapa/cX/jcrty
sfjpwv. e'lTe Se QXi/3opeQa, virep Trjs vpwv irapaKXrjcrews
Kai crwrrjpias, Trjs evepyovpevr/s iv viropovrj twv ovtwv
iraQrjpaTwv wv /cat r)pels iracrxopev' eWe irapaKaXov-
peQa, virep Trjs vpwv irapaKXrjcrews /cat arumipiag' /cat r)
1 iXirls r)pwv /3e/3at'a virep vpwv' elSoTes oti wcrirep koi-
vwvoi ecrTe twv iraQrjpaTwv, ovtw /cat Trjs irapaKXrjcrews.
8 Ov yap QeXopev vpds dyvoelv dSeX<j>ol, virep Trjs QXl-
\jsews r)pwv Trjs yevopevrjs rjplv iv Tfl 'Acr/a, oti KaQ'
170

nP02 K0PINGI0Y2 T 171
virep/3oXr)v i/3aprjQripev virep Svvapiv, oocrre i£airoprjQrj-
vai r)pds Kai tov £jji/- dXXd avTol iv eavTols to airo- 9
Kpipa tov QavaTov iaxwapev, "va pr) ireiroiQoTes wpev
etfi eavrols, aXX' eiri too Geoo too iyelpovTi tovs veKpovs' 10
by e/c TrjXiKOVTOv QavaTov ippvcraTO rjpas /cat pveTai, ety
ov rjXiriKapev oti Kai eTi pvcreTai, avwirovpyovvTwv /cat 11
vpwv virep rjpwv Tfl Serjcrei, 'iva e/c iroXXwv irpocrwirwv
to ety rjpas xa/°t0"Ma °"t« iroXXwv evxapicrTrjQrj virep
rjpwv. H yap Kavxrjcris rjpwv avTrj ecrTt to papTvptov Trjs 12
avvetSrjcrews rjpwv, oti iv dirXoTrjTi Kai elXiKpivela
Qeov, ovk iv aotpia crapKiKfl, aXX' iv x^PlTl Qeov dve-
crTpafprjpev ev too Kocrpw, irepicrcroTepws Se irpos vpds.
ov yap aXXa ypa<popev vplv, aXX' rj a avayivwcrKeTe, r)\%
Kai eiriyivwcrKere, eXirl^w Se oti /cat eooy TiXovs iiri-
yvwcrecrQe, KaQws Kai iireyvwre r)pds airo pepovs, oti 14
Kavxipa vpwv ecrp.ev, KaQairep Kai vpels rjpwv, iv Tfl
rjpepa tov Kvpiov Irjcrov. Kat TavTfl Tfl ireiroiQrjcrei 15
ij3ovXoprjv irpos vpds iXQelv irporepov, Iva Sevrepav X®-PLV
ex»jTe' /cat Si vpwv SieXQelv ety M.aKeSovlav, Kai irdXiv 16
diro Ma/ceoWtay iXQelv irpos vp-ds, Kai v<f> vpwv irpo-
7rep<j>Qfjvai ety Trjv lovSalav. tovto oSv /3ovXev6pevos, 17
p-rjri apa Tfl eXa<ppia exprjcrawv ; r) a /3ovXevopai, KaTa
crap/ca /3ovXevopai, "va fj trap ipol to val vai, Kai to ov
ov ; itio~tos Se o Qeos, oti 6 Xoyoy rjpwv 6 irpos vpds 18
ovk iyevero vai Kai ov' 6 yap tov Qeov vlbs 'I/jcroi/yl9
Xptcrro? o ev vplv Si rjpwv KrjpvxQeiS, Si ipov Kai
HiiXovavov Kai TipoQeov, ovk eyiveTO val Kai ov, dXXd
vai iv avrw yeyovev' bcrai yap iirayyeXiai Qeov, ei/20

172 EIII2T0AH
avTw to val, /cat iv avTw to dprjv, too Geoo irpos Sogav
21 St' rjpwv. 6 Se /3e/3aiwv rjpas crvv vplv ety XptcrTOj', /cat
22XP'laa? fads, Geo?' 6 /cat cr<ppayicrdpevos rjpas, Kai Sovs
tov dppa/3wva tov irvevpaTos iv Tals KapSiais rjpwv.
23 'Eyoo Se papTvpa tov Qeov iiriKaXovpai iiri Trjv eprjv
yjsvxhv, oti <peiS6pevos vpwv ovKeri rjjXQov els KopivQov'
24 ovx oti Kvpievopev vpwv Trjs irlcrTews, aXXa crvvepyoi
2 icrpev Trjs xaP®$ vpwv, Tfl yap iricrTei e<TTrjKaTe ' eKpiva
Se ipavTW tovto, to prj iraXiv ev Xvirfl irpos vpas
2 eXQelv. el yap iyw Xvirw vpds, Kai tis ecrTiv o
3 evippalvwv pe, el pr) 6 Xvirovpevos ii ipov ; /cat eypaxjsa
vplv tovto avTO, 'iva prj iXQwv Xvirrjv e'xa> d<j> wv eSei pe
Xalpeiv' ireiroiQws iirl iravTas vpds, oti r) iprj xa/°a
4 irdvTwv vpwv icrTiv. e/c yap irdXXrjs QXi^Jsews Kai avvoxrjs
KapSias eypa^ra vplv Sia iroXXwv SaKpvwv, ovx 'lva Xi/7TJ7-
QrjTe, aXXa Trjv ayairrjv 'iva yvwTe rjv exa> irepicrcroTepws
ety vpds.
5 Et Se Tty XeXt/Tr/j/cei', ovk ipe XeXvirrjKev, dXX' airo
6 pipovs, "va prj iirtfiapw iravTas vpds. iKavbv too toiovtw
7 r) eiriTipia avTrj r) viro Taw TrXeiovooi/' wcrTe Tovvavrlov
pdXXov vpds xaPl<Taa'^aL Ka' irapaKaXeaai, prjirws Tfl
8 irepicrcroTepa Xvirfl KaTairoQfl 6 toiovtos. Sid irapaKaXw
9 vpds Kvpwcrai ety avTov ayairrjv' ety touto yap /cat
eypa\fra, 'iva yiy<o Trjv SoKiprjv vpwv, el els irdvTa virrj-
10 koo'i icrTe. w Se ti xaPl&crQe, Kai iyw' Kai yap eya)
ei' Tt Kexaptcrpai, w Kexapicrpai, Si' vpds, iv irpocrwirw
llXpto-TOf, Iva prj irXeoveKTrjQwpev viro tov XaTavd' ov
yap avTov Ta vorjpaTa dyvoovpev.
12 EX0aw <5e eiy Trjv TpwaSa els to evayyeXiov tov

nP02 K0PINGI0Y2 V 173
Xpicrrov, Kai Qvpas poi dvewypivrjs iv Ki/pt'oo, ovk 13
ecrxrjKa avecriv too irvevpaTi pov, tw prj evpeiv pe Titov
tov dSeX(f>6v pov' aXXa airoTaiapevos avTols, iirjXQov
ety M.aKe8ovlav. Too <5e Geoo X"/0'? TV TrdvroTe Qpiap- 14
fievovTt rjpas iv too XptcrToo, /cat Trjv ocrprjv Trjs yvwaews
avTov ipavepovvri Si rjpwv iv iravri tottw. oti XpicrTOv 15
evwSla icrpev too Geoo iv toIs crw£op.evois Kai iv TOty
a7roXXu/(xei/oiy ' oty pev, ocrprj Qavarov ety QavaTov' olsiG
Se, 6p.crr) fooijy ety £wr)v. /cat 7rpoy TavTa Tty t/cavoy ; ov 17
yap icrp.ev ws 01 iroXXol, KairrjXevovres tov Xoyov tov
Qeov, aXX' coy ii elXiKpiveias, aXX' ooy e/c Qeov, /ca-
Tevoo7rioi/ Toy Geoi?, iv XpicrTw XaXovp.ev. 'ApxopeQa3
iraXiv eairouy awicrTaveiv ; el prj xPtlt°fiev> <*>? Tives,
crvcrTaTiKwv eiricrToXwv irpos vpds, rj ei vpwv crvcrTaTi-
kwv ; r) iiricrToXrj rjpwv vpels icrTe, iyyeypappevrj iv 2
Tals KapSlais rjpwv, yivwcrKopevrj /cat dvayivwarKopivrj
viro iravTwv avQpwirwv' <j>avepovpevoi oti icrTe eiricrToXrjZ
XptcrTOi/ SiaKOvrjQelcra v<j> rjpwv, eyyeypappevrj ov p.e-
Xavt, dXXd irvevpaTi Qeov faWoy, ovk iv irXail X1Q1-
vais, dXXd iv irXail KapSlas crapKivais. TLeirolQrjcriv 4
6e TOiavrrjv exopev Sia tov ^-picrTOv irpos tov Qeov'
ovx oti hcavol icrpev dip' eavrwv XoyicracrQai ti, toy ii 5
eavrwv, aXX' rj iKavorrjs rjpwv e/c tov Qeov' by /cat i/ca-6
vwcrev r)p.ds SiaKOvovs Kaivrjs StaQrjKrjs, ov ypappaTOs,
dXXa irvevpaTOS' to yap ypdpp.a diroKTelvei, to Se
irvevp.a £woiroiel. Et <5e rj SiaKOvia tov QavaTov iv7
ypdppacriv ivreTvirwpevrj iv XlQois, iyevrjQrj iv Soifl,
oocrTe pr) SvvacrQat aTevicrai tovs vlovs IcrparjX ety to
irpocrwirov Maicreooy, Sia Trjv Soiav tov irpocrwirov avTov

174 E1TI2T0AH
8 Trjv KaTapyovpevrjv' irws ovx) pdXXov rj SiaKOVia tov
9 irvevparos ecrTai iv Soifl ; el yap rj SiaKovia Trjs /caTa-
Kpicrews Soia, iroXXw pdXXov irepicrcrevei rj SiaKovia Trjs
10 SiKaiocrvvrjs iv Soifl. "^ Y®P ov(5e SeSoiacrTai to Se-
Soiacrpevov iv tovtw too pepei, eveKev Trjs vireppaX-
llXovcrrjs Soirjs. et yap to KaTapyovpevov, Sia Soils'
12 ttoXXoo pdXXov to pivov, iv Soifl. "ExovTey ovv Toiav-
\3Trjv iXirlSa, iroXXfl irapprjcria xP<*>peQa' Kai ov KaOairep
Moocrj/y iTlOei KaXvppa iiri to irpocrwirov eavrov, irpos
to prj aTevicrai tovs vlovs IcrparjX ety to TeXoy tou
li KaTapyovpevov' aXX' iirwpwQrj Ta vorjpaTa avTwv. axpi
yap Trjs crrjpepov to ovto KaXvppa eiri Trj avayvwcrei
Trjs iraXaids SiaQrJKrjs pevei prj avaKaXvirTopevov, oti
15 iv XptcrToo KaTapyetTai ' aXX' ews crrjpepov, rjviKa ava-
yivwcrKeTai M.wcrrjs, KaXvppa iiri Trjv KapSiav avrwv
16/cetTat' rjviKa S' dv iiricrTpe^rfl irpos Kvpiov, irepiaipelTai
17 to KaXvppa. 0 <5e Ki/pioy to irvevpa icrTiv' ov Se to
18 irvevpa Kvpiov, e/cet iXevOepia. rjpels Se iravres ava-
KeKaXvppevw irpocrwirw Trjv Soiav Kvplov KaTOirTpi^o-
pevoi, Trjv avTrjv et/coVa peTapopcjrovpeQa airo Soirjs ety
4 Soiav, KaOairep airo Kvplov irvevpaTOs. Ata tovto
exovTes Trjv SiaKOViav Tavrrjv, KaOws rjXerjQrjpev, ovk
2 iKKOKOvpev, aXX' aireiirapeQa Ta KpvirTa Trjs alcrxvvrjs,
prj irepiiraTOvvres ev iravovpyia, prjSe SoXovvres tov
Xoyov tov Qeov, aXXa Tfl (pavepwcrei Trjs dXrjOelas
crvvicrTwvTes eavTOvs irpos irdcrav crwelSrjcriv avQpwirwv,
3 ivwiriov tov Qeov. Ei <5e Kai ecrTi KeKaXvppevov to
evayyeXiov rjpwv, ev TOty airoXXvpevots ecrTi KeKaXvp-
4 pivov' iv ols o 0eoy tov atawoy tovtov iTV<pXwcre Ta

nP02 K0PINQI0Y2 T 175
vorjpaTa tow airicrTwv, els to prj avydcrai avTols tov
(pwTtcrpov tov evayyeXtov Trjs Soirjs tov XpicrToO, oy
ecrTiv eiKwv tov Qeov. ov yap eavrovs Krjpvcrcropev, 5
aXXa X-picrTOv Irjcrovv Kvpiov' eavrovs Se SovXovs
vpwv Sia Irjcrovv' oti 6 Qeos 6 elirwv e/c cr/coVovy 0a>y6
Xap\p-ai, os eXap\jsev iv Tals /capoYaty rjpwv, irpos <pwTi-
crju.ov Trjs yvwcrews Trjs Soirjs tov Qeov iv irpocrwirw
Irjcrov XptcrTOi/.
ExOyuev Se toV Orjcravpdv tovtov iv ocrTpaKivois crKev- 7
ecriv, iva rj virepftoXr) Trjs Svvapews fl tov Qeov, Kai prj
ei rjpwv ' iv iravri QXij36pevoi, aXX' ov crTevoxwpov- 8
pevoi' airopovpevoi, aXX' ovk iiairopovpevoi' StwKope-9
vot, aXX' ovk iyKaTaXeiiropevoi' KaTaj3aXX6pevoi, aXX'
ovk airoXXvfievoi ' iravroTe Trjv veKpwaiv tov Kvpiov 10
Irjcrov iv too crwpaTi irepicpipovTes, Iva /cat rj £wrj tov
Irjcrov ev tw crwpaTi rjp.wv <[>avepwQrj. ael yap rjpels 01 11
fooj/Tey ety QavaTov irapaSiSopeOa Sia 'Irjcrovv, Iva /cat
r) £wr) tov 'Irjcrov ipavepwOfl iv Tfl OvrjTfl crapkl rjpwv.
"CicrTe 6 pev QavaTOS iv rjp.lv ivepyelrai, rj Se £wrj eVl2
vplv. exovres Se to avTO irvevpa Trjs irio~Tews, KaTa 13
to yeypap.pt.evov, IZiricrTevcra, Sio eXaXrjcra, Kai rjpels
iricrrevopev, Sio Kai XaXovpev' eitSoVey oti 6 iyeipasii
tov TLvpiov Irjo~ovv, Kai rjpas Sia Irjcrov iyepel, Kai
irapacrTrjcrei crvv vplv. Ta yap iravTa Si vpds, 'iva r) 15
Xapty 7rXeoi/acracra, Sia tow irXeiovwv Trjv evxapicrTiav
irepicrcrevcrrj ety Trjv Soiav tov Qeov. Aid ovk iKKa- 16
Kovpev' aXX' el Kai 6 e'iw rjpwv dvQpwiros SiacpQelpeTai,
dXX' 6 ecrwOev avaKaivovTai rjpepa Kai rjpepa. to yap 17
irapavTiKa iXacppov Trjs QXi\{rews rjpwv KaO' virep/3oXr)v

176 EIII2T0AH
ety virepf3oXr)v alwviov /3apoy Soirjs KaTepya^eTai rjplv,
18 pr) crKoirovvTwv rjpwv Ta /SXeiropeva, dXXa Ta pr) pXe-
iropeva' ra yap (SXeiropeva irpocrKaipa' Ta Se prj pXe-
5 iropeva aiwvia. o'lSapev yap, oti iav rj iiriyeios rjpwv
oiKia tov arKrjvovs KaTaXvQrj, olKoSoprjv e/c Qeov exopev,
2 oikiov axeipoirolrjTOv, alwviov, iv toIs ovpavols. Kai yap
iv tovtw crTevd^opev, to olKrjTrjpiov rjpwv to ii ovpavov
3 eirevSvaracrOai iiriiroQovvTes. e'l ye Kai evSvcrapevoi, ov
4 yvpvoi evpeOrjcropeQa. Kai yap ol bvres ev too crKrjvei
crTeva^opev /3apovpevoi' iireiSr) ov QeXopev iKSvcratrOai,
aXX' eirevSvcracrOai, "va KaTairoQfl to QvrjTov viro Trjs
5 £wrjs. 6 Se KaTepyacrdpevos rjpas ety avTO tovto Qeos, o
6 /cat Sovs rjplv tov dppaftwva tov irvevpaTOs- Qappovvres
ovv iravTOTe, Kai elSoTes oti evSrjpovvTes ev too crwpaTi,
7 eKSrjpovpev airo tov Kvpiov ' Sia iricrTews yap irepiira-
8 tov pev, ov Sia e'iSovs ' Qappovpev Se Kai evSoKOvpev pdX
Xov iKSrjprjtrai e/c tou croo/xaToy, /cat ivSrjprjcrai irpos tov
Kvpiov.
9 Ato /cat cpiXoTipovpeOa, e'lTe ivSrjpovvTes, e'ne e/cc5/7-
10 povvTes, evapecrToi avTw eivai. tovs yap iravras rjpas
(pavepwQrjvai Sel epirpocrOev tov firjpaTOS tov XpicrTov,
iva KopicrrjTai 'eKacrTOs Ta Sia tov crwpaTOS, irpos a
11 eirpaiev, eWe ayaOov, etre /ca/coV. elSoTes oSv tov
<po/3ov tov Kvpiov, dvQpwirovs irelOopev' Qew Se irecpa-
vepwpeOa' iXirl^w Se Kai iv Tals crvveiSrjcrecriv vpwv
12 irecpavepwcrOai. ov yap iraXiv eavTOvs crvvicrTavopev
vplv, aXXa a<popprjv SiSovTes vplv KavxvpaTOs virep
rjpwv, "va ex>;Te xpoy tovs iv irpoawirw Kavxwpevovs,
13 /cat ov KapSla. e'lTe yap iiecrTrjpev, Qew' etVe crwippo-

nP02 K0PINGI0Y2 T 177
vovpev, vplv. H yap ayairi; tov XpicrTOV crvcexet rjpds, 14
Kpivavras tovto, oti el ety V7rep iravrwv aireOavev, apa 15
01 iravres aireQavov' Kai virep iravTwv aireOavev, 'iva ol
£wvres p.rjKeri eavTols £wcriv, dXXd too V7rep avTwv diro-
OavovTi Kai eyepOevTi. wcttb rjpels dirb tov vvv ovSeva 16
oiSap.ev KaTa crap/ca' et cSe /cat iyvwKapev KaTa crapKa
Xptoroi', aXXa vvv ovk eri yivwaKopev. ware et Tty ev 17
Xptcrra), Kaivrj ktictis' Ta dpxala iraprjXOev, ISov yeyove
Kaiva Ta iravra. Ta Se iravra e/c tou Geov, tov /caTaX- 18
Xaiavros rjpas eavrw Sid 'Irjcrov XptcrTOi/, /cat Sovtos
rjp.lv Trjv SiaKOviav Trjs /caTaXXay/Jy ' ooy oti Geoy rjv ei>l9
Xptcrroo Koarp.ov /caTaXX do-craw eavTw, prj Xoyi^opevos
avrols Ta irapairTwp.aTa avrwv, /cat Oepevos iv rjplv tov
Xoyov Trjs KaTaXXayrjs. 'Yirep XptcrTOi) ovv irpecrjievo- 20
pev, ws tov Qeov irapaKaXovvros Si rjpwv' SeopeOa virep
XptcrTov, /caTaXXay/rre toi Geoo' tov yap prj yvovra2\
ap.apTiav, virep rjpwv apapriav eiroirjcrev, 'iva rjpels yt-
vwpeOa SiKaiouvvrj Qeov iv ovtw. crvvepyovvres SeG
/cat 7rapa/caXoi/^iei/, prj ety Kevbv Trjv XaPLV T0V Geov
SeiaaQai vpds' Xeyei yap, Katpoo SeKTW iirrjKOvcra crov,2
Kai iv rjp.epa crwrrjp'ias i/3orj0rjcra croi ' iSov vvv /catpoy
ei/7rpocrc5e/CToy, ISov vvv rjpipa crwrrjpias' prjSepiav ev3
p.rjSevl SiSovTes irpocrKOirrjv, "iva prj pwprjOrj rj SiaKovia'
dXX' iv iravTi crvvicrTwvTes eavTOvs ooy Geov Siokovoi, 4
iv viropovfl iroXXfl, iv OXtyecriv, iv ai/ay/caty, ev o-Tevo-
Xooptaiy, ev irXrjyals, iv ^vXa/caty, iv aKaTacrTacriais, ev5
Koirots, iv dypvirvlais, iv vrjcrTetais, iv ayvoTrjTi, ev6
yvwuei, iv paKpoOvpla, iv xpWTorrjTt, iv HvevpaTi
'Ayt'oo, iv dydirfl dvviroKp'iTw, iv Xoyw aXrjOeias, ev Sv-7

178 EH.I2T0AH
vdpei Qeov, Sid tow 6VXow Trjs SiKaiocrvvrjs twv Seiiwv
8 /cat apicnepwv, Sid Soirjs Kai aTiplas, Sia Svcrcprjpias Kai
9 evcprjp'ias' ws irXdvoi, Kai dXrjOels' ws ayvoovpevoi, Kai
iiriyivwcrKopevoi' ws diroQvrjcrKOVTes, Kai ISov £wp.ev' ooy
10 iraiSevopevot, Kai prj QavaTOvpevoi' ooy Xvirovpevoi, aei
Se xa'LpovTes' ws tttwxoI, iroXXovs Se irXovTt^ovTes' wy
prjSev exovres, Kai iravTa KarexovTes.
11 To CTTopa rjpwv dviwye 7rpoy vpds KopivOioi, rj KapSia
12 rjpwv ireirXaTWTai ' ov crTevoxwpelcrOe ev rjplv, crTevo-
13 x^pelcrOe Se iv tois crirXayxyois vpwv' Trjv Se avTrjv
avTipicrOlav, a>y tbkvois Xiyw, irXaTvvOrjTe Kai vpels.
14 M>; ylvecrOe eTepo^vyovvTes airlcrTOts' Tty yap p.eroxi
15 StKatocrvvrj Kai avopia ; Tty <5e Koivwvia cpwri irpos ctko-
tos ', Tty <Se crvpcpwvrjcris XptcrTOO 7rpoy BeXiap ; rj Tty
16 pepls iricrTw peTa dirlcrTov ; t'is Se crvyKaTaOecris vaw
Qeov peTa elSwXwv ; vpels yap vabs Qeov icrTe £wvtos,
KaOws elirev 6 Geoy, 'Oti ivoiKrjcrw iv avTols, Kai ep.-
irepiiraTrjcrw, Kai ecropai avTwv Qeos' Kai avTOi ecrovrai
17 poi Xaoy. Sio iiiXOeTe e/c picrov avTwv Kai acpopicrQrjTe,
18Xeyet Kvptoy, /cat aKaOapTov prj airTecrQe' Kayw elcr-
Siiopai vpds, Kai ecropai vplv els iraTepa, Kai vpels
ecrecrQi poi ety vlovs Kai OvyaTepas, Xeyei Kvptoy irav-
1 TOKpaTwp. TavTas ovv exovTes Tay eVayyeXtay aya-
7T»7T0i, KaOapicrwpev eavTovs airo iravTOS poXvcrp.ov crap-
kos Kai irvevpaTOS, eiriTeXovvTes dyiwcrvvrjv iv (pofiw
Qeov.
2 XoopjJcraTe rjpas' ovSeva rjStKrjcrapev, ovSeva icpQel-
3 papev, ovSeva eirXeoveKTrjcrapev. ov irpos KaTOKpicriv
Xiyw' irpoeiprjKa yap oti ev Tals KapSlats rjpwv icrTe ety

IIP02 K0PINGI0Y2 T 179
to crvvairoQavelv /cat av^rjv. iroXXrj fioi irapprjcria irpos 4
vpds, iroXXrj pot Kavxrjcns virep vpwv' ireirXrjpwpai Tfl
irapaKXrjQ-et, virepireptcrcrevopai Tfl xaP9- 'elrl 'lraa"tt Ttl
QXt\ffei rjpwv. Kat yap eXQovrwv rjpwv els M.aKeSoviav, 5
ovSeplav earxrjKev avecrtv rj arapi rjpwv, aXX' eV 7rat'Tt
0Xt/36pevoi' eiwOev paxai, ecrwOev cpofioi. dXX' 06
7rapa/caXaw tovs Taireivovs irapeKaXecrev rjpds b Qeos
ev Tfl irapovcria Titov' ov p.ovov Se ev Tfl irapovcria 7
avTov, aXXa Kai iv Tfl irapaKXrjcret fj irapeKXrjQrj ecp
vplv, aj/ayyeXXaw rjplv Trjv vp.wv iirtiroOrjeriv, tov vpwv
oSvppov, tov vpwv £rjXov virep ipov, wcrTe pe pdXXov
Xaprjvat. Oti et /cat eXv7n;o-a vpds iv Tfl eirtcrToXfl, ovS
perapiXopat, el Kai p.eTepeXoprjv' fiXiirw yap oti rj iirt-
crToXrj iKelvrj el Kai irpos wpav iXvirrjarev vpds- Niw9
Xatpw, ovx oti eXvirrjQrjTe, aXX' oti eXvirrjOrjre ety pe-
Tavotav' eXvirrjOrjre yap KaTa Qeov, \va iv prjSevi £rjpi-
wOrjre ii rjpwv. rj yap KaTa Qeov Xvirrj peTavoiav els 10
crwTrjptav dperapiXrjrrov /caTepyaferat " rj Se tov Koarpov
Xvirrj QavaTov KaTepya^erai- ISov yap avTO tovto to n
KaTa Qeov XvirrjQrjvat vpds, irocrrjv KaTeipyacraTO vplv
crirovSrjv; aXXa airoXoytav, aXXa ayavaKTrjcriv' aXXa
(f>6/3ov, aXXa iiriiroQrjcriv' aXXa £rjXov, aXX' iKSiKrjcriv-
iv iravTi crvvecrTrjcraTe eavTOvs dyvovs eivai iv too irpdy-
paTt. dpa el /cat eypa^a vplv, ovx e'lveKev tov dSiKrj- 12
cravTOS, ovSe e'tveKev tov aSiKrjOivTOs' dXX' e'lveKev tov
(pavepwOrjvai Trjv crirovSrjv vpwv Trjv virep rjpwv irpos
vpds ivwiriov tov Qeov. Ata tovto irapaKeKXrjpeQa iiri 13
Tfl irapaKXrjcrei vpwv ' irepicrcroTepws Se pdXXov ixaprjpev
iiri Tfl XaPa TtTOi/, 6ti aj/a7re7rai/Tai to irvevpa avTov

1 80 EIII2T0AH
14 a7ro iravTwv vpwv L oti et Tt avTw virep vpwv KeKavxipat,
ov KaTflcrxyvOrjv' dXX' ooy irdvra iv dXrjQe'ia. eXaXrjcrapev
vplv, ovtw Kai rj KavxW-S rjpwv rj iiri Titou, aXrjQeta
15 iyevrjQrj' Kai Ta crirXayxya avTov irepicrcroTepws eis vpas
ecrTiv, avaptpvrjcrKopevov Trjv iravTwv vpwv viraKorjv, ooy
16 peTa <p6f3ov Kai Tpopov iSeiacrOe avTov. xalPw 0Tl ev
iravTi Oappw ev vplv-
8 Tvwpt^opev Se vplv dSeXcpol, Trjv XaPlv T0V Qeov Trjv
2 SeSopevrjv iv Tals e/c/cX/;criaiy T/Jy Ma/ceoWiay' oti ev
iroXXfl SoKipfl QXiyp-ews rj irepicrcreta Trjs xaPa$ avTwv,
Kai rj KaTa /3aQovs irTWxeia avTwv eirepicrcrevcrev eis
3 tov ttXovtov Trjs dirXoTrjros ovtwv' oti KaTa Svvaptv,
i papTvpw, Kat virep Svvaptv avOatpeTOt, p.era iroXXrjs
irapaKXrjcrews Seopevoi rjpwv, Trjv XaPlv Kal Trlv KOlvu>~
vlav Trjs SiaKOvlas Trjs els tovs ayt'oi/y SeiacrQat rjpas,
5 /cat ov KaOws rjXiricrapev, aXX' eavTOvs eSwKav irpwTOv
6 too Kvptoo, /cat rjplv Sia QeXrjpaTOs Qeov' ety to irapa-
KaXicrai rjpas TItov, 'iva KaOws irpoevrjpiaTO, ovtw Kat
7 iirtTeXicrrj, et'y vpds Kai Trjv XaPlv TavTrjv. AXX' wcrirep
iv iravTt ireptcrcreveTe, irtcrTei Kai Xoyw /cat yvwcret Kai
iracrrj crirovSrj, Kal Tfl ii vpwv iv rjplv dyairrj, Iva Kat iv
8 TavTfl Tfl xaPlTl TrepiacrevrjTe' ov KaT iiriTayrjv Xeya),
dXXa Sia Trjs eTepwv crirovSrjs /cat to T/Jy vpeTepas aya-
9 irrjs yvrjcriov SoKipa^wv' ytvwcrKere yap Trjv X^Plv T0V
TLvptov rjpwv Irjcrov XptcrTOU, oti Si vpds iirTwxevcre
irXovcrios wv, 'tva vpels Trj eKeivov irTwxela irXovrrjcrrjTe'
10 /cat yvwprjv ev tovtw SiSwpi. tovto yap vplv crvpapepet,
o"tTives ov povov to iroirjcrai, aXXa Kai to OiXeiv irpoe-
11 vrjpiacrOe airo irepvcri' wvi Se Kal to iroirjcrai iirneXe-

ITP02 K0PINGI0Y2 T 181
craTe, oirws KaOairep rj irpoQvpla tov OiXetv, ovtw Kai to
iiriTeXecrat e/c tov exetv. Et yap rj irpoQvpia irpoKevrat, 12
KaQb iav exfl Tty, evirpocrSeKTOs, ov KaOb ovk e'xei- ovl3
yap "va aXXoty avecris, vplv Se 0Xti/ay' aXX' ii IcroTrjTOs,
iv too vvv Katpw to vpwv irepicrcrevpa els to eKeivwv
vo-reprjpa' "va Kal to e/cetVaw irepicrcrevpa yevrjTai ety 14
to vpwv vcrreprjpa, oirws yevrjTai icrorrjs' KaOws ye- 15
ypairTai, O to iroXv, ovk eirXeovaare' /cat 6 to oXiyov,
ovk rjXaTTOvrjcre.
Xapty Se too Geoo too SiSovti Trjv avTrjv crirovSrjv 16
V7rep vpwv ev Tfl KapSia Titov' oti Trjv pev irapaKXrjcriv 17
iSeiaTO, crirovSaidrepos Se virapxwv, avOalperos eirjXOe
irpos vpds- "2iweirep.yjrapev Se peT avTov tov aSeXcpov, 18
aS 6 eiraivos ev too evayyeXtoo <Sta iracrwv twi/ iKKXrjcriwv '
ov p.6vov Se, dXXd /cat xelpoTovrjOels viro tow iKKXrjcriwv 19
(TvveKSrjpos rjpwv, crvv Tfl xaPlTl TavTfl Tfl SiaKovovpevfl
v<p' rjpwv, irpos Trjv ovtov tov YLvp'iov Soiav /cat irpoQv-
plav vpwv ' aTeXXopevoi tovto, p.r) Tty rjpas p.wpr)crrjTai 20
iv Tfl dSpOTrjTt TavTfl Tfl SiaKovovpevfl vcp' rjpwv' irpo- 21
voovpevoi /caXa ov povov ivwirtov Kvpiov, aXXa Kai
ivwirtov avQpwirwv- 2,vveirepyjsapev Se avTols tov aSeX- 22
<pbv rjpwv, ov iSoKtpdcrapev iv iroXXols iroXXaKis crirov-
Salov ovra, wvi Se iroXv crirovSaioTepov' ireirotOrjcret
iroXXfl Tfl els vpds- e'vre virep Titov, koivwvos ipos Kat 23
ety vpas crvvepyos ' e'lTe aSeXcpoi rjpwv, airocrToXot e/c/cX/;-
atooi', 6"o£fa XptcrTov. Trjv odv evSetiiv Trjs dydirrjs vpwv, 24
Kal r)p.wv Kavxwews virep vp.wv, ety avTovy ivSetiacrOe}
Kal els irpocrwirov twv iKKXrjcriwv. Hepl p.ev yap TrjsB
SiaKovtas Trjs ety Tovy aytoi/y ireptcrcrov poi ecrTi to y 'pa
is

1 82 EIII2T0AH
2 (petv vplv. oiSa yap Trjv irpoQvpiav vpwv, rjv virep vpwv
Kavxwpat Ma/ceoo'cru/, oti 'Axa'i'a irapeerKevacrTai airo
irepvcri' Kai 6 ii vpwv £rjXos rjpeOtcre tovs irXeiovas'
3eirepyp-a Se tovs dSeX<povs, "va pr) to Kavxvpa rjpwv to
virep vpwv KevwOrj iv too pipei tovtw' "va KaOws eXeyov,
i irapecrKevacrpivoi ?Te, prj irws idv eXQwcri crvv epoi Ma-
KeSoves, Kai evpwcriv vpds airapacrKevacrTOvs, KaTatcrxyv-
Qwpev rjpels, 'iva prj Xeywpev vpels, ev ttj virocrTacrei
5 TavTfl Trjs Kavxvcrews. avayKalov ovv rjyrjcraprjv irapa-
KaXecrai tovs aSeXcpovs, 'iva irpoeXQwtriv ety vpds, Kat
ir poKaTapTicrwcri Trjv ir poKaTrjyyeXpevrjv evXoytav vpwv
TavTrjv eToiprjv eivai, ovVooy toy evXoytav, /cat pr) wcrirep
6 irXeoveitav. Tovto <5e, 6 crire'tpwv (petSopivws, cpetSo-
pevws Kat Oepicrei ' Kat b criretpwv iir evXoyiaty, ex'
7 evXoytaty /cat Oepicrei' e/cacrToy KaOws irpoaipelTat Tfl
KapSia' pr) e'/c Xv7r»jy rj ii avayKrjs' IXapbv yap SoTrjv
8 ay air a b Qeos- SwaTOS Se b Qeos irdcrav XaPlv irepicr-
crevcrai ety vpas, 'iva ev iravTi iravTore irdcrav avTapKeiav
9 exovTes, irepicrcrevrjTe eis irav epyov ayaOov' KaOws
yeypairTai, HcrKopiricrev, ecSoo/ce TOty irivrjcrtv, rj StKaio-
10 cryvrj ovtov pevei els tov alwva' b Se iirixoprjywv
crireppa too crireipovTi, Kat dpTov els /3pwcriv x°PrlY*laaL>
Kai irXrjQvvat tov criropov vpwv, /cat avirjcrai Ta yevvrj-
11 paTa Trjs SiKatocrvvrjs vpwv. iv iravTi irXovTt^opevot els
irdcrav dirXoTrjTa, Ijtis KaTepyd^erai Si rjpwv evxapicrTtav
12 too Geoo' oti rj StaKovia T^y XetTovpyt'ay TavTijy ov po-
vov icrTi irpocravairXrjpovcra Ta vcrTeprjpaTa twv dytwv,
aXXa Kat irepicraevovcra Sia iroXXwv evxapicrTiwv too
13 Geoo, <5ia Trjs SoKtprjs Trjs StaKovtas TavTrjs Soid^ovTes

HP02 K0PINGI0Y2 T 183
tov Qeov iiri Tfl virorayrj Trjs opoXoytas vpwv ety to
evayyeXiov tov Xptcrrov, Kai airXorrjTi Trjs KOtvwvias
els avTOvy /cat ety Train-ay, /cat avTwv Serjcrei virep vpwv, 14
iiriiroQovvTwv vpds Sia Trjv virepjSaXXovcrav XaPlv T0^
Qeov ecp vplv.
XaP'? T(P Qeft> eiri Tfl dveKStrjyrjTw avTov Swpea. 15

THE SECOND EPISTLE OF PAUL THE
APOSTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS
************
10 ****** But I myself, Paul, who
when we are face to face am humble among you, but
when I am absent am bold toward you, beseech you
2 by the meekness and gentleness of Christ. But I beseech
you, that I may not be bold when I am present with
that confidence, wherewith I think to be bold against
some, which think of us as if we walked according to
3 the flesh. For though we walk in the flesh, we do not
4 war after the flesh : (for the weapons of our warfare are
not carnal, but mighty through God to the pulling down
5 of strong holds;) casting down imaginations, and every
high thing that exalteth itself against the knowledge of
God, and bringing into captivity every thought to the
6 obedience of Christ ; and having in a readiness to revenge
7 all disobedience, when your obedience is fulfilled. Do ye
look on things after the outward appearance ? If any man
trust to himself that he is Christ's, let him of himself
think this again, that, as he is Christ's, even so are we
8 Christ's. For though I should boast somewhat more of
our authority, which the Lord hath given us for edification,
and not for your destruction, I should not be ashamed:
9 that I may not seem as if I would terrify you by letters.
10 For his letters, say they, are weighty and powerful; but
his bodily presence is weak, and his speech contemptible.
184

II. CORINTHIANS 185
Let such an one think this, that, such as we are in word 11
by letters when we are absent, such will we be also in
deed when we are present. For we dare not make our- 12
selves of the number, or compare ourselves with some that
commend themselves : but they measuring themselves by
themselves, and comparing themselves among themselves,
are not wise. But we will not boast of things without our 13
measure, but according to the measure of the rule which
God hath distributed to us, a measure to reach even unto
you. For we stretch not ourselves beyond our measure, as 14
though we reached not unto you : for we are come as far
as to you also in preaching the gospel of Christ: not 15
boasting of things without our measure, that is, of other
men's labours; but having hope, when your faith is in
creased, that we shall be enlarged by you according to our
rule abundantly. To preach gospel unto the lands on the 16
other side of you, and not to boast in another man's line
of things made ready to our hand. But he that glorieth, 17
let him glory in the Lord. For not he that commendeth 18
himself is approved, but whom the Lord commendeth.
Would to God ye could bear with me a little in my folly : 11
and indeed bear with me. For I am jealous over you with 2
godly jealousy : for I have espoused you to one husband,
that I may present you as a chaste virgin to Christ. But 3
I fear, lest by any means, as the serpent beguiled Eve
through his subtilty, so your minds should be corrupted
from the simplicity that is in Christ. For if he that cometh 4
preacheth another Jesus, whom we have not preached, or
if ye receive another spirit, which ye have not received,
or another gospel, which ye have not accepted, ye might
well bear with him. For I suppose I was not a whit 5
behind the very chiefest apostles. But though I be rude 6
in speech, yet not in knowledge; but we have been

186 II. CORINTHIANS
7 thoroughly made manifest among you in all things. Have
I committed an offence in abasing myself that ye might
be exalted, because I have preached to you the gospel of
8 God freely? I robbed other churches, taking wages of
9 them, to do you service. And when I was present with
you, and wanted, I was chargeable to no man; for that
which was lacking to me the brethren which came from
Macedonia supplied : and in all things I have kept myself
from being burdensome unto you, and so will I keep
10 myself. As the truth of Christ is in me, no man shall
11 stop me of this boasting in the regions of Achaia. Where-
12 fore ? because I love you not ? God knoweth. But what
I do, that I will do, that I may cut off occasion from them
which desire occasion ; that wherein they glory, they may
13 be found even as we. For such are false apostles, deceitful
workers, transforming themselves into the apostles of Christ.
14 And no marvel ; for Satan himself is transformed into an
15 angel of light. Therefore it is no great thing if his ministers
also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness;
16 whose end shall be according to their works. I say again,
Let no man think me a fool; if otherwise, yet as a fool
17 receive me, that I may boast myself a little. That which
I speak, I speak it not after the Lord, but as it were
18 foolishly, in this confidence of boasting. Seeing that
19 many glory after the flesh, I will glory also. For ye suffer
20 fools gladly, seeing ye yourselves are wise. For ye suffer,
if a man bring you into bondage, if a man devour you, if
a man take of you, if a man exalt himself, if a man smite
21 you on the face. I speak as concerning reproach, as
though we had been weak. Howbeit whereinsoever any
22 is bold, (I speak foolishly,) I am bold also. Are they
Hebrews? so am I. Are they Israelites? so am I. Are
23 they the seed of Abraham ? so am I. Are they ministers

II. CORINTHIANS 187
of Christ ? (I speak as a fool) I am more ; in labours more
abundant, in stripes above measure, in prisons more fre
quent, in deaths oft. Of the Jews five times received 1 24
forty stripes save one. Thrice was I beaten with rods, 25
once was I stoned, thrice I suffered shipwreck, a night and
a day I have been in the deep; in joumeyings often, in 26
perils of waters, in perils of robbers, in perils by mine
own countrymen, in perils by the heathen, in perils in the
city, in perils in the wilderness, in perils in the sea, in
perils among false brethren ; in weariness and painfulness, 27
in watchings often, in hunger and thirst, in fastings often,
in cold and nakedness. Beside those things that are 28
without, that which cometh upon me daily, the care of all
the churches. Who is weak, and I am not weak ? who is 29
offended, and I burn not? If I must needs glory, I will 30
glory of the things which concern mine infirmities. The 31
God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, which is blessed
for evermore, knoweth that I lie not. In Damascus the 32
governor under Aretas the king kept the city of the Dama
scenes with a garrison, desirous to apprehend me : and 33
through a window in a basket was I let down by the wall,
and escaped his hands.
It is not expedient for me doubtless to glory. I will 12
come to visions and revelations of the Lord. I knew a 2
man in Christ above fourteen years ago, (whether in the
body, I cannot tell ; or whether out of the body, I cannot .
tell : God knoweth ;) such an one caught up to the third
heaven. And I knew such a man, (whether in the body, 3
or out of the body, I cannot tell : God knoweth ;) how 4
that he was caught up into paradise, and heard unspeakable
words, which it is not lawful for a man to utter. Of such 5
an one will I glory : yet of myself I will not glory, but in
mine infirmities. For though I would desire to glory, 1 6

188 II. CORINTHIANS
shall not be a fool ; for I will say the truth : but now I
forbear, lest any man should think of me above that which
7 he seeth me to be, or that he heareth of me. And lest
I should be exalted above measure through the abundance
of the revelations, there was given to me a thorn in the
flesh, the messenger of Satan to buffet me, lest I should
8 be exalted above measure. For this thing I besought the
9 Lord thrice, that it might depart from me. And he said
unto me, My grace is sufficient for thee : for my strength is
made perfect in weakness. Most gladly therefore will I
rather glory in my infirmities, that the power of Christ may
10 rest upon me. Therefore I take pleasure in infirmities, in
reproaches, in necessities, in persecutions, in distresses for
11 Christ's sake : for when I am weak, then am I strong. I
am become a fool in glorying : ye have compelled me : for
I ought to have been commended of you : for in nothing
am I behind the very chiefest apostles, though I be nothing.
12 Truly the signs of an apostle were wrought among you in
all patience, in signs, and wonders, and mighty deeds.
13 For what is it wherein ye were inferior to other churches,
except it be that I myself was not burdensome to you?
14 forgive me this wrong. Behold, I am ready to come to you
this third time ; and I will not be burdensome to you : for
I seek not your's, but you : for the children ought not to
lay up for the parents, but the parents for the children.
15 And I will very gladly spend and be spent for you ; though
16 the more abundantly I love you, the less I be loved. But
be it so, I did not burden you : nevertheless, being crafty,
17 1 caught you with guile. Did I make a gain of you by
18 any of them whom I sent unto you ? I desired Titus, and
with him I sent a brother. Did Titus make a gain of you ?
walked we not in the same spirit? walked we not in the
ig same steps ? All this time ye think that we are excusing

II. CORINTHIANS 189
ourselves unto you ? we speak before God in Christ : but we
do all things, dearly beloved, for your edifying. For I fear, 20
lest, when I come, I shall not find you such as I would, and
that I shall be found unto you such as ye would not : lest
there be debates, envyings, wraths, strifes, backbitings,
whisperings, swellings, tumults : and lest, when I come 21
again, my God will humble me among you, and that I
shall bewail many which have sinned already, and have
not repented of the uncleanness and fornication and
lasciviousness which they have committed.
This third time I am coming to you. At the mouth 13
of two witnesses and three shall every word be established.
I have warned, and I warn, as when I was present the 2
second time, so also when I am absent now, those that
have sinned before, and all the rest, that, if I come
again, I will not spare : since ye seek a proof of Christ 3
speaking in me, which to you-ward is not weak, but
is mighty in you. For though he was crucified through 4
weakness, yet he liveth by the power of God. For we
also are weak in him, but we shall live with him by the
power of God toward you. Examine yourselves, whether 5
ye be in the faith ; prove your own selves. Know ye not
your own selves, how that Jesus Christ is in you, except
ye be reprobates ? But I trust that ye shall know that we 6
are not reprobates. Now I pray to God that ye do no 7
evil ; not that we should appear approved, but that ye
should do that which is honest, though we be as reprobates.
For we can do nothing against the truth, but for the truth. 8
For we are glad, when we are weak, and ye are strong : 9
and this also we wish, even your perfection. Therefore 10
I write these things being absent, lest being present I
should use sharpness, according to the power which the
Lord hath given me to edification, and not to destruction.

190 II. CORINTHIANS
11 Finally, brethren, farewell. Be perfect, be of good
comfort, be of one mind, live in peace; and the God of
12 love and peace shall be with you. Greet one another
13 with an holy kiss. All the saints salute you.
14 The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ, and the love of
God, and the communion of the Holy Ghost, be with
you all. Amen.

THE THIRD EPISTLE OF PAUL THE
APOSTLE TO THE CORINTHIANS

Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God, and 1
Timothy our brother, unto the church of God which is at
Corinth, with all the saints which are in all Achaia : Grace 2
be to you and peace from God our Father, and from the
Lord Jesus Christ. Blessed be God, even the Father of 3
our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of mercies, and the God
of all comfort ; who comforteth us in all our tribulation, 4
that we may be able to comfort them which are in any
trouble, by the comfort wherewith we ourselves are com
forted of God. For as the sufferings of Christ abound in 5
us, so our consolation also aboundeth by Christ. And 6
whether we be afflicted, it is for your consolation and
salvation, which is effectual in the enduring of the same
sufferings which we also suffer: or whether we be comforted,
it is for your consolation and salvation. And our hope of 7
you is stedfast, knowing, that as ye are partakers of the
sufferings, so shall ye be also of the consolation. For we 8
would not, brethren, have you ignorant of our trouble
which came to us in Asia, that we were pressed out of
measure, above strength, insomuch that we despaired even
of life : but we had the sentence of death in ourselves, 9
that we should not trust in ourselves, but in God which
raiseth the dead : who delivered us from so great a death, 10
and doth deliver : in whom we trust that he will yet deliver
191

192 III. CORINTHIANS
11 us ; ye also helping together by prayer for us, that for the
gift bestowed upon us by the means of many persons
thanks may be given by many on our behalf.
12 For this boasting of ours is the testimony of our con
science, that in simplicity and godly sincerity, not with
fleshly wisdom, but by the grace of God, we have had our
conversation in the world, and more abundantly to you-
13 ward. For we write none other things than those which
ye acknowledge, or even maintain, and I hope that ye will
14 maintain even to the end, as in part even in the past ye
maintained of us that we are your boast, as also ye are ours
15 in the day of our Lord Jesus. And in this confidence I
was wishing to come before unto you that ye might have a
16 second benefit; both to pass through you to Macedonia,
and again from Macedonia to come to you, and by you
17 to be sent on to Judaea. Was I thoughtless when I was
cherishing this wish ? or the things that I resolve do I resolve
according to the flesh, that with me there should be the yea
18 yea, and the nay nay ? But as God is true, our word toward
19 you was not yea and nay. For the Son of God, Jesus
Christ, who was preached among you by us, even by me
and Silvanus and Timotheus, was not yea and nay, but in
20 him was yea. For all the promises of God in him are yea,
21 and in him Amen, unto the glory of God by us. Now he
which stablisheth us with you in Christ, and hath anointed
22 us, is God ; who hath also sealed us, and given the earnest
23 of the Spirit in our hearts. But I call God for a witness
upon my soul, that to spare you I came no more unto
24 Corinth. Not for that we have dominion over your faith,
but are helpers of your joy : for by faith ye stand.
2 But I determined this with myself, that I would not
2 come again to you with sorrow. For if I make you sorry,
who is he then that maketh me glad, but the same which

III. CORINTHIANS 193
is made sorry by me ? And I wrote this same unto you, 3
lest, when I came, I should have sorrow from them of
whom I ought to rejoice ; having confidence in you all, that
my joy is the joy of you all. For out of much affliction 4
and anguish of heart I wrote unto you with many tears ;
not that ye should be grieved, but that ye might know
the love which I have more abundantly unto you. But if 5
any have caused grief, he hath not grieved me, but in part :
that I may not overcharge you all. Sufficient to such a 6
man is this punishment, which was inflicted by the majority.
So that on the contrary it is for you rather to forgive 7
him and comfort him, lest perhaps such a one should be
swallowed up with overmuch sorrow. Wherefore I beseech 8
you that ye would confirm your love toward him. For to 9
this end also did I write, that I might know the proof of
you, whether ye be obedient in all things. To whom ye 10
forgive any thing, I forgive also : for if I forgave any thing,
to whom I forgave it, for your sakes forgave I it in the
person of Christ; lest Satan should get an advantage of 11
us : for we are not ignorant of his devices. Furthermore, 12
when I came to Troas to preach Christ's gospel, and a
door was opened unto me of the Lord, I had no rest in 13
my spirit, because I found not Titus my brother: but
taking my leave of them, I went from thence into Mace
donia. Now thanks be unto God, which always causeth us 14
to triumph in Christ, and maketh manifest the savour of
his knowledge by us in every place. For we are unto God 15
a sweet savour of Christ, in them that are saved, and in
them that perish : to the one we are the savour of death 16
unto death; and to the other the savour of life unto life.
And who is sufficient for these things ? For we are not as 17
many, which corrupt the word of God : but as of sincerity,
but as of God, in the sight of God speak we in Christ.

194 HI. CORINTHIANS
3 Do we begin again to commend ourselves ? or need we,
as some others, epistles of commendation to you, or letters
2 of commendation from you ? Ye are our epistle written in
3 our hearts, known and acknowledged by all men ; being
made manifest that ye are an epistle of Christ ministered
by us, written not with ink, but with the Spirit of the
living God ; not in tables of stone, but in fleshy tables of
4 the heart. And such trust have we through Christ to
5 God-ward : not that we are sufficient of ourselves to think
any thing as of ourselves ; but our sufficiency is of God ;
6 who also hath made us able ministers of the new testament ;
not of the letter, but of the spirit : for the letter killeth,
7 but the spirit giveth life. But if the ministration of death,
written and engraven in stones, was glorious, so that the
children of Israel could not stedfastly behold the face of
Moses for the glory of his countenance ; which glory was
8 to be done away : how shall not the ministration of
9 the spirit be rather glorious? For if the ministration of
condemnation be glory, much more doth the ministration
10 of righteousness exceed in glory. For even that which was
made glorious had no glory in this respect, by reason of
lithe glory that excelleth. For if that which is done away
was glorious, much more that which remaineth is glorious.
12 Seeing then that we have such hope, we use great plainness
13 of speech : and not as Moses, which put a vail over his
face, that the children of Israel could not stedfastly look
14 to the end of that which was passing away : but their minds
were blinded : for until this day remaineth the same vail
untaken away in the reading of the old testament ; which
15 vail is done away in Christ. But even unto this day, when
16 Moses is read, the vail is upon their heart. Nevertheless
when it shall turn to the Lord, the vail shall be taken away.
17 Now the Lord is that Spirit : and where the Spirit of the

III. CORINTHIANS 195
Lord is, there is liberty. But we all, with open face 18
beholding as in a mirror the glory of the Lord, are changed
into the same image from glory to glory, even as by the
Lord the Spirit.
Therefore seeing we have this ministry, as we have 4
received mercy, we faint not; but have renounced the 2
hidden things of dishonesty, not walking in craftiness, nor
handling the word of God deceitfully ; but by manifestation
of the truth commending ourselves to every man's conscience
in the sight of God. But if our gospel be hid, it is hid to 3
them that are lost : in whom the god of this world hath 4
blinded the minds of them which believe not, lest the
light of the glorious gospel of Christ, who is the image
of God, should shine unto them. For we preach not 5
ourselves, but Christ Jesus the Lord; and ourselves your
servants for Jesus' sake. For God, who commanded the 6
light to shine out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts, to
give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God in the
face of Jesus Christ. But we have this treasure in earthen 7
vessels, that the excellency of the power may be of God,
and not of us. We are troubled on every side, yet not 8
distressed ; we are perplexed, but not in despair ; persecuted, 9
but not forsaken ; cast down, but not destroyed ; always 10
bearing about in the body the dying of the Lord Jesus,
that the life also of Jesus might be made manifest in our
body. For we which live are alway delivered unto death 11
for Jesus' sake, that the life also of Jesus might be made
manifest in our mortal flesh. So then death worketh in us, 12
but life in you. We having the same spirit of faith, accord- 13
ing as it is written, I believed, and therefore have I spoken ;
we also believe, and therefore speak ; knowing that he 14
which raised up the Lord Jesus shall raise up us also by
Jesus, and shall present us with you. For all things are 15

196 III. CORINTHIANS
for your sakes, that the abundant grace might through the
16 thanksgiving of many redound to the glory of God. For
which cause we faint not; but though our outward man
17 perish, yet the inward man is renewed day by day. For
our light affliction, which is but for a moment, worketh for
18 us a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory ; while
we look not at the things which are seen, but at the things
which are not seen: for the things which are seen are
temporal ; but the things which are not seen are eternal.
5 For we know that if our earthly house of this tabernacle
were dissolved, we have a building of God, an house not
2 made with hands, eternal in the heavens. For in this we
groan, earnestly desiring to be clothed upon with our house
3 which is from heaven : if so be that being clothed we shall
4 not be found naked. For we that are in this tabernacle
do groan, being burdened : not for that we would be
unclothed, but clothed upon, that mortality might be
5 swallowed up of life. Now he that hath wrought us for
the selfsame thing is God, who also hath given unto us the
6 earnest of the Spirit. Therefore we are always confident,
knowing that, whilst we are at home in the body, we are
7 absent from the Lord : (for we walk by faith, not by sight :)
8 we are confident, I say, and willing rather to be absent from
9 the body, and to be present with the Lord. Wherefore we
labour, that, whether present or absent, we may be accepted
10 of him. For we must all appear before the judgment seat
of Christ ; that every one may receive the things done in
his body, according to that he hath done, whether it be
11 good or bad. Knowing therefore the terror of the Lord,
we persuade men; but we are made manifest unto God;
and I trust also are made manifest in your consciences.
12 For we commend not ourselves again unto you, but give
you occasion to glory on our behalf, that ye may have

III. CORINTHIANS 197
somewhat to answer them which glory in appearance, and
not in heart. For whether we be beside ourselves, it is to 13
God : or whether we be sober, it is for your cause. For 14
the love of Christ constraineth us ; because we thus judge,
that if one died for all, then were all dead : and that he 15
died for all, that they which live should not henceforth live
unto themselves, but unto him which died for them, and
rose again. Wherefore henceforth know we no man after 16
the flesh: yea, though we have known Christ after the
flesh, yet now henceforth know we him no more. There- 17
fore if any man be in Christ, he is a new creature : old
things are passed away; behold, all things are become new.
And all things are of God, who hath reconciled us to him- 18
self by Jesus Christ, and hath given to us the ministry of
reconciliation ; to wit, that God was in Christ, reconciling 19
the world unto himself, not imputing their trespasses unto
them ; and hath committed unto us the word of reconcilia
tion. Now then we are ambassadors for Christ, as though 20
God did beseech you by us : we pray you in Christ's stead,
be ye reconciled to God. For he hath made him to be sin 21
for us, who knew no sin ; that we might be made the
righteousness of God in him.
We then, as workers together with him, beseech you also 6
that ye receive not the grace of God in vain. (For he 2
saith, I have heard thee in a time accepted, and in the day
of salvation have I succoured thee : behold, now is the
accepted time; behold, now is the day of salvation.)
Giving no offence in any thing, that the ministry be not 3
blamed : but in all things approving ourselves as the 4
ministers of God, in much patience, in afflictions, in
necessities, in distresses, in stripes, in imprisonments, in 5
tumults, in labours, in watchings, in fastings ; by pureness, 6
by knowledge, by longsuffering, by kindness, by the Holy

198 III. CORINTHIANS
7 Ghost, by love unfeigned, by the word of truth, by the
power of God, by the armour of righteousness on the right
8 hand and on the left, by honour and dishonour, by evil
9 report and good report : as deceivers, and yet true ; as
unknown, and yet well known ; as dying, and, behold, we
10 live ; as chastened, and not killed ; as sorrowful, yet alway
rejoicing; as poor, yet making many rich; as having
11 nothing, and yet possessing all things. O ye Corinthians,
12 our mouth is open unto you, our heart is enlarged. Ye are
not straitened in us, but ye are straitened in your own
13 bowels. Now for a recompence in the same, (I speak
Has unto my children,) be ye also enlarged. Be ye not
unequally yoked together with unbelievers : for what fellow
ship hath righteousness with unrighteousness? and what
15 communion hath light with darkness ? And what concord
hath Christ with Belial ? or what part hath he that believeth
16 with an infidel ? And what agreement hath the temple of
God with idols ? for ye are the temple of the living God ;
as God hath said, I will dwell in them, and walk in them ;
and I will be their God, and they shall be my people.
17 Wherefore come out from among them, and be ye sepa
rate, saith the Lord, and touch not the unclean thing ; and
18 I will receive you, and will be a Father unto you, and ye
shall be my sons and daughters, saith the Lord Almighty.
7 Having therefore these promises, dearly beloved, let us
cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and spirit,
2 perfecting holiness in the fear of God. Receive us; we
have wronged no man, we have corrupted no man, we have
3 defrauded no man. I speak not this to condemn you : for
I have said before, that ye are in our hearts to die and live
4 with you. Great is my boldness of speech toward you,
great is my glorying of you : I am filled with comfort, I am
5 exceeding joyful in all our tribulation. For, when we were

III. CORINTHIANS 199
come into Macedonia, our flesh had no rest, but we were
troubled on every side ; without were fightings, within were
fears. Nevertheless God, that comforteth those that are 6
cast down, comforted us by the coming of Titus ; and not 7
by his coming only, but by the consolation wherewith
he was comforted in you, when he told us your earnest
desire, your mourning, your fervent mind toward me; so
that I rejoiced the more. For though I made you sorry 8
with a letter, I do not repent, though I did repent : for
I perceive that the same epistle hath made you sorry,
though it were but for a season. Now I rejoice, not 9
that ye were made sorry, but that ye sorrowed to repent
ance : for ye were made sorry after a godly manner, that ye
might receive damage by us in nothing. For godly sorrow 10
worketh repentance to salvation not to be repented of:
but the sorrow of the world worketh death. For behold 11
this selfsame thing, that ye sorrowed after a godly sort, what
carefulness it wrought in you, yea, what clearing of your
selves, yea, what indignation, yea, what fear, yea, what
vehement desire, yea, what zeal, yea, what revenge ! In
all things ye have approved yourselves to be clear in this
matter. Wherefore, though I wrote unto you, I did it 12
not for his cause that had done the wrong, nor for his cause
that suffered wrong, but that our care for you in the sight
of God might appear unto you. Therefore we were 13
comforted in your comfort : yea, and exceedingly the more
joyed we for the joy of Titus, because his spirit was
refreshed by you all. For if I have boasted any thing 14
to him of you, I am not ashamed; but as we spake all
things to you in truth, even so our boasting, which I made
before Titus, is found a truth. And his inward affection is 15
more abundant toward you, whilst he remembereth the
obedience of you all, how with fear and trembling ye

200 III. CORINTHIANS
16 received him. I rejoice therefore that I have confidence
in you in all things.
8 Moreover, brethren, we do you to wit of the grace of
2 God bestowed on the churches of Macedonia ; how that in
a great trial of affliction the abundance of their joy and
their deep poverty abounded unto the riches of their
3 liberality. For to their power, I bear record, yea, and
4 beyond their power they were willing of themselves ; pray
ing us with much intreaty that we would receive the gift,
and take upon us the fellowship of the ministering to the
5 saints. And this they did, not as we hoped, but first gave
their own selves to the Lord, and unto us by the will of
6 God. Insomuch that we called on Titus in order that as he
had made a beginning, so he would accomplish this grace
7 also in you : yea, that, as ye abound in everything, in faith,
and utterance, and knowledge, and in all earnestness, and in
8 your love to us, so ye may abound in this grace also. I speak
not by commandment, but by occasion of the forwardness.
9 of others, and to prove the sincerity of your love. For ye
know the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, that, though he
was rich, yet for your sakes he became poor, that ye
10 through his poverty might be rich. And herein I give my
advice : for this is expedient for you, who have begun
before, not only to do, but also to be forward a year ago.
11 Now therefore perform the doing of it ; that as there was a
readiness to will, so there may be a performance also out
12 of that which ye have. For if there be first a willing
mind, it is accepted according to that a man hath, and not
13 according to that he hath not. For I mean not that other
14 men be eased, and ye burdened : but by an equality, that
now at this time your abundance may be a supply for their
want, that their abundance also may be a supply for your
15 want : that there may be equality : as it is written, He that

III. CORINTHIANS 201
had gathered much had nothing over; and he that had
gathered little had no lack. But thanks be to God, which 16
put the same earnest care into the heart of Titus for you.
For indeed he accepted the exhortation; but being more 17
forward, of his own accord he went unto you. And we 18
have sent with him the brother, whose praise is in the
gospel throughout all the churches ; and not that only, but 19
who was also chosen of the churches to travel with us with
this grace, which is administered by us to the glory of the
same Lord, and declaration of your ready mind : avoiding 20
this, that no man should blame us in this abundance which
is administered by us : providing for honest things, not 21
only in the sight of the Lord, but also in the sight of men.
And we have sent with them our brother, whom we have 22
oftentimes proved diligent in many things, but now much
more diligent, upon the great confidence which I have in
you. Whether any do enquire of Titus, he is my partner 23
and fellowhelper concerning you : or our brethren be en
quired of, they are the messengers of the churches, and the
glory of Christ. Wherefore shew ye to them, and before 24
the churches, the proof of your love, and of our boasting
on your behalf.
For as touching the ministering to the saints, it is super- 9
fluous for me to write to you : for I know the forwardness 2
of your mind, for which I boast of you to them of
Macedonia, that Achaia was ready a year ago; and your
zeal hath provoked very many. Yet have I sent the 3
brethren, lest our boasting of you should be in vain in this
behalf; that, as I said, ye may be ready: lest haply if they 4
of Macedonia come with me, and find you unprepared, we
(that we say not, ye) should be ashamed in this same
confident boasting. Therefore I thought it necessary to 5
exhort the brethren, that they would go before unto you,

202 III. CORINTHIANS
and make up beforehand your bounty, whereof ye had
notice before, that the same might be ready, as a matter
6 of bounty, and not as of covetousness. But this I say, He
which soweth sparingly shall reap also sparingly; and he
7 which soweth bountifully shall reap also bountifully. Every
man according as he purposeth in his heart, so let him
give ; not grudgingly, or of necessity : for God loveth a
8 cheerful giver. And God is able to make all grace abound
toward you; that ye, always having all sufficiency in all
9 things, may abound to every good work : (as it is written,
He hath dispersed abroad ; he hath given to the poor : his
10 righteousness remaineth for ever. Now he that ministereth
seed to the sower both minister bread for your food, and
multiply your seed sown, and increase the fruits of your
11 righteousness ;) being enriched in every thing to all bounti-
fulness, which causeth through us thanksgiving to God.
12 For the administration of this service not only supplieth
the want of the saints, but is abundant also by many
13 thanksgivings unto God ; whiles by the experiment of this
ministration they glorify God for your professed subjection
unto the gospel of Christ, and for your liberal distribution
14 unto them, and unto all men ; and by their prayer for you,
which long after you for the exceeding grace of God in
you.
15 Thanks be unto God for his unspeakable gift.

WORKS BY J. H. KENNEDY, D.D.

NATURAL THEOLOGY AND
MODERN THOUGHT
The Donnellan Lectures, delivered before the
University of Dublin, 1888-9

Crown 8vo, 5/-. Hodder and Stoughton

Dr. Dale (of Birmingham), "Christian Doctrine."
" Those of my readers who are not already acquainted with the very
able examination by Mr. Kennedy of the points in which the results of
modem research and the methods of modern thought are supposed to
have affected the traditional arguments of Natural Theology, will be
grateful to me for calling their attention to it."
Professor Bernard, Introduction to his Translation of
Kant's "Kritik of Judgment."
"Mr. Kennedy in his Donnellan Lectures has here pointed out
several weak spots in Kant's armour."
A. J. Harrison, B.D., "The Church in Relation to Sceptics."
" But do not, on any account, miss Kennedy's Natural Theology and
Modern Thought and Aubrey Moore's Science and the Faith''
Professor James Orr, D.D., "The Christian View
of God and the World."
"The matter could not be much better put than it is put by
Mr. Kennedy in his Donnellan Lectures on Natural Theology and
Modern Thought."
Professor Bruce in "The Critical Review."
" We have nothing but praise for this book. Readers will find both
pleasure and profit in its perusal."
"Church Quarterly Review."
"Everywhere the inquirer will find the most suggestive thoughts,
and the fairest and fullest discussion. We can promise all interested in
such matters a treat of no mean order in the perusal of the book."

Reviews of "Natural Theology and Modern Thought"
Professor Banks in "The Thinker."
" It is not often that English books find favour with German critics.
One of the favoured few is Natural Theology and Modern Thought,
by J. H. Kennedy, b.d. A critic (H. Weniger), in No. 36 of
Luthardt's Theologische Literaturblatt, gives an exhaustive and eulogistic
review of this book. High as the praise is, it is richly deserved.
The work is one of the most original contributions to apologetics in
recent times. We cannot quote the critic's analysis of the arguments
about Positivism, Materialism, Darwinism, Determinism. We only
reproduce the general opinion expressed. ' In addition to the great
acuteness meeting us everywhere in the book, the arrangement of the
matter in such a way that each of the six lectures prepares the way for
the next, and the end is reached in uninterrupted progress, is especially
worthy of admiration. He almost always lets opponents speak for
themselves, and beats them at their own weapons. If in almost all
other fields the theological science of England has gone to school to
us, here is a question on which we need not be ashamed to leam from
England."' "Saturday Review."
"A highly interesting book. Mr. Kennedy's Donnellan Lectures
present the arguments for Theism with clearness."
"Church Times."
"We would direct special attention to Lecture IV., on the Beauty
and Sublimity of the Universe as a page of design, which may well be
read as a corrective to an overstraining of a certain popular theory of
the day." "Scotsman."
" A very telling defence of the Theistic theory."
" Record."
" Mr. J. H. Kennedy has discussed with great ability some of the
more important objections to Materialism, that theory which would
explain all the phenomena of the physical and mental, and what we,
speaking as Christians, may call the spiritual world, as proceeding
from matter and force. He is evidently quite at home in German as
well as English literature upon the subject. We should not find it
easy to summarise his arguments, but we can cordially recommend
them to those whose business it is to meet scientific opponents of our
religion upon their own ground."

Reviews of " Natural Theology and Modern Thought"
" British Weekly."
"Mr. Kennedy has written an admirable book, clear in style and
cogent in reasoning. He has argued the question with fairness, with
ample knowledge, with a dialectic skill, and with a clear insight into
the issues at stake, which make his contribution to the controversy
of exceeding value. . . . Mr. Kennedy has made himself acquainted
with the literature, English and foreign, which has grown up on this
topic, and has dealt with it in the most masterly way. It is a most
satisfactory book." " English Churchman."
"A clearly written, interesting, and convincing book. The author
has examined, in a most scholarly and satisfactory manner, some
points in which the results of modern research and the development
of modem thought are supposed to have seriously affected the proofs
of natural theology." "Christian World."
"The lectures . . . are fresh and forcible in style, and grapple
boldly with the problems." " Literary World."
" Very interesting and valuable lectures. . . . His argumentation is
often subtle, and the literary merit of his book is decidedly high."
" Manchester Examiner."
" These six lectures are excellent specimens of calm, scholarly dis
cussion. . . . Mr. Kennedy has evidently striven to make himself
thoroughly acquainted with the views which he combats, to state them
accurately, and to criticise them in a candid and honourable way."
"The Queen."
" The author has produced a book of real value, and it is one which
ought to be read and pondered over by those who want a fair and
faithful inquiry into these deep things."
"Bradford Observer."
" The lectures are an exceedingly able defence of the theistic position
against the attacks made upon it by some of its ablest opponents. . . .
The lectures are able without being abstruse, and may be read with
benefit by men of ordinary understanding, who have neither time nor
talent for special studies of a philosophical or scientific kind."

Reviews of '" Natural Theology and Modern Thought"

" Rock."
"It is an exceedingly clever treatise."
" Methodist Recorder."
"These able, moderate, and timely addresses are full of sober,
vigorous argument from end to end. They assume nothing, indulge
in no flights of rhetoric or ad captandum appeals, but calmly take
writers like Du Bois-Reymond, Clifford, Fiske, and Hackel on their
own ground, and point out their inconsistencies, and the absolute
impossibility of eliminating design from any conceivable theory of the
universe. . . . We heartily recommend this instructive book as an
admirable specimen of apologetics, in which is no feeble ' apology.' "
" Dundee Advertiser."
" One of the most unique and convincing arguments in favour of
Theism. A better book could not fall into the hands of young men
reading on the subject. . . . While following a clear line of its own,
it touches upon the leading types of thought which are supposed to be
unfriendly to Theism, and it shows a clear way out of the maze."
" Dublin Daily Express."
" The book is a distinct advance on the lectures of recent years, and
constitutes a very able and original defence of natural theology in the
face of modern unbelief." " Belfast Northern Whig."
"The work deserves commendation, both for its excellent aim and
superior literary style. With a lucidity of exposition which one rarely
finds in philosophic writing of a profound character, Mr. Kennedy
examines some points in which the results of modern research and the
development of modern thought are supposed to have seriously affected
the proofs of natural theology." "Dublin Evening Mail."
" Each main objection is pursued with the pertinacity of a sleuth-
hound — dragged out into the light, examined, investigated, dissected,
put into the scales before the eyes of the reader, and weighed exactly
for what it is worth. All this is done by Mr. Kennedy in a manner
much more methodical and effective than in any other similar treatise
that we have met with. Readers who wish to master the present
position of scientific men against Theism, will find themselves saved
an immense amount of research by studying this octavo of less than
three hundred pages." "The Expository Times."
" The work is full of the results not merely of reading, but of thought.
It meets the objections of unbelief in their newest forms."

The Lectures have been translated into German with
the title—
GOTTESGLAUBE UND
MODERNE WELTANSCHAUUNG
With an Introduction by
DR. OTTO ZOCKLER
ORD. PROFESSOR OF THEOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF GRIEFSWALD

Berlin : Reuthbr & Reichard

" Neue Preussische Kreuz-Zeitung."
" Nachdem in der ersten Vorlesung die Thorheit derer nachgewiesen
ist, welche den Glauben an einen persbnlichen Gott von vornherein
als ein Hinausgehen iiber die Grenzen der Erfahrung verbieten, be-
schaftigen sich die zweite und dritte Vorlesung mit dem teleologischen
Beweise. Hier werden insbesondere die Schriften Du Bois-Reymonds
iiber die Grenzen des Naturerkennens und die sieben Weltrathsel
analysirt und kritisirt. Der Verfasser versteht es meisterhaft von dem
Standpunkte des Gegners aus dessen Argumente zu beleuchten, zu
zerlegen und zu entkraften. Die teleologische Betrachtung der Natur
erscheint am meisten durch Darwins natiirliche Zuchtwahl gefahrdet.
Aber hier findet die glaubige Weltanschauung einen unerschrockenen
Vertheidiger. Was er z. B. nur iiber das Auge sagt, hat bleibenden
Werth. Ebenso die vierte Vorlesung, in welcher der Nachweis er-
bracht ist, dass in dem Schonen und Erhabenen des sichtbaren Kosmos
eine nicht wegzuleugnende Zweckmassigkeit, und zwar ein uberaus
hoher Grad derselben zu Tage tritt, so dass sich trotz der Ein-
wendungen Kants der Schluss von dem Schonen und Erhabenen auf
einen ordnenden Verstand er giebt. In der fiinften und sechsten Vor
lesung wird dann der moralische Gottesbeweis behandelt. Ueber
Determinismus, Freiheit, Wille und Gewissen finden sich hier ganz
vortreffliche Darlegungen etc."
" Theologisches Literaturblatt."
" Die deutsche Theologie wird zur Zeit anscheinend von dem Kampf
gegen den atheistischen Materialismus, der ihr doch den Boden unter
den Fiissen wegzuziehen droht, im ganzen wenig bewegt. Ist fast auf
alien anderen Gebieten die theologische Wissenschaft Englands bei
uns in die Schule gegangen, so liegt u. E. hier ein Punkt vor, wo
wir uns nicht schamen sollten, von England zu lernen. Das vor-
liegende Werk diirfte dazu in hohem Maasse empfehlenswerth sein ; es
ist keine leichte Lektiire, aber wir sind gewiss, dass jeder fiir die
daran gewendete Arbeit sich reich belohnt fiihlen wurde."

Reviews of u Natural Theology and Modern Thought"
" Literarische Rundschau."
"Eine griindliche, hochinteressante Auseinandersetzung mit der
modernen Naturwissenschaft und den 'fiihrenden Geistern,'eine Kritik
der wider die Grundlagen des Gottesglaubens im menschlichen Denken
und Erkennen gerichteten Angriffe des modernen Materialismus. ' So
weit auch die Wissenschaft ihren kiihnen Flug ausdehnen mag: sie
hat es iiberall mit einem Kosmos, nirgends mit einem Chaos zu thun,'
dies der Grundgedanke etc."
"Zeitschrift fur evang. Religionsunterricht."
"Das Buch ist mit grosser Sachkenntiss und gewandt iibersetzt.
Mit Recht weist Zbckler darauf hin, dass die neuerdings so beliebte
Preisgebung der Gottesbeweise eine Uebereilung ist. Wenn wir auch
im Unterricht mit Gottesbeweisen keinen Gottesglauben erzeugen
konnen, so lasst sich an diese Gottesbeweise doch vorziiglich eine
Widerlegung der Irrtiimer des Naturalismus und Materialismus an-
kniipfen, die sich in mancherlei Schriften sogar an unsere Jugend
herandr'angen. Es ist ein Fehler, das einfach ignoriren zu wollen.
Der Herr Rezensent gibt nun eine eingehende Darstellung des Inhalis
und schliesst seine Anzeige wie folgt :
" Die Untersuchungen Kennedy's erwecken, wie man sieht, auch
durch die grosse Beherrschung der Literatur das grosste Interesse.
Vermisst wird die Heranziehung von Lotze."
"Evan. Kirchenzeitung."
" Eine Refutatio Atheismi hodierni, eine Erweisung des guten Rechts
der naturtheologischen Grundlagen der Gotteserkenntniss gegeniiber
dem wissenschaftlichen Skepticismus unsrer Tage."
" Post."
"Sie ist ein werthvoller Versuch, der modernen Weltanschauung
des Materialismus gegeniiber den Glauben an einen personlichen und
lebendigen Gott zu retten und zu starken."
" Wissenschaftliche Beilage zur Leipziger Zeitung."
" Der englische Gelehrte, dessen Werk ganz entschieden diese seine
Einfiihrung in Deutschland verdient, bietet in sechs apologetischen
Votragen, aus Veranlassung einer Stiftung in Dublin gehalten, eine
eingehende Wurdigung und Widerlegung der modernen Naturwissen
schaft, soweit sie Naturphilosophie mit materialistischem Charakter

Reviews of "Natural Theology and Modern Thought"

ist. Es muthet einen ganz eigenartig an, die Philosophie des Geistes
auf solche Art von ihrer sicheren Burg aus sich genen allerlei An-
griffe des Naturalismus vertheidigen zu sehen, nachdem man schon
seit langer Zeit gewohnt war, dass die Apologeten ins Gefilde her-
niedersteigen, um mit jedem Gegner einzeln anzubinden, und sich
schon geringer zweifelhafter Siege machtig freuten. In diesem starken
Bewusstsein seines Rechts und seiner durch keinen Materialismus zu
iiberwindenden Kraft sehen wir einen Hauptvorzug dieses muthigen
Vorstosses seitens des Idealismus: was der menschliche Geist folge-
richtig denkt, das ist ihm selber und also iiberhaupt viel gewisser,
als was durch Vermittelung der Sinnenwelt ihm als gewiss erscheint.
Leider verbietet uns die dringende AufForderung der Redaction zur
Kiirze ein naheres Eingehen auf die Einzelheiten des interessanten
Buches mit seiner altmodischen, aber darum nicht ungiltigen Wahrheit."
" Deutsche evang. Kirchenzeitung."
"Das vorliegende Buch ist eine wahre Bereicherung der apologe-
tischen Theologie." "Schlesische Zeitung."
"Ausserordentlich gliicklich ist das ebenso gelehrte wie anregend
geschriebene Buch durch das Vorwort Professor Zockler's eingeleitet,
welcher als Endergebniss der vorgef iihrten Untersuchungen bezeichnet,
dass auch die gefordertste Kenntniss von den Dingen dieser Welt
nichts enthalt, was die sinnlose Zufalllehre der Materialisten be-
giinstigt, sondern nur Zeugnisse fur das Vorhandensein eines die Welt
verwaltenden absoluten Schopfers bringt, und dass es an wichtigen
Beriihrungspunkten nicht fehlt, welche den theoretischen und den
praktischen Glauben, also die Gotteserkenntniss im Gewissen mit der
Naturerkenntniss verbinden. Die vortreffliche deutsche Uebersetzung
hat sich der Sprech- und Denkweise des gelehrten englischen Ver-
fassers mit so gliicklichem Verstandniss angepasst, dass man bei der
Lektiire des Buches durchaus nicht den Eindruck einer Uebersetzung,
sondern eines Originalwerkes erha.lt. Dem trefflichen Inhalt entspricht
die Ausstattung des bekannten Verlages."
"Zeitschrift fiir Missionskunde und Religionswissenschaft."
" Das Bedeutendste in dem Buche scheint mir die Pruning (S. 94 ff.).
ob die Lehre von der natiirlichen Zuchtwahl einen ausreichenden
Ersatz fur die Zweckmassigkeitslehre liefern kann. Die Frage ist
wichtig, denn von ihrer Beantwortung wird es abhangen, ob wir in
der Planmassigkeit der Natur einen Beweis haben, der keine wissen-

Reviews of " Natural Theology and Modern Thought"
schaftliche Pruning zu scheuen braucht. Reicht der Grundsatz vom
'Ueberleben der Tauglichsten ' aus, urn die oft wunderbaren Ver-
kniipfungen in der Natur zu erklaren, das ist die Frage. Viel zum
Nachdenken anregende, wenn auch nicht entscheidende Griinde fiihrt
der Verfasser mit Geschick und Geschmack ins Gefecht, um die Teleo-
logie in der Natur zu begriinden. Auch der Kenner wird manches
Neue und Fbrdernde in seinen Ausfuhrungen finden."
" Deutsche Revue."
"Mit Recht hat der gelehrte und scharf denkende Verfasser sich
vor allem mit Du Bois-Reymond beschaftigt, weil dieser nicht bios
der bedeutendste, sondern, wie es nach seinen letzten Werken scheint,
auch der aufrichtigste Vertreter der materialistischen Weltanschauung
ist. Treffend und uberzeugend zeigt der Verfasser, indem er uns in
klarer und sicher fortschreitender Darstellung alles Fur und Wider
vorfiihrt, dass dem gehaltlosen, unbefriedigenden Pyrrhonismus, in
den jener Gelehrte zu versinken fiirchtet und der in der That die
Konsequenz der automatischen Weltanschauung des Materialismus ist,
der Glaube an eine schaffende und zwecksetzende Gottheit nicht bios
dem Wunsche, sondern auch der Logik nach vorgezogen werden muss
und dass die von Du Bois-Reymond als 'rettende Planke' ergriffene
Darwin'sche Zuchtwahl wohl viele einzelne Erscheinungen, keineswegs
aber alle, am wenigsten das Schbne und Erhabene in der Welt er
klaren kann. Treffend bemerkt er gegen Lange, welcher jede
Mbglichkeit einer Einwirkung des Willens auf die Materie und auf
das Geschehene leugnet, dass, wenn dies so ware, alle kleinen und
grossen Ereignisse der Weltgeschichte, alle Fortschritte, Erfindungen
u. s. w. hatten geschehen konnen, ohne dass irgend ein Mensch sich
dessen bewusst oder irgendwie ind Gemiithe dadurch erregt war.
Eingehender hatte nach unsrer Ansicht das Kapitel iiber die Willens-
freiheit, einen der wichtigsten Punkte in der ganzen Streitsache, be-
handelt werden konnen ; hbchst befriedigend ist aber dann wieder der
iiber Kant und den moralischen Gottesbeweis handelnde Abschnitt,
in welchem die von Kant entschieden verworfene Untrennbarkeit des
theoretischen und des praktischen Gottesglaubens klar nachgewiesen
wird. Das vortreffliche Buch wird den Bekennern des Theismus sehr
willkommen und lehrreich sein, es darf und wird aber auch von den
Gegnern gewiss nicht unbeachtet gelassen werden."

PART OF THE COMMENTARY
OF
S. HIPPOLYTUS ON DANIEL
WITH
INTRODUCTION, NOTES, AND TRANSLATION

1/-. Dublin : Hodges, Figgis, Co.

This work has been favourably reviewed in the leading German
theological reviews, and is the subject of a lengthened notice by
Bishop Lightfoot in the second volume of his edition of S. Clement
of Rome. It was the first edition published in Western Europe since
the discovery of the manuscript by Georgiades in the island of Chalce.

PLYMOUTH
WILLIAM BRENDON AND SON
PRINTERS

A CATALOGUE OF BOOKS
AND ANNOUNCEMENTS OF
METHUEN AND COMPANY
PUBLISHERS : LONDON
36 ESSEX STREET
W.C.
CONTENTS
PAGE
FORTHCOMING BOOKS, . 2
POETRY, ... g
BELLES LETTRES, ANTHOLOGIES, ETC., . IO
methuen's STANDARD LIBRARY, . 1 1
ILLUSTRATED AND GIFT BOOKS, 13
HISTORY, . ... 14
BYZANTINE TEXTS, . . IS
BIOGRAPHY, ... .16
TRAVEL, ADVENTURE AND TOPOGRAPHY, . 17
NAVAL AND MILITARY, . 18
GENERAL LITERATURE, 19
PHILOSOPHY, . 21
THEOLOGY, . 2 I
FICTION, - 26
BOOKS FOR BOYS AND GIRLS, 35
THE PEACOCK LIBRARY, . . 35
UNIVERSITY EXTENSION SERIES, 35
SOCIAL QUESTIONS OF TO-DAY 36
CLASSICAL TRANSLATIONS, 37
EDUCATIONAL BOOKS, . 37
FEBRUARY 1900

February 1900

Messrs. Methuen's
ANNOUNCEMENTS

Travel, Adventure and Topography
THROUGH ASIA. By Sven Hedin. With 300 Illustrations
from Photographs and Sketches by the Author, and 3 Maps. Second
and cheaper Edition in 16 Fortnightly Parts at is. each net; or in
two volumes. Royal %-vo. 2,0s. net.
An extract from a review of this great book, which The Times has called ' one of the
best books of the century,' will be found on p. 17. The present form of issue places
it within the reach of buyers of moderate means.
THE BOER STATES. A History and Description of the
Transvaal and the Orange Free State. By A. H. Keane, M.A.
With Map. Crown 8vo. 6s.
This volume aims at giving, in a form suitable for permanent reference, an accurate
account of the Two Boer States as constituted before the present war. The subject
is treated under two main divisions — Land and People — the former geographical
and descriptive, the latter historical and ethnographic. The book is written in
the interest neither of Boer nor Briton, and all political topics are dealt with from
the standpoint of the onlooker. In the first part much attention is paid to the
natural resources of the Country. Historical events close with the Kruger-Milner
Conference, June 1899.
THE STORY OF THE BOER WAR. With Maps, Plans, and
Portraits. In Fortnightly Parts. Quarto, is. each.
This important work will be commenced in parts immediately, and will give a
complete and connected account of the military operations in South Africa from
the declaration to the end of the present war.
Such a work, relating in a lively, accurate, and intelligible manner the events of a
war which is stirring the British people as no events have stirred them since the
Indian Mutiny, is certaiti to meet a cordial reception.
Each part is well illustrated with plans and portraits.
History and Biography
A HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF CYPRUS. By John
Hackett, M.A. With Maps and Illustrations. Demy %vo. 12s.
6d. net.
A work which brings together all that is known on the subject from the introduction
of Christianity to the commencement of the British occupation. A separate
division deals with the local Latin Church during the period of the Western
Supremacy.

Messrs. Methuen's Announcements 3
A HISTORY OF EGYPT, from the Earliest Times to
the Present Day. Edited by W. M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L.,
LL.D., Professor of Egyptology at University College. Fully Illus
trated. In Six Volumes. Crown %vo. 6s. each.
Vol. VI. Egypt under the Saracens. By Stanley Lane-
Poole.

Theology

ST. PAUL'S SECOND AND THIRD EPISTLES TO THE
CORINTHIANS. With Introduction, Dissertations, and Notes by
James Houghton Kennedy, D.D., Assistant Lecturer in Divinity
in the University of Dublin. Sometime Donnellan Lecturer, etc. etc.
Crown 8vo. 6s.
THE SOUL OF A CHRISTIAN. By F. S. Granger, M.A.,
Litt.D. Crown Svo. 6s.
Gbe Gburcbman's JBlMe
General Editor, J. H. Burn, B.D., Examining Chaplain to the Bishop
of Aberdeen.
Messrs. Methuen propose to issue a series of expositions upon most
of the books of the Bible. The volumes will be practical and devotional
rather than critical in their purpose, and the text of the authorised version
will be explained in sections or paragraphs, which will correspond as far
as possible with the divisions of the Church Lectionary.
The volumes will be produced in a very handy and tasteful form, and
may be obtained in cloth or leather bindings.
THE EPISTLE OF PAUL THE APOSTLE TO THE
PHILIPPIANS. Explained by C. R. D. Biggs, B.D. Reap.
8vo. is. 6d. net ; leather, 2s. 6d. net.
XLbe Gburcbman's Xlbrarg
Edited by J. H. Burn, B.D.
EVOLUTION. By F. B. Jevons, Litt. D., Principal of Hatfield
Hall, Durham. Crown Svo. y- 6d.
Ube Xlbrarg of Devotion
Pott 8vo. Cloth 2s. ; leather 2s. 6d. net.
NEW VOLUME.
A GUIDE TO ETERNITY. By Cardinal Bona. Edited
with an Introduction and Notes by J. W. Stanbridge, B.D., late
Fellow of St. John's College, Oxford.

4 Messrs. Methuen's Announcements
Classical
THE NICOMACHEAN ETHICS OF ARISTOTLE. Edited,
with an Introduction and Notes by JOHN Burnet, M.A., Professor
of Greek at St. Andrews. Demy8vo. i$s. net.
This edition contains parallel passages from the Eudemian Ethics,_ printed under the
text, and there is a full commentary, the main object of .which is to interpret
difficulties in the light of Aristotle's own rules.
THE CAPTIVI OF PLAUTUS. Edited, with an Introduction,
Textual Notes, and a Commentary, by W. M. Lindsay, Fellow of
Jesus College, Oxford. Demy 8vo. ios. 6d. net.
For this edition all the important mss. have been re-collated. An appendix deals
with the accentual element in early Latin verse. The Commentary is very full.
©jforo Classical Zctts
Crown 8vo.
Messrs. Methuen are about to publish in conjunction with the
Clarendon Press a series of classical texts edited by competent scholars
from the best mss. The first volumes are : —
THUCYDIDIS HISTORIAE, Libri I.-IV. By H. Stuart
Jones. Paper Covers, 3s. Limp Cloth, 3s. 6d.
PLATONIS OPERA, Tom. I. (Tetralogiae I.-II.) By J.
Burnet. Paper Covers, 5s. Limp Cloth, 6s.
LVCRETI CARI DE RERVM NATVRA. By C. BAILEY.
Paper Covers, 2s. 6d. Limp Cloth, 3s.
CORNELII TACITI OPERA MINORA. By H. Ftjrneaux.
Paper Covers, Is. 6d. Limp Cloth, 2s.
AESCHYLI TRAGOEDIAE CUM FRAGMENTIS. By A.
Sidgwick. Paper Covers, y. Limp Cloth, y. 6d.

Spc

>ort
Cbe Xibrarg of Sport
THE ART AND PRACTICE OF HAWKING. By E. B.
Michell. With three Photogravures by G. E. Lodge, and other
Illustrations. Demy 8vo. ios. 6d.
A complete description of the Hawks, Falcons, and Eagles used in ancient and
modern times, with directions for their training and treatment. It is not only a
historical account, but a complete practical guide.
General Literature
TENNYSON AS A RELIGIOUS TEACHER. By CHARLES
F. G. Masterman, M.A. Crown 8vo. 6s.

Messrs. Methuen's Announcements 5
AN ANTHOLOGY OF IRISH VERSE. Edited by W. B.
Yeats. Crown 8vo, gilt top. $s. 6d. Revised and enlarged edition.
' An attractive and catholic selection.'— Times.
A HANDBOOK OF NURSING. By M. N. Oxford, of
Guy's Hospital. Crown 8vo. $s. 6d.
This is a complete guide to the science and art of nursing, containing copious
instruction both general and particular.
Methuen's Standard Library
THE DECLINE AND FALL OF THE ROMAN EMPIRE.
By Edward Gibbon. Edited by J. B. Bury, LL.D., Fellow of
Trinity College, Dublin. In Seven Volumes. Demy 8vo, gilt top.
8s. 6d. each. Crown 8vo. 6s. each. Vol. VII.
The concluding Volume of this Edition.
THE HISTORY OF THE LIFE OF THOMAS ELLWOOD.
Edited by C. G. Crump, B. A. Crown 8vo, gilt top. 6s.
THE EARLY POEMS OF ALFRED, LORD TENNYSON.
Edited, with Notes and Introduction by J. Churton Collins, M.A.
Crown 8vo. 6s.
An elaborate edition of the celebrated volumes which was published in its final and
definitive form in 1S53. This edition contains a long Introduction and copious
Notes, textual and explanatory.
Scientific and Educational
THE SCIENTIFIC STUDY OF SCENERY. By J. E. MARR,
Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. With numerous illustra
tions and diagrams. Crown 8vo. 6s.
An elementary treatise on geomorphology — the study of the earth's outward forms.
It is for the use of students of physical geography and geology, and will also be
highly interesting to the general reader.
EDUCATIONAL REFORM. By Fabian Ware, M.A.
Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
An attempt by an expert to forecast the action and influence of the New Secondary
Education Act, with suggestions for useful developments.
THE STORY OF ENGLISH LITERATURE. By Emma S.
Mellows. Crown 8vo. y. 6d.
The history of English literature told in a simple style for young students. It is
particularly rich in biographical detail and oontains a considerable number of
illustrative extracts.
THE CONSTRUCTION OF LARGE INDUCTION COILS.
By A. T. Hare, M.A. With numerous diagrams. Demy 8vo. 6s.
THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF MILLINERY. By
Miss Hill, Registered Teacher to the City and Guilds of London
Institute. With numerous diagrams. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
[Text-books of Technology

6 Messrs. Methuen's Announcements
experimental chemistry. by w. french, m.a.
Part I. With numerous diagrams. Crown 8vo. is. 6d.
[ Text-books of Technology
LACE-MAKING IN THE MIDLANDS, PAST AND
PRESENT. By C. C. Channer and M. E. Roberts. With 16
full-page illustrations. Crown %vo. 2s. 6d.
THE METRIC SYSTEM. By Leon DELBOS. CrownZvo. 2s.
A theoretical and practical guide, for use in elementary schools and by the general
reader.
A SOUTH AFRICAN ARITHMETIC. By Henry Hill,
B.A., Assistant Master at Worcester School, Cape Colony. Crown
8vo. y. 6d.
This book has been specially written for use in South African schools.
A KEY TO STEDMAN'S EASY LATIN EXERCISES. By
C. G. Botting, M.A. Crown 8vo. y. net.
Zbe flovels of Cbarles SMcfcens
With Introductions by George Gissing, Notes by F. G. Kitton,
and Illustrations.
Crown 8vo. Each Volume, cloth y. net, leather 4s. 6d. net.
The first volumes are :
THE PICKWICK PAPERS. With Illustrations by E. H. New.
Two Volumes.
NICHOLAS NICKLEBY. With Illustrations by R. J. Williams.
Two Volumes.
BLEAK HOUSE. With Illustrations by Beatrice Alcock. Two
Volumes.
OLIVER TWIST. With Illustrations by E. H. New. One Volume.
Gbe Xtttle Xibrarg
With Introductions, Notes, and Photogravure Frontispieces.
Pott 8vo. Each Volume, cloth Is. 6d. net. ; leather 2s. 6d. net.
NEW VOLUMES.
THE EARLY POEMS OF ALFRED, LORD TENNYSON.
Edited by J. C. Collins, M.A.
IN MEMORIAM. By Alfred, Lord Tennyson. Edited by
H. C. Beeching, M.A.
MAUD. By Alfred, Lord Tennyson. With Introduction
and Notes by Elizabeth Wordsworth.
A LITTLE BOOK OF ENGLISH LYRICS. With Notes.

Messrs. Methuen's Announcements 7
PRIDE AND PREJUDICE. By Jane Austen. With an
Introduction and Notes by E. V. Lucas. Two Volumes.
PENDENNIS. By W. M. Thackeray. With an Introduction
by S. Gwynn. Three volumes.
EOTHEN. By A. W. Kinglake. With an Introduction and
Notes.
CRANFORD. By Mrs. Gaskell. With an Introduction and
Notes by E. V. Lucas.
THE INFERNO OF DANTE. Translated by H. F. Cary.
With an Introduction and Notes by Paget Toynbee.
JOHN HALIFAX, GENTLEMAN. By Mrs. Craik. With
an Introduction by Annie Matheson. Two volumes.
A LITTLE BOOK OF SCOTTISH VERSE. Arranged and
Edited by T. F. Henderson.

Fiction
THE GATELESS BARRIER. By Lucas Malet, Author of
'The Wages of Sin.' Crown 8vo. 6s.
AN OCTAVE. By W. E. NORRIS. Crown &vo. 6s.
A volume of eight stories.
THE PLUNDERERS. By MORLEY ROBERTS, Author of ' The
Colossus,' etc. Crown 8vo. 6s.
CEASEFIRE. By J. MACLAREN Cobban. Crown 8vo. $s.6d.
A stirring story of the Boer War of 1881, including the siege of Potchefstrom and the
defeat of Majuba.
THE DESPATCH RIDER. By Ernest Glanville. Author
of 'The Kloof Bride.' Crown 8vo. 6s.
A highly interesting story of the ^present Boer War by an author who knows the
country well, and has had experience of Boer campaigning.
FOR RIGHT AND ENGLAND. By Hume Nisbet. Crown
8vo. 6s.
A story of the Transvaal War of 1899.

8 Messrs. Methuen's Announcements
MARVELS AND MYSTERIES. By Richard Marsh, Author
of 'The Beetle.' Crown 8vo. 6s.
MIRRY-ANN. By Norma Lorimer, Author of ' Josiah's Wife.'
Crown 8vo. 6s.
THE STRONG GOD CIRCUMSTANCE. By Helen Ship-
ton. Crown %vo. 6s.
AN UNKNOWN QUANTITY. By Esme Stuart. Crown
8vo. 6s.
A SON OF THE STATE. By W. Pett Ridge. Author of
' Mord Em'Iy.' Crown 8vo. y. 6d.
THE INCA'S TREASURE. By Ernest Glanville, Author
of ' The Kloof Bride.' Crown 8vo. y. 6d.
Zbc iRovelist
a monthly series of new novels by popular authors at Sixpence. Each
Number is as long as the average Six Shilling Novel. Numbers I. to
VII. are now ready, and No. VIII. will be : —
PRISONERS OF WAR. By Boyson Weekes.

A CATALOGUE OF
Messrs. Methuen's
PUBLICATIONS

Poetry

Rudyard Kipling. BARRACK-ROOM
BALLADS. By Rudyard Kipling.
6yd Thousand. Crown Zvo. 6s.
Leather, 6s. net.
' Mr. Kipling's verse is strong, vivid, full
of character. . . . Unmistakeable genius
rings in every line.' — Times.
' The ballads teem with imagination, they
palpitate with emotion. We read them
with laughter and tears ; the metres throb
in our pulses, the cunningly ordered
words tingle with life ; and if this be not
poetry, what is ? ' — Pall Mall Gazette.
Rudyard Kipling. THE SEVEN
SEAS. By Rudyard Kipling.
55/A Thousand. Cr. Zvo. Buckram,
gilt top. 6s. Leather, 6s. net.
' The Empire has found a singer ; it is no
depreciation of the songs tovsay that
statesmen may have, one way or other,
to take account of them.' — Manchester
Guardian.
'Animated through and through with in
dubitable genius.' — Daily Telegraph.
"Q." POEMS AND BALLADS. By
"Q." Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' Thisworkhasjust the faint, ineffable touch
and glow that make poetry.' — Speaker.
"Q." GREEN BAYS: Verses and
Parodies. By"Q." Second Edition.
Crown 8vo. $s. 6d.
T. Maekay. A SONG OF THE SEA.
By Eric Mackay. Second Edition.
Fcap. Zvo. 5J.
' Everywhere Mr. Mackay displays himself
the master of a style marked by all the
characteristics of the best rhetoric.'—
Globe. A

H. Ibsen. BRAND. A Drama by
Henrik Ibsen. Translated by
William Wilson. Third Edition.
Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
1 The greatest world-poem of the nineteenth
century next to "Faust" It is in the
same set with " Agamemnon," with
" Lear," with the literature that we now
instinctively regard as high and holy.' —
Daily Chronicle.
A. D. GorHey. LYRA FRIVOLA. By
A. D. Godley, M.A., Fellow of
Magdalen College, Oxford. Third
Edition. Pott Zvo. 2s. 6d.
(A pretty and witty little book.' — Pall
Mall Gazette.
1 Combines a pretty wit with remarkably
neat versification. . . . Every one will
wish "there was more of it. — Times.
A. D. Godley. VERSES TO ORDER.
By A. D. Godley. Crown Zvo.
2s. 6d. net.
'A capital specimen of light academic
poetry. ' — St. James's Gazette.
James Williams. VENTURES IN
VERSE. By James Williams,
Fellow of Lincoln College, Oxford.
Crown Zvo. %s. 6d.
' In matter and manner the book is admir
able.' — Glasgow Herald.
J. G. Cordery. THE ODYSSEY OF
HOMER. A Translation by J. G.
Cordery. Crown Zvo. js. td.
2

IO

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Belles Lettres, Anthologies, etc.

R. L. Stevenson. VAILIMA LET
TERS. By Robert Louis Steven
son. With an Etched Portrait by
William Strang. Second Edition.
Crown Zvo. Buckram. 6s.
'A fascinating book.' — Standard.
' Full of charm and brightness.' — Spectator.
'Unique in Literature.' — Daily Chronicle.
G.Wyndham. THE POEMS OF WIL
LIAM SHAKESPEARE. Edited
with an Introduction and Notes by
George Wyndham, M.P. Demy
Zvo. Buckram, gilt top. ios. 6d.
This edition contains the ' Venus, ' ( Lucrece, '
and Sonnets, and is prefaced with an
elaborate introduction of over 140 pp.
'We have no hesitation in describing Mr.
George Wyndham's introduction as a
masterly piece of criticism, and all who
love our Elizabethan literature willfmd a
very garden of delight in it.' — Spectator.
W. E. Henley. ENGLISH LYRICS.
Selected and Edited by W. E.
Henley. Crown Zvo. Gilt top.
3s. 6d.
1 It is a body of choice and lovely poetry.' —
Birmingham Gazette.
Henley and Whibley. A BOOK OF
ENGLISH PROSE. Collected by
W. E. Henley and Charles
Whibley. Crown Zvo. Buckram,
gilt top. 6s.
' Quite delightful. _ A greater treat for those
not well acquainted with pre-Restora-
tion prose could not be imagined.' —
A thenceum.
H. C. Beeching. LYRA SACRA : An
Anthology of Sacred Verse. Edited
by H. C. Beeching, M.A. Crown
Zvo. Buckram. 6s.
CA charming selection, which maintains a
lofty standard of excellence.' — Times.
"Q." THE GOLDEN POMP. A Pro
cession of English Lyrics. Arranged
by A. T. Quiller Couch. Crown
Zvo. Buckram. 6s.
' A delightful volume : a really golden
" Pomp." ' — Spectator.

W. B. Yeats. AN ANTHOLOGY OF
IRISH VERSE. Edited by W. B.
Yeats. Revised and Enlarged
Edition. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
'An attractive and catholic selection.' —
Times.
G. W. Steevens. MONOLOGUES OF
THE DEAD. By G. W. STEEVENS.
Foolscap Zvo. 3s. 6d.
1 The effect is sometimes splendid, some
times bizarre, but always amazingly
clever.' — Pall Mall Gazette.
W. M. Dixon. A PRIMER OF
TENNYSON. By W. M. Dixon,
M.A. Cr. Zvo. zs. 6d.
' Much sound and well-expressed criticism,
The bibliography is a boon. ' — Speaker.
W. A. Craigie. A PRIMER OF
BURNS. By W. A. Craigie.
Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.
' A valuable addition to the literature of the
poet.' — Times.
L. Magnus. A PRIMER OF WORDS
WORTH. By Laurie Magnus.
Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.
' A valuable contribution to Wordsworthian
literature.' — Literature.
Sterne. THE LIFE AND OPINIONS
OF TRISTRAM SHANDY. By
Lawrence Sterne. With an In
troduction by Charles Whibley,
and a Portrait. 2 vols. ys.
1 Very dainty volumes are these : the paper,
type, and light -green binding are all very
agreeable to the eye.' — Globe.
Congreve. THE COMEDIES OF
WILLIAM CONGREVE. With an
Introduction by G. S. Street, and
a Portrait. 2 vols. ys.
Morier. THE ADVENTURES OF
HAJJI BABA OF ISPAHAN. By
James Morier. With an Introduc
tion by E. G. Browne, M.A. and a
Portrait. 2 vols. -js.
Walton. THE LIVES OF DONNE,
WOTTON, HOOKER, HERBERT
and SANDERSON. By Izaak
Walton. With an Introduction by
Vernon Blackburn, and a Por
trait. 3s. 6d.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

ii

Johnson. THE LIVES OF THE
ENGLISH POETS. By Samuel
Johnson, LL.D. With an Intro
duction by J. H. Millar, and a Por
trait. 3 vols. ios. 6d.
Burns. THE POEMS OF ROBERT
BURNS. Edited by Andrew Lang
and W. A. Craigie. With Portrait.
Second Edition. Demy Zvo, gilt top.
6s.
'Among editions in one volume, this will
take the place of authority.' — Times.

F. Langtaidge. BALLADS OF THE
BRAVE ; Poems of Chivalry, Enter
prise, Courage, and Constancy.
Edited by Rev. F. Langbridge.
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
School Edition, zs. 6d.
' A very happy conception happily carried
out. t These " Ballads of the Brave "
are intended to suit the real tastes of
boys, and will suit the taste of the great
maj ority . ' — Spectator.
'The book is full of splendid things.' —
World.

Methuen's Standard Library

Dante. LA COMMEDIA DI
DANTE ALIGHIERI. Edited by
Paget Toynbee, M.A. Crown
Zvo. 6s.
This edition of the Italian text of the Diyine
Comedy, founded on Witters minor
edition, carefully revised, is issued in
commemoration of the sixth century of
Dante's journey through the three king
doms of the other world.
(A carefully-revised text,' printed with
beautiful clearness. '^-Glasgow Herald.
Gibbon. THE DECLINE AND
FALL OF THE ROMAN EMPIRE.
By Edward Gibbon. A New Edi
tion, Edited with Notes, Appendices,

and Maps, by J. B. Bury, LL.D.,
Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin.
In Seven Volumes. Demy Zvo. Gilt
top. Zs. 6d. each. Also Cr. Zvo. 6s.
each. Vols. /., //., III., IV., V., and
VI.
' The time has certainly arrived for a new
edition of Gibbon's great work. . . . Pro
fessor Bury is the right man to under
take this task. His learning is amazing,
both in extent and accuracy. The book
is issued in a handy form, and at a
moderate price, and it is admirably
printed, ' — Times.
' At I ast t h ere is an adequate modern edition
of Gibbon. . . . The best edition the
nineteenth century could produce.' —
Manchester Guardian.

Zbe Wlorfts of Sbaftespeare
General Editor, Edward Dowden, Litt. D.
Messrs. Methuen have in preparation an Edition of Shakespeare in
single Plays. Each play will be edited with a full Introduction, Textual
Notes, and a Commentary at the foot of the page.
The first volume is :

HAMLET. DOWDEN.

Edited by Edward
Demy Zvo. 3s. 6d.

•An admirable edition. ... A comely
volume, admirably printed and produced,

and containing all that a student of
' Hamlet ' need require.' — Speaker.
1 No previous edition known to us contains
so much information in so agreeable an
outward form.' — Daily Chronicle.
1 Fully up to the level of recent scholarship,
both English and German. — Academy.

Zbe "Uovcls ot Cbarles SMcfcens
Crown 8vo. Each Volume, cloth y. net ; leather 4s. 6d. net.
Messrs. Methuen have in preparation an edition of those novels of Charles
Dickens which have now passed out of copyright. Mr. George Gissing,
whose critical study of Dickens is both sympathetic and acute, has written an

12

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Introduction to each of the books, and a very attractive feature of this edition
will be the illustrations of the old houses, inns, and buildings, which Dickens
described, and which have now in many instances disappeared under the
touch of modern civilisation. Another valuable feature will be a series of
topographical and general notes to each book by Mr. F. G. Kitton. The books
will be produced with the greatest care as to printing, paper and binding.
The first volumes are :
THE PICKWICK PAPERS. With Illustrations by E. H. New. Two Volumes.
1 As pleasant a copy as any one could desire. The notes add much to the value of the
edition, and Mr. New's illustrations are also historical. The volumes promise well
for the success of the edition.' — Scotsman.

XLbe Xfttle 3Ltbrary>
'The volumes are compact in size, printed on thin but good paper in clear type,
prettily and at the same time strongly bound, and altogether good to look upon and
handle.' — Outlook.
Pott 8vo. Each Volume, cloth Is. 6d. net, leather 2S. 6d. net.
Messrs. Methuen intend to produce a series of small books under the
above title, containing some of the famous books in English and other
literatures, in the domains of fiction, poetry, and belles lettres. The series
will also contain several volumes of selections in prose and verse.
The books will be edited with the most sympathetic and scholarly care.
Each one will contain an Introduction which will give ( I ) a short biography of
the author, (2) a critical estimate of the book. Where they are necessary,
short notes will be added at the foot of the page.
Each book will have a portrait or frontispiece in photogravure, and the
volumes will be produced with great care in a style uniform with that of ' The
Library of Devotion. '
The first volumes are :

VANITY FAIR. By W. M. THACK
ERAY. With an Introduction by S.
Gwynn. Illustrated by G. P.
JACOMB Hood. Three Volumes.
' Delightful little volumes.' — Publishers'
Circular.
1 Charming little volumes with an admir
able introduction.' — Star.

THE PRINCESS. By Alfred, Lord
Tennyson. Edited by Elizabeth
Wordsworth. Illustrated by W.
E. F. Britten.
' Just_ what a pocket edition should be.
Miss^Wordsworth contributes an accept-
ableintroduction, as well as notes which
one is equally glad to get.' — Guardian.

Zbe Xtttle ©uloes

Pott 8vo, cloth y. ;
OXFORD AND ITS COLLEGES.
By J. Wells, M.A., Fellow and
Tutor of Wadham College. Illus
trated by E. H. New. Third Edition.
' An admirable and accurate little treatise,
attractively illustrated.' — World.
'Aluminous and tasteful little volume.' —
Daily Chronicle.

leather, y. 6d. net.
CAMBRIDGE AND ITS COL
LEGES. By A. Hamilton Thomp
son. Illustrated by E. H. New.
1 It is brightly written and learned, and is
just such a hook as a cultured visitor
needs.' — Scotsman.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

13

SHAKESPEARE'S COUNTRY. By
B. C. Windle. F.R.S., M.A. Illus
trated by E. H. New.
' Mr. .Windle is thoroughly conversant with
his subject, and the work is exceedingly
well done. The drawings, by Mr.
Edmund H. New, add much to the

attractiveness of the volume.1 — Scots-
man.
' One of the most charming guide books.
Both for the library and as a travelling
companion the book is equally choice
and serviceable.' — Academy.
'A guide book of the best kind, which
takes rank as literature.'— Guardian.

Illustrated and Gjft Books

Phil May. THE PHIL MAY
ALBUM, afo. 6s.
This highly interesting volume contains 100
drawings by Mr. Phil May, and is repre
sentative of his earliest and finest work.
'There is a laugh in each drawing.' —
Standard.
A. H. Milne. ULYSSES ; OR, DE
ROUGEMONT OF TROY. De
scribed and depicted by A . H. Milne.
Small quarto. 3s. 6d.
The adventures of Ulysses, told in humor
ous verse and pictures.
* A delicious bit of fooling.' — Queen.
' Clever, droll, smart.' — Guardian.
Edmund Selous. TOMMY SMITH'S
ANIMALS. By Edmund Selous.
Illustrated by G. W. Ord. Reap. Zvo.
zs. 6d.
A little book designed to teach children
respect and reverence for animals.
'A most fascinating little natural history
book.' — Lady.
'A little book which calls for more than
praise; it is one to be grateful for.' —
World.
'A quaint, fascinating little book: a nur
sery classic' — Athenesum.
S. Baring Gould. THE CROCK OF
GOLD. Fairy Stories told by S.
Baring Gould. Crown Zvo. 6s.
'Twelve delightful fairy tales.'— Punch.
M.L. Gwynn. A BIRTHDAY BOOK.
Arranged and Edited by M. L.
Gwynn. Demy Zvo. 12s. 6d.
This is a birthday-book of exceptional
dignity, and the extracts have been
chosen with particular care.
The three passages for each day bear a
certain relation to each other, and form
a repertory of sententious wisdom from
the best authors living or dead.
John Bunyan. THE PILGRIM'S
PROGRESS. By John Bunyan.

Edited, with an Introduction, by C. H.
Firth, M.A. With 39 Illustrations
by R. Anning Bell. Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 The best " Pilgrim's Progress."' —
Educational Times.
F. D. Bedford. NURSERY RHYMES.
With many Coloured Pictures by F.
D. Bedford. Super Royal Zvo. $s.
' An excellent selection of the best known
rhymes, with beautifully coloured pic
tures exquisitely printed.' — Pall Mall
Gazette.
S. Baling Gould. A BOOK OF
FAIRY TALES retold by S. Baring
Gould. With numerous Illustra
tions and Initial Letters by Arthur
J. Gaskin. Second Edition. Cr. Zvo.
Buckram. 6s.
' Mr. Baring Gould is deserving of grati
tude, in re-writing in simple style the,
old stories that delighted our fathers and
grandfathers.' — Saturday Review.
S. Baring Gould. OLD ENGLISH
FAIRY TALES. Collected and
edited by S. Baring Gould. With
Numerous Illustrations by F. D.
Bedford. Second Edition. Cr, Zvo.
Buckram. 6s.
' A charming volume. ' — Guardian.
S. Baring Gould. A BOOK OF
NURSERY SONGS AND
RHYMES. Edited by S. Baring
Gould, and Illustrated by the Bir
mingham Art School. Buckram, gilt
top. Crown Zvo. 6s.
H. C. Beeching. A BOOK OF
CHRISTMAS VERSE. Edited by
H. C. Beeching, M.A., and Illus
trated by Walter Crane. Cr. Zvo,
gilt top. $s. 6d.
An anthology which-, from its unity of aim
and high poetic excellence, has a better
right to exist than most of its fellows. ' —
Guardian.

14

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Flinders Petrie. A HISTORY OF
EGYPT, from the Earliest Times
to the Present Day. Edited by
W. M. Flinders Petrie, D.C.L.,
LL.D., Professor of Egyptology at
University College. Fully Illustrated.
In Six Volumes. Cr. Zvo. 6s. each.
Vol. I. Prehistoric Times to
XVIth Dynasty. WT M. F.
Petrie. Fourth Edition.
Vol. II. The XVIIth and
XVIIIth Dynasties. W. M.
F. Petrie. Third Edition.
Vol. IV. The Egypt of the
Ptolemies. J. P. Mahaffy.
Vol. V. Roman Egypt. J. G.
Milne.
' A history written in the spirit of scientific
precision so worthily represented by Dr.
Petrie and his school cannot but pro
mote sound and accurate study, and
supply a vacant place in the English
literature of Egyptology.' — Times.
Flinders Petrie. RELIGION AND
CONSCIENCE IN ANCIENT
EGYPT. By W. M. Flinders
PETRIE, D. C. L. , LL. D. Fully Illus
trated. Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.
' The lectures will afford a fund of valuable
information for students of ancient
ethics.' — Manchester Guardian.
Flinders Petrie. SYRIA AND
EGYPT, FROM THE TELL EL
AMARNA TABLETS. By W. M.
Flinders Petrie, D.C.L., LL.D.
Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.
' A marvellous record. The addition made
to our knowledge is nothing short of
amazing.' — Times.
Flinders Petrie. EGYPTIAN TALES.
Edited by W. M. Flinders Petrie.
Illustrated by Tristram Ellis. In
Two Volumes. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d. each.
' Invaluable as a picture of life in Palestine
and Egypt.' — Daily News.
Flinders Petrie. EGYPTIAN DECO
RATIVE ART. By W. M. Flin
ders Petrie. With 120 Illustrations.
Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' In these lectures he displays rare skill in
elucidating the development of decora
tive art in Egypt.' — Times. *

History

C. W. Omaji. A HISTORY OF THE
ART OF WAR. Vol. n. : The
Middle Ages, from the Fourth to the
Fourteenth Century. By C. W.
Oman, M.A., Fellow of All Souls',
Oxford. Illustrated. Demy 8vo. 21s.
' The book is based throughout upon a
thorough study of the original sources,
and will be an indispensable aid to all
students of mediaeval history.' — Athe-
naum.
' The whole art of war in its historic evolu
tion has never been treated on such an
ample and comprehensive scale, and we
question if any recent contribution to
the exact history of the world has pos
sessed more enduring value. ' — Daily
Chronicle.
S. Baring Gould. THE TRAGEDY
OF THE OESARS. With nume
rous Illustrations from Busts, Gems,
Cameos, etc. By S. Baring Gould.
Fourth Edition. Royal Zvo. 15J.
'A most splendid and fascinating book on a
subject of undying interest. The great
feature of the book is the use the author
has made of the existing portraits of
the Caesars and the admirable critical
subtlety he has exhibited in dealing with
this line of research. It is brilliantly
written, and the illustrations are sup
plied on a scale of profuse magnificence. '
— Daily Chronicle.
F. W. Maitland. CANON LAW IN
ENGLAND. By F. W. Maitland,
LL.D., Downing Professor of the
Laws of England in the University
of Cambridge. Royal 8vo. 7s, 6d.
' Professor Maitland has put students of
English law under a fresh debt. These
essays are landmarks in the study of the
history of Canon Law.' — Times.
H. de B. Gibbins. INDUSTRY IN
ENGLAND : HISTORICAL OUT
LINES. By H. de B. Gibbins,
Litt.D.,M.A. With 5 Maps. Se
cond Edition. Demy 8vo. xos. 6d.
H. E. Egerton. A HISTORY OF
BRITISH COLONIAL POLICY.
By H. E. Egerton, M.A. Demy
8vo. 12J. 6d.
It is a good book, distinguished by accu
racy in detail, clear arrangement of facts,
and a broad grasp of principles.' —
Manchester Guardian.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

15

Albert Sorel. THE EASTERN
QUESTION IN THE EIGH
TEENTH CENTURY. By Albert
Sorsl, of the French Academy.
Translated by F. C. Bramwell,
M.A. With a Map. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
C. H. Grinling. A HISTORY OF
THE GREAT NORTHERN RAIL
WAY, 1845-95. By Charles H.
Grinling. With Maps and Illus
trations. Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
' Mr. Grinlitg has done for a Railway what
Macauhvy did for English History.' —
The Engineer.
W. Sterry. ANNALS OF ETON
COLLEGE. By W. Sterry, M.A.
With numerous Illustrations. Demy
Zvo. 7s. 6d.
' A treasury of quaint and interesting read
ing. Mr. Sterry has by his skill and
vivacity givm these records new life.1 —
Academy.
G.W.Fisher. ANNALS OF SHREWS
BURY SCHOOL. By G. W.
Fisher, M.A., late Assistant Master.
With numerous Illustrations. Demy
Zvo. ios. 6d.
'This careful, erudite book.' — Daily
Chronicle.
' A book of which Oil Salopians are sure
to be proud.' — Globe
J. Sargeaunt ANNALS OF WEST
MINSTER SCHOOL. By J. Sar
geaunt, M.A., Asastant Master.
With numerous Ilhistiations. Demy
Zvo. js. 6d.
A. Clark. THE COLLEGES OF
OXFORD : Their History and their
Traditions. By Members of the
University. Edited by A Clark,
M.A., Fellow and Tutoi of Lincoln
College. Zvo. izs. 6d.
'A work which will be appealed to for

many years as the standard book.'—
Atkeneeum.
T.M. Taylor. A CONSTITUTIONAL
AND POLITICAL HISTORY OF
ROME. By T. M. Taylor, M.A. ,
Fellow of Gonville and Caius College,
Cambridge, Senior Chancellor's
Medallist for Classics, Porson Uni
versity Scholar, etc., etc. Crown
Zvo. 7s. 6d.
1 We fully recognise the value of this care
fully written work, and admire especially
the fairness and sobriety of his judgment
and the human interest with which he
has inspired a subject which in some
hands becomes a mere series of cold
abstractions. It is a work that will be
stimulating tp the student of Roman
history. ' — A thenccum.
J. Wells. A SHORT HISTORY OF
ROME. By J. Wells, M.A.,
Fellow and Tutor of Wadham Coll. ,
Oxford. Third Edition. With 3
Maps. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
This book is intended for the Middle and
Upper Forms of Public Schools and for
Pass Students at the Universities. It
contains copious Tables, etc.
'An original work written on an original
plan, and with uncommon freshness and
vigour. ' — Speaker.
0. Browning. A SHORT HISTORY
OF MEDLEVAL ITALY, A.D.
1250-1530. By Oscar Browning,
Fellow and Tutor of King's College,
Cambridge. In Two Volumes. Cr.
Zvo. 5J. each.
Vol. i. 1250-1409. — Guelphs and
Ghibellines.
Vol. ii. 1409-1530. — The Age of
the Condottieri.
O'Grady. THE STORY OF IRE
LAND. By Standish O'Grady,
Author of ' Finn and his Companions.
Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.

ZACHARIAH OF MIT^LENE.
Translated into English ty F. J.
Hamilton, D.D., and E. W.
Brooks. Demy Zvo. izs. U. net.
EVAGRIUS. Edited by Professor

Byzantine Texts
Edifcd by J. B. Bury, M.A.

L£on Parmentier and M. Bidez.
Demy Zvo. ios. 6d. net.
THE HISTORY OF PSELLUS.
By C. SATHAS. Demy Zvo. i$s.
net.

16

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

R. L. Stevenson. THE LETTERS
OF ROBERT LOUIS STEVEN
SON TO HIS FAMILY AND
FRIENDS. Selected and Edited,
with Notes and Introductions, by
Sidney Colvin. Third Edition.
Demy Bvo, 2<vo/s.s2$s, net.
'Irresistible in their raciness, their variety,
their animation ... of extraordinary
fascination. A delightful inheritance,
the truest record of a "richly com
pounded spirit'" that the literature of
our time has preserved.' — Times.
1 There _ are few books so interesting, so
moving, and so valuable as this collec
tion of letters. One can only commend
people to read and re-read the book. The
volumes are beautiful, and Mr. Colvin's
part of the work could not have been
better done, his introduction is a master
piece.' — Specta tor.
J. G. Millais. THE LIFE AND
LETTERS OF SIR JOHN
EVERETT MILLAIS, President of
the Royal Academy. By his Son,
J. G. Millais. With 319 Illus
trations, of which 9 are in Photo
gravure. Second Edition. 2 vols,
Royal 8vo, 32s. net.
1 Of unusual interest and charm, as manly,
unaffected, and simple, as was Millais
himself.' — Daily Chronicle.
1 The illustrations make the book delightful
to handle or to read. The eye lingers
lovingly upon the beautiful pictures.' —
Standard.
' This charming book is a gold mine of good
things.' — Daily News.
' This splendid work.' — World.
1 Deserves an honoured place on every
bookshelf. '—Pall Mall Gazette.
' Of such absorbing interest is it, of such
completeness in scope and beauty.
Special tribute must be paid to the
extraordinary completeness of the illus
trations. ' — Graphic.
S. Baring Gould. THE LIFE OF
NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. By
S. Baring Gould. With over 450
Illustrations in the Text and 1 2
Photogravure Plates. Large quarto.
Gilt top. 36J.
'The main feature of this gorgeous volume
is its great wealth of beautiful photo
gravures and finely - executed wood
engravings, constituting a complete

Biography

pictorial chronicle of Napoleon I.'s
personal history from the days of Ais early
childhood at Ajaccio to the date of his
second interment.' — Daily Telegraph.
P. H. Colomb. MEMOIRS OF AD
MIRAL SIR A. COOPER KEY.
By Admiral P. H. CoLOib. With
a Portrait. Demy Zvo. i5s.
Morris Fuller. THE LIFE AND
WRITINGS OF JOHN DAVEN-
ANT, D.D. (i57i-i64i\ Bishop of
Salisbury. By MorrIs Fuller,
B. D. Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
J. M. Rigg. ST. A^SELM OF
CANTERBURY: A Chapter in
the History of Religion. By
J. M. Rigg. Demy Zyo. js. 6d.
F. W. Joyce. THE LIFE OF
SIR FREDERICK GORE OUSE-
LEY. By F. W. JOYCf, M.A. 7s. 6d.
W. G. Collingwood. THE LIFE OF
JOHN RUSKIN. By W. G.
Collingwood, M.A. With Por
traits, and 13 Drawings by Mr.
Ruskin. Second Edition. 2 vols.
Zvo. 32J.
1 It is long since w< had a biography with
such delights o' substance and of form.
Such a book if a pleasure for the day,
and a joy for e/er.' — Daily Chronicle.
C. Waldsteln. JOHN RUSKIN, By
Charles Waldstein, M.A. With
a Photogravtre Portrait, Post Zvo. 5J.
A. M. F. Dajrnesteter, THE LIFE
OF ERNEST RENAN. By
Madame , Darmesteter. With
Portrait, ^econd Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
W. H. HuttMi. THE LIFE OF SIR
THOMAS MORE. By W. H.
Hutton;' M.A. With Portraits.
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. $s.
' The bool lays good claim to high rank
among^ur biographies. It is excellently,
even lA'ingly, written.' — Scotsman.
S. Barinf Gould. THE VICAR OF
MORyENSTOW: A Biography.
By S. Baring Gould, M.A. A
new And Revised Edition. With
Portrait. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
A completely new edition of the well known
biotraphy of R. S. Hawker.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

17

Travel, Adventure
SvenHedln. THROUGH ASIA. By
Sven Hedin, Gold Medallist of the
Royal Geographical Society. With
300 Illustrations from Sketches
and Photographs by the Author,
and Maps. 2 vols. Royal Zvo. 20s.net.
'One of the greatest books of the kind
issued during the century. It is im
possible to give an adequate idea 'of the
richness of the contents of this book,
nor of its abounding attractions as a story
of travel unsurpassed in geographical
and human interest. Much of it is a
revelation. Altogether the work is one
which in solidity, novelty, and interest
must take a first rank among publica
tions of its class. ' — Times.
F. H. Skrine and E. D. Ross. THE
HEART OF ASIA. By F. H.
Skrine and E. D. Ross. With
Maps and many Illustrations by
Verestchagin. Large Crown Zvo.
ios. 6d. net.
' This volume will form a landmark in our
knowledge of Central Asia. . . . Illumin
ating and convincing. For the first
time we are enabled clearly to under
stand not only how Russia has^ estab
lished her rule in Central Asia, but,
what that rule actually means to the
Central Asian peoples. This book is
not only felix opportunitate, but of
enduring value.' — Times.
R. E. Peary. NORTHWARD OVER
THE GREAT ICE. By R. E. Peary,
Gold Medallist of the Royal Geogra
phical Society. With over 800 Illus
trations. 2 vols. Royal Zvo. 32s. net.
* His book will take its place among the per
manent literature of Arctic exploration.'
— Times.
E. A. FitzGerald. THE HIGHEST
ANDES. By E. A. FitzGerald.
With 2 Maps, 51 Illustrations, 13 of
which are in Photogravure, and a
Panorama. Royal Zvo, 30s. net.
Also a Small Edition on Hand-made
Paper, limited to 50 Copies, $to,
£5, $s.
' We have nothing but praise for Mr. Fitz-
Gerald's admirable narrative. A book
which is not only popular in the best
sense of the word, but is a permanent
and solid contribution to the literature
of mountaineering.' — Times. A

and Topography
' The record of the first ascent of the highest
mountain yet conquered by mortal man.
A volume which will continue to be the
classic book of travel on this region of
the Andes. The photographs are ad
mirably reproduced, and the book is got
up with a care and finish worthy of so
great a subject.' — Daily Chronicle.
F. W. Christian. THE CAROLINE
ISLANDS. By F. W. Christian.
With many Illustrations and Maps.
Demy Zvo. izs. 6d. net.
'A real contribution to our knowledge of
the peoples and islands of Micronesia,
as well as fascinating as a narrative of
travels and adventure.' — Scotsman.
H. H. Johnston. BRITISH CEN
TRAL AFRICA. By Sir H. H.
Johnston, K.C.B. With nearly
Two Hundred Illustrations, and Six
Maps. Second Edition. Crown 4I0.
iZs. net.
' A fascinating book, written with equal
skill and charm — the work at once of a
literary artist and of a man of action
who is singularly wise, brave, and ex
perienced. It abounds in admirable
sketches. ' — Westminster Gazette.
L. Decle. THREE YEARS IN
SAVAGE AFRICA. By Lionel
Decle. With 100 Illustrations and
5 Maps. Second Edition. Demy Zvo.
ios. 6d. net.
' Its bright pages give a better general
survey of Africa from the Cape to the
Equator than any single volume that
has yet been published.' — Times.
A. Hulme Beaman. TWENTY
YEARS IN THE NEAR EAST.
By A. Hulme Beaman. Demy
Zvo. With Portrait, ior. 6d.
Henri of Orleans. FROM TONKIN
TO INDIA. By Prince Henri of
Orleans. Translated by Hamley
Bent, M.A. With 100 Illustrations
and a Map. Cr. 6fo, gilt top. 25s.
S. L. Hinde. THE FALL OF THE
CONGO ARABS. By S. L. Hinde.
With Plans, etc. Demy Zvo. izs. 6d.
A. St. H. Gibbons. EXPLORATION
AND HUNTING IN CENTRAL
AFRICA, By Major A. St. H.
Gibbons. With full-page Illustra-
3

18

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

tions by C. Whymper, and Maps.
Demy Zvo. i$s.
Fraser. ROUND THE WORLD
ON A WHEEL. By John Foster
Fraser. With ioo Illustrations.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
'The story is told with delightful gaiety,
humour, and crispness. There has rarely
appeared a more interesting tale of
modern travel. ' — Scotsman.
' A classic of cycling, graphic and witty.' —
Yorkshire Post.
S. L. Jefferson. A NEW RIDE TO
KHIVA. By R. L. JEFFERSON.
Illustrated. Crown Zvo, 6s.
The account of an adventurous ride on a
bicycle through Russia and the deserts
of Asia to Khiva.
' An exceptionally fascinating book of
travel. '¦ — Pall Mall Gazette.
3. K. Trotter. THE NIGER
SOURCES. By Colonel J. K.
Trotter, R.A. With a Map and
Illustrations. Crown Zvo. $s.
Michael Davitt. LIFE AND PRO
GRESS IN AUSTRALASIA. By
Michael Davitt, M.P. 500 pp.
With 2 Maps. Crown Zvo. 6s.

W. J. Galloway. ADVANCED AUS
TRALIA. By William J. Gal
loway, M.P. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' This is an unusally thorough and informa
tive little work.' — Morning Post.
W. Crooke. THE NORTH
WESTERN PROVINCES OF
INDIA: Their Ethnology and
Administration. By W. Crooke.
With Maps and Illustrations. Demy
Zvo. ios. 6d.
A. Boisragon. THE BENIN MAS
SACRE. By Captain Boisragon.
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' If the story had been written four hundred
years ago it would be read to-day as an
English classic.' — Scotsman.
H. S. Cowper. THE HILL OF THE
GRACES : or, the Great Stone
Temples of Tripoli. By H. S.
Cowper, F.S. A. With Maps, Plans,
and 75 Illustrations. DemyZvo. ios.6d.
W. B. Worsfold. SOUTH AFRICA.
By W. B. Worsfold, M.A. With
a Map. Second Edition. Cr.Zvo. 6s.
1 A monumental work compressed into a
very moderate compass.' — World.

G. S. Robertson. CHITRAL: The
Story of a Minor Siege. By Sir
G. S. Robertson, K.C.S.I. With
numerous Illustrations.MapandPlans.
Second Edition. Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
' It is difficult to imagine the kind of person
who could read this brilliant book without
emotion. The story remains immortal —
a testimony imperishable. We are face
to face with a great book.' — Illustrated
London News.
' A book which the Elizabethans would have
thought wonderful. More thrilling, more
piquant, and more human than any
novel.' — Newcastle Chronicle.
( One of the most stirring military narra
tives written in our time.' — Times.
' As fascinating as Sir Walter Scott's best
fiction.' — Daily Telegraph.
R. S. S. Baden-Powell. THE DOWN
FALL OF PREMPEH. A Diary
of Life in Ashanti, 1895. By Colonel
Baden- Powell. With 21 Illustra
tions and a Map. Cheaper Edition.
Large Crown Zvo. 6s.

Naval and Military

R. S. S. Baden-Powell. THE MATA-
BELE CAMPAIGN, 1896. By Col.
Baden-Powell. With nearly 100
Illustrations. Cheaper Edition. Large
Crown Zvo. 6s.
E. H. Alderson. WITH THE
MOUNTED INFANTRY AND
THE MASHONALAND FIELD
FORCE, 1896. By Lieut. -Colonel
Alderson. With numerous Illus
trations and Plans. Demy Zvo.
ios. 6d.
Seymour Vandeleur. CAMPAIGN
ING ON THE UPPER NILE
AND NIGER. By Lieut. Seymour
Vandeleur. With an Introduction
by Sir G. Goldie, K.C.M.G. With
4 Maps, Illustrations, and Plans,
Large Crown Zvo. ios. 6d.
Lord Fincastle. A FRONTIER
CAMPAIGN. By Viscount Fin
castle, V.C., and Lieut. P. C.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

»9

Eluott-Lockhart. With a Map
and 16 Illustrations. Second Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
E. N. Bennett THE DOWNFALL
OF THE DERVISHES : A Sketch
of the Sudan Campaign of 1898. By
E. N. Bennett, Fellow of Hertford
College. With Four Maps and a
Photogravure Portrait of Lord Kit
chener. Third Edition. Crown Zvo.
3s. 6d.
W. Kinnaird Rose. WITH THE
GREEKS IN THESSALY. By
W. Kinnaird Rose. With Illus
trations. Crown Zvo. 6s.
G. W. Steevens. NAVAL POLICY :
By G. W. Steevens. Demy Zvo. 6s.
This book is a description of the British and
other more important navies of the world,
with a sketch of the lines on which our
naval policy might possibly be developed.
D. Hannay. A SHORT HISTORY
OF THE ROYAL NAVY, From
Early Times to the Present Day.
By David Hannay. Illustrated.
2 Vols. Demy Zvo. ys. 6d. each.
Vol. I., 1200- 1688.
' We read it from cover to cover at a sitting,
and those who go to it for a lively and
brisk picture of the past, with all its faults
and its grandeur, will not be disappointed.
The historian is endowed with literary
skill and style.' — Standard.
C. Cooper King. THE STORY OF
THE BRITISH ARMY. By Colonel

Cooper King. Illustrated. Demy
Zvo. ys. 6d,
'An authoritative and accurate story of
England's military progress.' — Daily
Mail.
R Southey. ENGLISH SEAMEN
(Howard, Clifford, Hawkins, Drake,
Cavendish). By Robert Southey.
Edited, with an Introduction, by
David Hannay. Second Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
'A brave, inspiriting book.' — Black and
White.
W. Clark Russell. THE LIFE OF
ADMIRAL LORD COLLING
WOOD. By W. Clark Russell.
With Illustrations by F. Brangwyn.
Third Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' A book which we should like to see in the
hands of every boy in the country.'—
St. lames 's Gazette.
E. L. S. Horsburgh. THE CAM
PAIGN OF WATERLOO. By
E. L. S. Horsburgh, B.A. With
Plans. Crown Zvo. $s.
'A brilliant essay — simple, sound, and
thorough.' — Daily Chronicle.
H. B. George. BATTLES OF
ENGLISH HISTORY. By H. B.
George, M.A., Fellow of New
College, Oxford. With numerous
Plans. Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
* Mr. George has undertaken a very useful
task — that of making military affairs in
telligible and instructive to non-military
readers — and has executed it with a
large measure of success.' — Times.

General Literature

S. Baring Gould. THE BOOK OF
THE WEST. By S. Baring
Gould. With numerous Illustra
tions. Two volumes. Vol. I. Devon.
Vol. 11. Cornwall. Crown Zvo.
6s. each.
'They are very attractive little volumes,
they have numerous very pretty and
interesting pictures, the story is fresh
and bracing as the air of Dartmoor, and
the legend weird as twilight over Doz-
mare Pool, and they give us a very good
idea of this enchanting and beautiful
district.' — Guardian. .
' They are sufficiently learned without being
abstruse, and their interest and read-
ableness never fail.'— Glasgow Herald.

'A narrative full of picturesque incident,
personal interest, and literary charm.' —
Leeds Mercury.
S. Baring Gould. OLD COUNTRY
LIFE. By S. Baring Gould. With
Sixty-seven Illustrations. Large Cr.
Zvo. Fifth Edition. 6s.
' " Old Country Life," as healthy wholesome
reading, full of breezy life and move-
ment, full of quaint stories vigorously
told, will not be excelled by any book to
be published throughout the year.
Sound, hearty, and English to the core.'
— World.
S. Baring Gould. "AN OLD ENGLISH
HOME. By S. Baring Gould.

20

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

With numerous Plans and Illustra
tions. Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 The chapters are delightfully fresh, very
informing, and lightened by many a good
story. A delightful fireside companion.'
— St. James's Gazette.
S. Baring Gould. HISTORIC
ODDITIES AND STRANGE
EVENTS. _ By S. Baring Gould.
Fourth Edition. . Crown Zvo. 6s.
S. Baring Gould. FREAKS OF
FANATICISM. By S. Baring
Gould. Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
S. Baring Gould. A GARLAND OF
COUNTRY SONG : English Folk
Songs with their Traditional Melodies.
Collected and arranged by S. Baring
Gould and H. F. Sheppard.
Demy $to. 6s.
S. Baring Gould. SONGS OF THE
WEST: Traditional Ballads and
Songs of the West of England, with
their Melodies. Collected by S.
Baring Gould, M.A. , and H. F.
Sheppard, M.A. In 4 Parts. Parts
I., II., III., 3s. each. Part IV., 5s.
In one Vol, , French morocco, 15*.
' A rich collection of humour, pathos, grace,
and poetic fancy.' — Saturday Review.
S. Baring Gould. YORKSHIRE
ODDITIES AND STRANGE
EVENTS. By S. Baring Gould.
Fourth Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
S. Baring Gould. STRANGE SUR
VIVALS AND SUPERSTITIONS.
By S. Baring Gould. Cr. Zvo.
Second Edition. 6s.
S. Baring Gould. THE DESERTS
OF SOUTHERN FRANCE. By
S. Baring Gould. 2 vols. Demy
Zvo. 32s.
Cotton Minchin. OLD HARROW
DAYS. By J. G. Cotton Minchin.
Cr. Zvo. Second Edition. $s.
W. E. Gladstone. THE SPEECHES
OF THE RT. HON. W. E. GLAD
STONE, M.P. Edited by A. W.
Hutton, M.A., and H.J. Cohen,
M.A. With Portraits, Demy Zvo.
Vols. IX. and X. , izs. 6d. each.
E. V. Zenker. ANARCHISM. By
E. V. Zenker. Demy Zvo. 7s. 6d.

' Herr Zenker has succeeded in producing a
careful and critical history of the growth
of Anarchist theory.
A Silva White. THE EXPANSION
OF EGYPT: A Political and His
torical Survey. By A. Silva White.
With four Special Maps. Demy Zvo.
1 5 j. net.
This is an account of the political situation
in Egypt, and an elabarate description
of the Anglo-Egyptian Administration.
It is a comprehensive treatment of the
whole Egyptian problem by one who
has studied every detail on the spot.
' A most valuable book of reference. It is
wonderfully complete and up-to-date.
It traces the historic evolution of the
existing state of things.' — Daily
Chronicle.
' A very able and elaborate work.' — Man-
Chester Guardian.
'This is emphatically the best account of
Egypt as it is under English control that
has been published for many years.' —
Spectator.
Peter Beckford. THOUGHTS ON
HUNTING. By Peter Beckford.
Edited by J. Otho Paget, and
Illustrated by G. H. Jalland.
Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
This edition of one of the most famous
classics of sport contains an introduc
tion and many footnotes by Mr. Paget,
and is thus brought up to the standard
of modern knowledge.
' Beckford's " Thoughts on Hunting " has
long been a classic with sportsmen, and
the present edition will go far to make it
a favourite with lovers of literature.' —
Speaker.
H. G. Hutchinson. THE GOLFING
PILGRIM. By Horace G.
Hutchinson. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Without this book the golfer's library will
be incomplete.' — Pall Mall Gazette.
3. Wells. OXFORD AND OXFORD
LIFE. By Members of. the Uni
versity. Edited by J. Wells, M.A. ,
Fellowand Tutor of Wadham College.
Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' We congratulate Mr. Wells on the pro
duction of a readable and intelligent
account of Oxford as it is at the present
time, written by persons who are pos
sessed of a close acquaintance with the
system and life of the University.' —
Athenaum.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

21

a G. Robertson. VOCES ACADE
MICS. By C. Grant Robertson,
M.A., Fellow of All Souls', Oxford.
With a Frontispiece. Pott Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' Decidedly clever and amusing.' —
A thentzum.
Rosemary Cotes. DANTE'S GAR
DEN. By Rosemary Cotes. With
a Frontispiece. Second Edition. Fcp.
Zvo. 2S. 6d. Leather, 3s. 6d. net.
' A charming collection of legends of the
flowers mentioned by Dante.' — Academy.
Clifford Harrison. READING AND
READERS. By Clifford Harri
son. Fcp. Zvo. 2s. 6d.
1 An extremely sensible little book.' — Man
chester Guardian.
L. Whibley. GREEK OLIGARCH
IES : THEIR ORGANISATION
AND CHARACTER. By L.
Whibley, M.A., Fellow of Pem
broke College, Cambridge. Crown
Zvo. 6s.

L. 1. Price. ECONOMIC SCIENCE
AND PRACTICE. By L. L. Price,
M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Ox
ford. Crown Zvo. 6s,
J. S. Shedlock. THE PIANOFORTE
SONATA : Its Origin and Develop
ment. By J. S. Shedlock. Crown
Zvo. $s.
' This work should be in the possession of
every musician and amateur. A concise
and lucid history and a very valuable
work for reference.' — A thenteum.
A. Hulme Beaman. PONS ASIN-
ORUM; OR, A GUIDE TO
BRIDGE. By A. Hulme Bea
man. Fcap Zvo. zs.
A practical guide, with many specimen
games, to the new game of Bridge.
E. M. Bowden. THE EXAMPLE OF
BUDDHA: Being Quotations from
Buddhist Literature for each Day in
the Year. Compiled by E. M.
Bowden. Third Edition. i6mo.
zs. 6d.

Philosophy

L. T. Hobhouse. THE THEORY OF
KNOWLEDGE. By L. T. Hob-
house, Fellow of C.C.C., Oxford.
Demy Zvo. zis.
' The most important contribution _ to
English philosophy since the publication
of Mr. Bradley s " Appearance and
Reality." ' — Glasgow Herald.
1 A brilliantly written volume.' — Times.
W. H Fairbrother. THE PHILO
SOPHY OF T. H. GREEN. By
W. H. Fairbrother, M.A. Cr.
Zvo. 3s. 6d.

' In every way an admirable book.' —
Glasgow Herald.
F. W. BusseU. THE SCHOOL OF
PLATO. By F. W. Bussell, D. D. ,
Fellow of Brasenose College, Oxford.
Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
'A clever and stimulating book.' — Man
chester Guardian.
F. S. Granger. THE WORSHIP
OF THE ROMANS. By F. S.
Granger, M.A., Litt.D. Crown
Zvo. 6s.

W. R. Inge. CHRISTIAN MYSTI
CISM. The Bampton Lectures for
1899. By W. R. Inge, M.A. , Fellow
and Tutor of Hertford College,
Oxford. Demy Zvo. 12s. 6d. net.
A complete survey of the subject from St.
John and St. Paul to modern times,
covering the Christian Platonists, Augus-

Theology

tine, the Devotional Mystics, the
Mediaeval Mystics, and the Nature
Mystics and Symbolists, including
BShme and Wordsworth.
' An able discussion of a very important
subject.' — Glasgow Herald.
(It is fully worthy of the best traditions
connected with the Bampton Lecture
ship.' — Record.

22

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

S. R. Driver. SERMONS ON SUB
JECTS CONNECTED WITH
THE OLD TESTAMENT. By S.
R. Driver, D.D., Canon of Christ
Church, Regius Professor of Hebrew
in the University of Oxford. Cr. Zvo.
6s.
[A welcome companion to the author's
famous " Introduction." ' — Guardian.
T. K. Cheyne. FOUNDERS OF OLD
TESTAMENT CRITICISM. By
T. K. Cheyne, D.D., Oriel Pro
fessor at Oxford. Large Crown Zvo.
js. 6d.
A historical sketch of O. T. Criticism.
'A very learned and instructive work.'—
Times.
Walter Lock. ST. PAUL, THE
MASTER-BUILDER. ByWALTER
Lock, D.D., Warden of Keble
College. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
An attempt to popularise the recent addi
tions to our knowledge of St. Paul as a
missionary, a statesman and an ethical
teacher.
' The essence of the Pauline teaching is
condensed into little more than a hun
dred pages, yet no point of importance
is overlooked. We gladly recommend
the lectures to all who wish to read with
understanding.' — Guardian.
H. Rashdall DOCTRINE AND
DEVELOPMENT. By Hastings
Rashdall, M.A. , Fellow and Tutor
of New College, Oxford. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' A very interesting attempt to restate some
of the principal doctrines of Christianity.
in which Mr. Rashdall appears to us to
have achieved a high measure of success.
He is often learned, almost always sym
pathetic, and always singularly lucid.' —
Manchester Guardian.
R H Henson. APOSTOLIC CHRIS
TIANITY: As Illustrated by the
Epistles of St. Paul to the Corinthians.
By H. H. Henson, M.A., Fellow of
All Souls', Oxford. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
H. H. Henson. DISCIPLINE AND
LAW. By H. Hensley Henson,
B.D., Fellow of All Souls', Oxford.
Fcap. Zvo. zs. 6d.
H. H. Henson. LIGHT AND
LEAVEN : Historical and

Social Sermons. By H. H. Hen
son, M.A. Crown Zvo. 6s.
Bennett and Adeney. A BIBLICAL
INTRODUCTION. By W. H.
Bennett, M. A. , and W. F. Adeney,
M.A. Crown Zvo. ys. 6d.
This volume furnishes students with the
latest results in Biblical criticism,
arranged methodically. Each book is
treated separately as to date, author
ship, etc.
' Succinctly written and admirably
arranged. ' — Outlook.
' It makes available to the ordinary reader
the best scholarship of the day in the
field of Biblical introduction. We know
of no book which comes into competi
tion with it.' — Manchester Guardian.
W. H. Bennett. A PRIMER OF
THE BIBLE. By W. H. Bennett.
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 2S. 6d.
' Thework of an honest, fearless, and sound
critic, and an excellent guide in a small
compass to the books of the Bible.'—
Manchester Guardian.
William Harrison. CLOVELLY
SERMONS. By William Harri
son, M.A., late Rector of Clovelly.
With a Preface by ' Lucas Malet.'
Cr. Zvo, 3s. 6d.
Cecilia Robinson. THE MINISTRY
OF DEACONESSES. By Deacon-
ness Cecilia Robinson. With an
Introduction by the Lord Bishop of
Winchester. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
'A learned and interesting book.' — Scots
man.
E. B. Layard. RELIGION IN BOY
HOOD. Notes on the Religious
Training of Boys. By E. B.
Layard, M.A. iZmo. is.
T. Herbert Bindley. THE OECU
MENICAL DOCUMENTS OF
THE FAITH. Edited with Intro
ductions and Notes by T. Herbert
Bindley, B.D., Merton College,
Oxford. Crown Zvo. 6s.
THE CREED OF NICEA.
A historical account of the Creed of, etc.
THREE EPISTLES OF CYRIL.
THE TOME OF LEO.
THE CHALCEDONIAN DEFINI
TION.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

23

W. Yorke Fausset. THE DE
CATECHIZANDIS RUD1BUS
OF ST. AUGUSTINE. Edited,
with Introduction, Notes, etc., by
W. Yorke Fausset, M.A. Cr. Zvo.
3s. 6d.
F. Weston. THE HOLY SACRI
FICE. By F. Weston, M.A.,
Curate of St. Matthew's, Westmin
ster. Pott Zvo. 6d. net.
A Kempis. THE IMITATION OF
CHRIST. By Thomas A Kempis.
With an Introduction by Dean
Farrar. Illustrated by C. M.
Gere. Second Edition. Fcap. Zvo.
3s. 6d. Padded morocco, 5*.

'Amongst all the innumerable English
editions of the "Imitation," there can
have been few which were prettier than
this one , printed i n strong and handsome
type, with all the glory of red initials.'—
Glasgow Herald.
J. Keble. THE CHRISTIAN YEAR.
By John Keble. With an Intro
duction and Notes by W. Lock,
D.D., Warden of Keble College.
Illustrated by R. Anning Bell.
Second Edition. Fcap. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
Padded morocco. 5s.
' The present edition is annotated with all
the care and insight to be expected from
Mr. Lock.' — Guardian.

©jtoro Commentaries

General Editor, Walter Lock, D.D., Warden of Keble College, Dean
Ireland's Professor of Exegesis in the University of Oxford.
THE BOOK OF JOB. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by E. C. S.
Gibson, D.D..

JOB. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by E. C.
Vicar of Leeds. Demy Zvo. 6s.

•Emnoboofts of Ubzolo&z
General Editor, A. Robertson, D.D., Principal of King's College, London.

THE XXXIX. ARTICLES OF THE
CHURCH OF ENGLAND. Edited
with an Introduction by E. C. S.
Gibson, D.D., Vicar of Leeds, late
Principal of Wells Theological Col
lege. Second and Cheaper Edition
in One Volume. Demy Zvo. izs. 6d.
1 We welcome with the utmost satisfaction
a new, cheaper, and more convenient
edition of Dr. Gibson's book. It was
greatly wanted. Dr. Gibson, has given
theological students just what theywant,
and we should like to think that it was
in the hands of every candidate for
orders.' — Guardian.
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE
HISTORY OF RELIGION. By
F. B. Jevons, M.A., Litt.D., Prin
cipal of Bishop Hatfield's Hall.
Demy Zvo. ios. 6d.
'The merit of this book lies in the penetra
tion, the singular acuteness and force of
the author's judgment. He isat once
critical and luminous, at once just and

suggestive. A comprehensive and
thorough book.' — Birmingham Post.
THE DOCTRINE OF THE INCAR
NATION. By R- L. Ottley, M.A. ,
late fellow of Magdalen . College,
Oxon., and Principal of Pusey House.
In Two Volumes. Demy Zvo. 15*.
' A clear and remarkably full account of the
main currents of speculation. Scholarly
precision . . . genuine tolerance . . .
intense interest in his subject — are Mr.
Ottley 's merits.' — Guardian.
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE
HISTORY OF THE CREEDS. By
A. E. Burn, B.D., Examining Chap
lain to the Bishop of Lichfield. Demy
Zvo. ios. 6d.
' This book may be expected to hold its
place as an authority on its subject.*—
Spectator.
' It js an able and learned treatise, and con
tains a mass of information which will
be most useful to scholars.' — Glasgow
Herald.

24

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Zbe Cburcbman's 3tfbtarg
General Editor, J. H. BURN, B.D., Examining Chaplain to the
Bishop of Aberdeen.

THE BEGINNINGS OF ENGLISH
CHRISTIANITY. By W. E. Col
lins, M.A. With Map. Cr. Zvo.
3s. 6d.
' An excellent example of thorough and fresh
historical work.' — Guardian.
SOME NEW TESTAMENT PRO
BLEMS. By Arthur Wright,
M.A. , Fellow of Queen's College,
Cambridge. Crown Zvo. 6s.
THE KINGDOM OF HEAVEN
HERE AND HEREAFTER. By
Canon Wintekbotham, M.A.,
B.Sc, LL.B. Cr.Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' A most able book, at once exceedingly

thoughtful and richly suggestive.' — Glas
gow Herald.
THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE
PRAYER BOOK: Its Literary and
Liturgical Aspects. By J. Dowden,
D.D., Lord Bishop of Edinburgh.
Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
This volume, avoiding questions of contro
versy, exhibits the liturgical aims and
literary methods of the authors of the
Prayer Book.
' This volume is fitted to make its readers
feel the great treasure they possess in
their Prayer Book. — Glasgow Herald.
' Scholarly and interesting.* — Manchester
Guardian.

Zbz Cbutcbman's JBMe
General Editor, J. H. BURN, B.D.
Messrs. Methuen are issuing a series of expositions upon most of the books of
the Bible. The volumes will be practical and devotional, and the text of the
authorised version is explained in sections, which will correspond as far as
possible with the Church Lectionary.
THE EPISTLE OF ST. PAUL TO
THE GALATIANS. Explained by
A. W. Robinson, Vicar of All
Hallows, Barking. Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d.
net. Leather, zs. 6d. net.
' The most attractive, sensible, and instruc

tive manual for people at large, which
we have ever seen.' — Church Gazette.
ECCLESIASTES. Explained by A.
W. Streane, D.D. Fcap. Zvo.
is. 6d. net. Leather, zs. 6d. net.
'Scholarly, suggestive, and particularly
interesting. ' — Bookman.

Zbe 3LibtatB of Devotion
Pott 8vo, cloth, 2s.; leather, 2s. 6d. net.
' This series is excellent.' — The Bishop of London.
' Very delightful.'— The Bishop of Bath and Wells.
' Well worth the attention of the Clergy.'— The Bishop of Lichfield.
' The new " Library of Devotion " is excellent.'— The Bishop of Peterborough

' Charming.' — Record.

' Delightful.'— Church Bells.

THE CONFESSIONS OF ST. AU
GUSTINE. Newly Translanted,
with an Introduction and Notes, by
C. Bigg, D.D. , late Student of Christ
Church. Second Edition.

The translation is an excellent piece of
English, and the introduction is a mas
terly exposition. We augur well of a
series which begins so satisfactorily. '—
Times.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

25

THE CHRISTIAN YEAR. By John
Keble. With Introduction and
Notes by Walter Lock, D.D.,
Warden of Keble College, Ireland
Professor at Oxford.
'The volume is very prettily bound and
printed, and may fairly claim to be an
advance on any previous editions.' —
Guardian.
THE IMITATION OF CHRIST. A
Revised Translation, with an Introduc
tion, by C. Bigg, D.D., late Student
of Christ Church. Second Edition.
A practically new translation of this book,
which the reader has, almost/or the first
time,, exactly in the shape in which it
left the hands of the author. ^
'A nearer approach to the original than
has yet existed in English.' — Academy.
A BOOK OF DEVOTIONS. By J.
W. Stanbridge, B.D., Rector of
Bainton, Canon of York, and some
time Fellow of St. John's College,
Oxford.

It is probably the best book of its kind. It
deserves high commendation.' — Church
Gazette.
LYRA INNOCENTIUM. By John
Keble. Edited, with Introduction
and Notes, by Walter Lock, D.D.,
Warden of Keble College, Oxford.
A SERIOUS CALL TO A DEVOUT
AND HOLY LIFE. By William
Law. Edited, with an Introduction,
by C. Bigg, D.D., late Student of
Christ Church.
This is a reprint, word for word and line for
line, of the Editio Princeps.
THE TEMPLE. By George Her
bert. Edited, with an Introduction
and Notes, by E. C. S. Gibson,
D.D., Vicar of Leeds.
This edition contains Walton's Life of "
Herbert, and the text is that of the first
edition.
'As neat and desirable an edition of the
work as can be found.' — Scotsman.

Xea&ers of IReligton
EditedbyH.C. BEECHING, M. A. With Portraits, Crown 8vo. y.6d.
A series of short biographies of the most prominent leaders of religious
life and thought of all ages and countries.
The following are ready —

CARDINAL NEWMAN. By R. H.
Hutton.
JOHN WESLEY. By J. H. Over
ton, M.A.
BISHOP WILBERFORCE. By G.
W. Daniell, M.A.
CARDINAL MANNING. By A. W.
Hutton, M.A.
CHARLES SIMEON. By H. C. G.
Moule, D.D.
JOHN KEBLE. By Walter Lock,
D.D.
THOMAS CHALMERS. By Mrs.
Oliphant.
LANCELOT ANDREWES. By R.
L. Ottley, M.A.

AUGUSTINE OF CANTERBURY.
By E. L. Cutts, D.D.
WILLIAM LAUD. By W. H.
Hutton, B.D. By F. MacCunn.
By R. F. Horton,

By F. A. Clarke,

JOHN KNOX.
JOHN HOWE.
D.D.
BISHOP KEN.
M.A.
GEORGE FOX, THE QUAKER.
ByT. Hodgkin, D.C.L.
JOHN DONNE. By Augustus
Jessopp, D.D.
THOMAS CRANMER. By. A. J.
Mason.
BISHOP LATIMER. By R. M. CAR-
lyle and A. J. Carlyle, M.A.

Other volumes will be announced in due course.

26

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Fiction

6IX SHILLING NOVELS
Marie Corelli's Novels
Crown %vo. 6s. each.

A ROMANCE OF TWO WORLDS.
Nineteenth Edition,
VENDETTA. Fifteenth Edition.
THELMA. Twenty-first Edition.
ARDATH: THE STORY OF A
DEAD SELF. Eleventh Edition.
THE SOUL OF LILITH. Ninth
Edition.
WORMWOOD. Ninth Edition.
BARABBAS : A DREAM OF THE
WORLD'S TRAGEDY. Thirty-
fourth Edition.
' The tender reverence of the treatment
and the imaginative beauty of the writ
ing have reconciled us to the daring of
the conception, and the conviction is
forced on us that even so exalted a sub
ject cannot be made too familiar to us,

provided it be presented in the true spirit
of Christian faith. The amplifications
of the Scripture narrative are often con
ceived with high poetic insight, and this
"Dream of the World's Tragedy" is
a lofty and not inadequate paraphrase
of the supreme climax of the inspired
narrative.' — Dublin Review*
THE SORROWS OF SATAN.
Forty-first Edition.
' A very powerful piece of work. . . .The
conception is magnificent, and is likely
to win an abiding place within the
memory of man. . . . The author has
immense command of language, and a
limitless audacity. . . . This interesting
and remarkable romance will live long
after much of the ephemeral literature
of the day is forgotten. ... A literary
phenomenon . . . novel, and even sub
lime.' — W. T. Stead in the Review
of Reviews.

Anthony Hope's Novels
Crown Svo. 6s. each.

THE GOD IN THE CAR. Eighth
Edition.
1 A very remarkable book, deserving of
critical analysis impossible within our
limit ; brilliant, but not superficial ;
well considered, but not elaborated ;
constructed with the proverbial art that
conceals, but yet allows itself to be
enjoyed by readers to whom fine literary
method is a keen pleasure.'— The World.
A CHANGE OF AIR. Fifth Edition.
' A graceful, vivacious comedy, true to
human nature. The characters are
traced with a masterly hand.' — Times.
A MAN OF MARK. Fifth Edition.
'Of all Mr. Hope's books, ,(A Man of
Mark" is the one which best compares
with "The Prisoner of Zenda." '—
Rational Observer. ,

THE CHRONICLES OF COUNT
ANTONIO. Fourth Edition.
1 It is a perfectly enchanting story of love
and chivalry, and pure romance. The
Count is the most constant, desperate,
and modest and tender of lovers, a peer
less gentleman, an intrepid fighter, a
faithful friend, and a magnanimous foe.'
— Guardian.
PHROSO. Illustrated by H. R.
Millar. Fourth Edition.
' The tale is thoroughly fresh, quick with
vitality, stirring the blood. '—St. James's
Gazette.
'From cover to cover "Phroso" not only
engages the attention, but carries the
reader in little whirls of delight from,
adventure to adventure.' — Academy*.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

27

SIMON DALE. Illustrated. Third
Edition.
' A brilliant novel. The story is rapid and
most excellently told. As for the hero,
lie is a perfect hero of romance ' —
A theneeum,
' There is searching analysis of human
nature, with a most ingeniously con
structed plot. Mr. Hope has drawn the
contrasts of his women with marvellous
subtlety and delicacy.' — Times.

THE KING'S MIRROR. Third
Edition.
1 In elegance, delicacy, and tact it ranks
with the best of his novels, while in the
wide range of its portraiture and the
subtilty of its analysis it surpasses all his
earlier ventures. '-—Spectator.
'A work of art, and of good art.'— Times.
'"The King's Mirror" is a strong book,
charged with close analysis and exquisite
irony ^ a book full of pathos and moral
fibre — in short, a book to be read.' —
Daily Chronicle.

Gilbert Parker's Novels
Crown $vo. 6s. each.

PIERRE AND HIS PEOPLE.
Fifth Edition.
1 Stories happily conceived and finely ex
ecuted. There is strength and genius in
Mr. Parker's style.'— Daily Telegraph.
MRS. FALCHION. Fourth Edition.
' A splendid study of character.' —
Athenaeum.
'A very striking and admirable novel.' —
St. Janus' s Gazette.
THE TRANSLATION OF A
SAVAGE.
'The plot is original and one difficult to
work out; hut Mr. Parker has done it
with great skill and delicacy. The
reader who is not interested in this
original, fresh, and well-told tale must
be a dull person indeed/ —
Daily Chronicle.
THE TRAIL OF THE SWORD.
Illustrated. Sixth Edition.
' A rousing and dramatic tale. A book like
this, in which swords flash, great sur
prises are undertaken, and daring deeds
done, in which men and women live and
love in the old passionate way, is a joy
inexpressible.'— Daily Chronicle.
WHEN VALMOND CAME TO
PONTIAC: The Story of a Lost
Napoleon. Fourth Edition.
'Here we find romance— real, breathing,
living romance. The character of Val-
mond is drawn unerringly. The book
must be read, we may say re-read, for
any one thoroughly to appreciate Mr.
Parker's delicate touch and innate sym
pathy with humanity. ' — Pail Mall
Gazette.

AN ADVENTURER OF THE
NORTH : The Last Adventures of
' Pretty Pierre.' Second Edition.
' The present book is full of fine and mov
ing stories of the great North, and it
will add to Mr. Parker's already high
reputation.' — Glasgow Herald.
THE SEATS OF THE MIGHTY.
Illustrated. Tenth Edition.
1 Mr. Parker seems to become stronger and
easier with every serious novel that he
attempts. He shows the matured power
which his former novels have led us to
expect, and has produced a really fine
historical novel.' — Athenceum.
1 A great book.' — Black and White.
THE POMP OF THE LAVILET-
TES. Second Edition. 3s. 6d.
' Living, breathing romance, genuine and
unforced pathos, and a deeper and more
subtle knowledge of human nature than
Mr. Parker has ever displayed before.
It is, in a word, the work of a true artist.'
— Pall Mall Gazette.
THE BATTLE OF THE STRONG :
a Romance of Two Kingdoms.
Illustrated. Fourth Edition.
1 Nothing more vigorous or more human has
come from Mr. Gilbert Parker than this
novel. It has all the graphic power of
his last book, with truer feeling for the
romance, both of human life and wild
nature. There is no character without its
unique and picturesque interest. ( Mr.
Parker's style, especially his descriptive
style, has in this hook, perhaps even more
than elsewhere, aptness and vitality.' — •
Literature.

28

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

S. Earing Gould's Novels
Crown 8vo. 6s. each.
'To say that a book is by the author of "Mehalah" is to imply that it contains a
story cast on strong lines, containing dramatic possibilities, vivid and sympathetic descrip
tions of Nature, and a wealth of ingenious imagery.' — Speaker.
' That whatever Mr. Baring Gould writes is well worth reading, is a conclusion that may
be very generally accepted. His views of life are fresh and vigorous, his language
pointed and characteristic, the incidents of which he makes use are striking and original,
his characters are life-like, and though somewhat exceptional people, are drawn and
coloured with artistic force. Add to this that his descriptions of scenes and scenery are
painted with the loving eyes and skilled hands of a master of his art, that he is alwavs
fresh and never dull, and it is no wonder that readers have gained confidence in his
power of amusing and satisfying them, and that year by year his popularity widens.' —
Court Circular.

ARMINELL. Fourth Edition.
URITH. Fifth Edition.
IN THE ROAR OF THE SEA.
Sixth Edition.
MRS. CURGENVEN OF CURGEN-
VEN. Fourth Edition.
CHEAP JACK ZITA. Fourth Edition.
THE QUEEN OF LOVE. Fourth
Edition.
MARGERY OF QUETHER. Third
Edition.
JACQUETTA. Third Edition.
KITTY ALONE. Fifth Edition.

NOEMI. Illustrated. Fourth Edition.
THE BROOM-SQUIRE. Illustrated.
Fourth Edition.
THE PENNYCOMEQUICKS.
Third Edition.
DARTMOOR IDYLLS.
GUAVAS THE TINNER. Illus
trated. Second Edition.
BLADYS. Illustrated. Second Edition.
DOMITIA. Illustrated. Second Edi
tion.
PABO THE PRIEST.

Conan Doyle. ROUND THE RED
LAMP. By A. Conan Doyle.
Sixth Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
The book is far and away the best view
that has been vouchsafed us behind the
scenes of the consulting-room. ' — Illus
trated London News.
Stanley Weyman. UNDER THE
RED, ROBE. By Stanley Wey
man, Author of ' A Gentleman of
France.' With Illustrations by R. C.
WoODVILLE. Fifteenth Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Every one who reads books at all must
read this thrilling romance, from the
first page of which to the last the breath
less reader is haled along. An inspira
tion of manliness and courage.' — Daily
• Chronicle.
Lucas Malet. THE WAGES OF
SIN. By Lucas Malet. Thir
teenth Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
Lucas Malet. THE CARISSIMA.
By Lucas Malet, Author of • The

Wages of Sin,' etc. Third Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
George Gissing. THE TOWN TRA
VELLER. By George Gissing,
Author of ' Demos,' ' In the Year of
Jubilee,' etc. Second Edition. Cr.
Zvo. 6s.
'It is a bright and witty book above all
things. Polly Sparkes is a splendid bit
of work.' — Pall Mall Gazette.
' The spirit of Dickens is in it.' — Bookman,
George Gissing. THE CROWN OF
LIFE. By George Gissing, Author
of ' Demos,' ' The Town Traveller,'
etc. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Mr. Gissing is at his best.' — Academy.
'A fine novel.' — Outlook.
' We are looking upon life itself.' — Daily
News.
S. E. Crockett. LOCHINVAR. By
S. R. Crockett, Author of 'The
Raiders,' etc. Illustrated. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
^ ' Full of gallantry and pathos, of the clash

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

29

of arms, and brightened by episodes of
humour and love. . . .' — Westminster
Gazette.
S. R. Crockett. THE STANDARD
BEARER. By S. R. Crockett.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 A delightful tale.'— Speaker.
1 Mr. Crockett at his best.'— Literature.
Arthur Morrison. TALES OF
MEAN STREETS. By Arthur
Morrison. Fifth Edition. Cr.
Zvo. 6s.
1 Told with consummate art and extra
ordinary detail. In the true humanity
of the book lies its justification, the
permanence of its interest, and its in
dubitable triumph.' — A theneeum.
lA great book. The author's method is
amazingly efFective, and produces a
thrilling sense of reality. The writer
lays upon us a master hand. The book
is simply appalling and irresistible in
its interest. _ It is humorous also ; with
out humour it would not make the mark
it is certain to make.' — World.
Arthur Morrison. A CHILD OF
THE JAGO. By Arthur Morri
son. Third Edition. Cr. 8vo. 6s.
1 The book is a masterpiece.1 — Pall Mall
Gazette.
* Told with great vigour and powerful sim
plicity.' — A theneeum.
Arthur Morrison. TO LONDON
TOWN. By Arthur Morrison,
Author of 'Tales of Mean Streets,'
etc. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
' We have idyllic pictures, woodland scenes
full of tenderness and grace. . . . This
is the new Mr. Arthur Morrison gracious
and tender, sympathetic and human.' —
Daily Telegraph.
' The easy swing of detail proclaims the
master of his subject and the artist in
rendering.' — Pall Mall Gazette.
1 Mr. Morrison has broken new ground with
admirable success. . . . Excellently
written and artistically sincere.' — Daily
Mail.
M. Sutherland. ONE HOUR AND
THE NEXT. By The Duchess
of Sutherland. Third Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
'As a piece of literary work this book
stands high. It is written by one who
has drawn some deep breaths of the
divine afflatus.'— M.A. .P. .
* Passionate, vivid, dramatic' — Liieratme.
*It possesses marked qualities, descriptive,
and imaginative.'— Morning Post.

' The work of a refined, thoughtful, and
cultivated mind.' — British Weekly.
Mrs. Clifford. A FLASH OF
SUMMER. By Mrs. W. K. Clif
ford, Author of 'Aunt Anne,' etc.
Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.
1 The story is a very beautiful one, exquis
itely told.'— Speaker.
Emily Lawless. HURRISH. By the
Honble. Emily Lawless, Author of
' Maelcho, ' etc. Fifth Edition. Cr.
Zvo t 6s.
Emily Lawless. MAELCHO : a Six
teenth Century Romance. By the
Honble. Emily Lawless. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' A really great book.' — Spectator.
' One of the most remarkable literary
achievements of this generation.'— Man
chester Guardian.
Emily Lawless. TRAITS AND
CONFIDENCES. By the Honble.
Emily Lawless. Crown 8vo. ' 6s.
Eden Phillpotts. THE HUMAN
BOY. By Eden Phillpotts, Author
of 'Children of the Mist.' With a
Frontispiece. Fourth Edition. Crown
8vo. 6s.
1 Mr. Phillpotts knows exactly what school
boys do, and can lay bare their inmost
thoughts ; likewise he shows an all-per
vading sense of humour.' — Academy.
' An unrestrained fund of humour ripples
through every page.' — World.
' Described with delightful spirit and
humour/ — Truth.
E. W. Hornung. THE AMATEUR
CRACKSMAN. By E. W. .Hor
nung. Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 An audaciously entertaining volume.' —
¦ Spectator.
1 Fascinating and entertaining in a supreme
degree.' — Daily Mail.
Jane Barlow. A CREEL OF IRISH
STORIES. By Jane Barlow,
Author of 'Irish Idylls.' Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
4 Vivid and singularly real.' — Scotsman.
Jane Barlow. ¦ FROM THE EAST
UNTO THE WEST. By Jane
Barlow. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Mrs.Caffyn. ANNEMAULEVERER.
By Mrs. CAFFYN (Iota)r Author of
' The Yellow Aster.' Second Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.

3o

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

Benjamin Swift. SIREN CITY. By
Benjamin Swift, Author of ' Nancy
Noon.' Crown Zvo. 6s.
* tS Siren City " is certainly his best book,
and it is the work of a strong man. It
has sobriety, not only of manner, but of
spiri t. ' — A cademy.
J. H. Findlater, THE GREEN
GRAVES OF BALGOWRIE. By
Jane H. Findlater. Fourth
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
'A powerful and vivid story.' — Standard.
1 A beautiful story, sad and strange as truth
itself.' — Vanity Fair.
'A very charming and pathetic tale.' — Pall
Mall Gazette.
1 A singularly original, clever, and beautiful
story. %i— Guardian.
' Reveals to us a new writer of undoubted
faculty and reserve force.' — Spectator.
1 An exquisite idyll, delicate, affecting, and
beautiful.' — Black and White.
J. H. Findlater. A DAUGHTER
OF STRIFE. By Jane Helen
Findlater. Crown Zvo. 6s.
J. H. Findlater. RACHEL. By
Jane H. Findlater. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' A not unworthy successor to " The Green
Graves of Balgowrie." ' — Critic.
Mary Findlater. OVER TH E
HILLS. By Mary Findlater.
Second Edition. Cr. 8yo. 6s.
* A strong and wise book of deep insight and
unflinching truth.' — Birmingham Post.
Mary Findlater. BETTY MUS-
GRAVE. By Mary Findlater.
Second Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Handled with dignity and delicacy. . . .
A most touching story.' — Spectator.
Alfred Ollivant. OWD BOB, THE
GREY DOG OF KENMUIR. By
Alfred Ollivant. Second Edition.
Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' Weird, thrilling, strikingly graphic. ' —
Punch.
f We admire this book. . . . It is one to read
with admiration and to praise with en
thusiasm.' — Bookman.
' It is a fine, open-air, blood-stirring book,
to be enjoyed by every man and woman
to whom a dog is dear.' — Literature.
B. M. Croker. PEGGY OF THE
BARTONS. By B. M. Croker,

Author of 'Diana Barrington.'
Fourth Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
Mrs. Croker excels in the admirably simple,
easy, and direct flow of her narrative, the
briskness of her dialogue, and the geni
ality of her portraiture.' — Spectator.
Mary L. Pendered. AN ENGLISH
MAN. By Mary L. Pendered.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Her book is most healthy in tone, and
leaves a pleasant taste in the mouth.' —
Pall Mall Gazette.
1 A very noble book. It is filled with wisdom
and sympathy.' — Literary World.
'At once sound and diverting.' — Academy.
Violet Hunt. THE HUMAN IN
TEREST. By Violet Hunt,
Author of CA Hard Woman,' etc.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
'Clever observation and unfailing wit.' — -
Academy.
' The insight is keen, the irony is deli
cate.' — World.
A. J. Dawson. DANIEL WHYTE.
By A. J. Dawson, Author of
' Bismillah.' Crown Zvo. 6s.
(A strong and interesting story.' — Man-
Chester Guardian.
' Alive with incident.' — Glasgow Herald.
H. G. Wells. THE STOLEN BA
CILLUS, and other Stories. By
H. G. Wells. Second Edition.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
' They are the impressions of a very striking
imagination, which, it would seem, has
a great deal within its reach.' — Saturday
Review.
H. G. Wells. THE PLATTNER
STORY and Others. By H. G.
Wells. Second Edition. Cr. Zvo.
6s .^
' Weird and mysterious, they seem to hold
the reader as by a magic spell.' — Scots
man.
Sara Jeannette Duncan. A VOYAGE
OF CONSOLATION. By Sara
Jeannette Duncan, Author of ' An
American Girl in London.' Illus
trated. Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
'A most delightfully bright book.' — Daily
Telegraph.
The dialogue is full of wit.' — Globe.
'Laughter lurks in every page.' — Daily
News.
Sara Jeannette Duncan. THE PATH
OF A STAR. By Sara Jeannette
Duncan, Author of 'A Voyage of

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

3i

Consolation.' Illustrated. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Richness and fullness of local colouring,
brilliancy of style, smiting phrases, and
the display of very pretty humour are
graces which are here in profusion. The
interest neverflags.' — Pall MallGazette.
C. F. Keary. THE JOURNALIST.
By C. F. Keary. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' It is rare indeed to find such poetical sym
pathy with Nature joined to close study
of character and singularly truthful dia
logue : but then "The Journalist" is
altogether a rare book.' — Athenceum.
E. F. Benson. DODO : A DETAIL
OF THE DAY. By E. F. Benson.
Sixteenth Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' A perpetual feast of epigram and paradox.'
— Speaker.
E. F. Benson. THE VINTAGE. By
E. F. Benson. Author of 'Dodo.'
Illustrated by G. P. Jacomb-Hood.
Third Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Full of fire, earnestness, and beauty.' —
The World.
E. F. Benson. THE CAPSINA. By
E. F. Benson, Author of 'Dodo.'
With Illustrations by G. P. Jacomb-
Hood. Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' The story moves through an atmosphere
of heroism and adventure.' — Manchester
Guardian.
W.E. Norris. MATTHEW AUSTIN.
By W. E. Norris, Author of ' Made
moiselle de Mersac,' etc. Fourth
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
'An intellectually satisfactory and morally
bracing novel.' — Daily Telegraph.
W.E. Norris. HIS GRACE. By W. E.
NORRIS. Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
W E Norris. THE DESPOTIC
LADY AND OTHERS. By W. E.
NORRIS. Crown Zvo. 6s.
W.E. Norris. CLARISSA FURIOSA.
By W. E. Norris. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
1 As a story it is admirable, as aj'eu d 'esprit
it is capital, as a lay sermon studded
with gems of wit and wisdom it is a
model.'— The World.
W.E. Norris. GILES INGILBY. By
W. E. Norris. Illustrated. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Clever, bright, and entertaining. —
Vanity Fair. ,<-.,.
' We meet real men and women. —Speaker.
' Interesting, wholesome, and charmingly
written.'— Glasgow Herald.

W. Clark Russell. MY DANISH
SWEETHEART. By W. CLARK
Russell. Illustrated. Fourth
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
Robert Barr. IN THE MIDST OF
ALARMS. By Robert Barr.
Third Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' A book which has abundantly satisfied us
byitscapital humour.' — Daily Chronicle.
' Mr. Barr has achieved a triumph.' — Pall
Mall Gazette.
Robert Barr. THE MUTABLE
MANY. By Robert Barr. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' Very much the best novel that Mr. Barr
has yet given us. There is much insight
in it, and much excellent humour.' —
Daily Chronicle.
Robert Barr. THE COUNTESS
TEKLA. By Robert Barr. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 Such a tale as Mr. Barr's would ever
receive a hearty welcome. Of these
mediaeval romances, which are now
gaining ground, "The Countess Tekla"
is the very best , we have seen. The
story is written in clear English, and a
picturesque, moving style.' — Pall Mall
Gazette.
Andrew Balfour. BY STROKE OF
SWORD. By A. Balfour. Illus
trated. Fourth Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
A banquet of goodthings.' — Academy.
1 A recital of thrilling interest, told with
unflagging vigour. ' — Globe.
An unusually excellent example of a semi*
historic romance.' — World.
Andrew Balfour. TO ARMS! By
Andrew Balfour. Illustrated.
Second Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' The marvellous perils through which Allan
passes are told in powerful and lively
fashion. ' — Pall Mall Gazette.
Andrew Balfour. VENGEANCE IS
MINE. By Andrew Balfour,
Author of ' By Stroke of Sword. '
Illustrated. Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 A vigorous piece of work, well written, and
abounding in stirring incidents.' — Glas
gow Herald.
3. Maelaren Cobban. THE KING
OF ANDAMAN: A Saviour of
Society. By J. Maclaren Cobban.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
1 An unquestionably interesting book. It
contains one character, at least, who has
in him the root of immortality.'— Pall
Mall Gazette.

32

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

J. Maelaren Cobban. THE ANGEL
OF THE COVENANT. By J.
Maclaren Cobban. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
Marshall Saunders. ROSE A CHAR-
LITTE: A Romantic Story of
Acadie. By Marshall Saunders.
Crown Zvo. 6s.
'Graceful and well written.' — Saturday
Review.
'Charmingly told. ' — Manchester Guardian.
R. N. Stephens. AN ENEMY TO
THE KING. By R. N. Stephens.
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' It is full of movement, and the movement
is always buoyant. ' — Scotsman.
'A stirring story with plenty of movement.'
— Black and White.
R. N. Stephens. A GENTLEMAN
PLAYER. By R. N. Stephens,
Author of ' An Enemy to the King. '
Crown Zvo. 6s.
' A bright and spirited romance of adven
ture, full of movement and changing
action. ' — Scotsman.
R. Hichens. BYEWAYS. By Robert
Hichens. Author of 'Flames, etc.'
Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' The work is undeniably that of a man of
striking imagination.' — Daily News.
3. S. Fletcher. THE PATHS OF
THE PRUDENT. By J. S. Flet
cher. Crown Zvo. 6s.
3. B. Burton. IN THE DAY OF
ADVERSITY. By J. Bloundelle-
Burton. Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' Unusually interesting and full of highly
dramatic situations. ' — Guardian.

3. B. Burton. DENOUNCED. By
J. Bloundelle-Burton. Second
Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' A fine, manly, spirited piece of work.' —
World.
3. B. Burton. THE CLASH OF
ARMS. By J. Bloundelle-Bur-
ton. Second Edition. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' A brave story — brave in deed, brave in
word, brave in thought.' — St. James's
Gazette.
3. B. Burton. ACROSS THE SALT
SEAS. By J. Bloundelle-Burton.
Second Edition. Crown Zvo. 6s.
'The i very essence of the true romantic
spirit.'— -Truth.
R. Murray Gilchrist. WILLOW-
BRAKE. By R. Murray Gil
christ. Crown Zvo. 6s.
' It is a singularly pleasing and eminently
wholesome volume, with a decidedly
charming note of pathos at various
points. ' — A thenaum.
W. C. Scully. THE WHITE HECA
TOMB. By W. C. Scully, Author
of ' Kafir Stories.' Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' Reveals a marvellously intimate under-
standing of the Kaffir mind.' — African
Critic.
W. C. Scully. BETWEEN SUN
AND SAND. By W. C. SCULLY,
Author of 'The White Hecatomb.'
Cr. Zvo. 6s.
' The reader passes at once into the very
atmosphere of the African desert : the
inexpressible space and stillness swallow
him up, and there is no world for him but
that immeasurable waste.' — Athenaeum.

OTHER SIX-SHILLING NOVELS
Crown Svo.

THINGS THAT HAVE HAP
PENED. By Dorothea Gerard.
SIR ROBERT'S FORTUNE. By
Mrs. Oliphant.
THE TWO MARYS. By Mrs.
Oliphant.
THE LADY'S WALK. By Mrs.
Oliphant.
LONE PINE: A ROMANCE OF
MEXICAN LIFE. By R. B.
Townshend.
WILT THOU HAVE THIS
WOMAN ? By J. Maclaren
Cobban.

A PASSIONATE PILGRIM. By
Percy White.
SECRETARY TO BAYNE, M.P.
By W. Pett Ridge.
ADRIAN ROME. By E. DAWSON
and A. Moore.
THE BUILDERS. By J. S.
Fletcher.
GALLIA. By Menie Muriel
Dowie.
THE CROOK OF THE BOUGH.
By Menie Muriel Dowie.
A BUSINESS IN GREAT WATERS.
By Julian Corbett. ..

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

33

MISS ERIN. By M. E. Francis.
ANANIAS. By the Hon. Mrs. Alan
Brodrick.
CORRAGEEN IN '98. By Mrs.
Orpen.
THE PLUNDER PIT. By J. Keigh-
LEY SNOWDEN.
CROSS TRAILS. By Victor Waite.
SUCCESSORS TO THE TITLE.
By Mrs. Walford.
KIRKHAM'S FIND. By Mary
Gaunt.
DEADMAN'S. By Mary Gaunt.
CAPTAIN JACOBUS : A ROMANCE
OF THE ROAD. By L. Cope Corn-
ford.
SONS OF ADVERSITY. By L. Cope
CORNFORD.
THE KING OF ALBERIA. By
Laura Daintrey.
THE DAUGHTER OF ALOUETTE.
By Mary A. Owen.
CHILDREN OF THIS WORLD.
By Ellen F. Pinsent.
AN ELECTRIC SPARK. By G.
Manville Fenn.
UNDER SHADOW OF THE
MISSION. By L. S. McChesney.
THE SPECULATORS. By J. F.
Brewer.
THE SPIRIT OF STORM. By
Ronald Ross.
THE QUEENSBERRY CUP. By
Clive P. Wolley.

A HOME IN INVERESK. By T.
L. Paton.
MISS ARMSTRONG'S AND
OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES. By
John Davidson.
DR. CONGALTON'S LEGACY. By
Henry Johnston.
TIME AND THE WOMAN. By
Richard Pryce.
THIS MAN'S DOMINION. By the
Author of ' A High Little World.'
DIOGENES OF LONDON. By H.
B. Marriott Watson.
THE STONE DRAGON. By
Murray Gilchrist.
A VICAR'S WIFE. By EVELYN
Dickinson.
ELSA. By E. M 'Queen Gray.
THE SINGER OF MARLY. By I.
Hooper.
THE FALL OF THE SPARROW.
By M. C. Balfour.
A SERIOUS COMEDY. By Herbert
Morrah.
THE FAITHFUL CITY. By
Herbert Morrah.
IN THE GREAT DEEP. By J. A.
Barry.
BIJLI, THE DANCER. By James
Blythe Patton.
JOSIAH'S WIFE. By NORMA
LORIMER.
THE PHILANTHROPIST. By
Lucy Maynard.
VAUSSORE. By Francis Brune.

THREE-AND-SIXPENNY NOVELS
Crown 8vo.

DERRICK VAUGHAN, NOVEL
IST. 4znd thousand. By Edna
Lyall.
THE KLOOF BRIDE. By Ernest
Glanville.
A VENDETTA OF THE DESERT.
By W. C. Scully.
SUBJECT TO VANITY. By Mar
garet Benson.
THE SIGN OF THE SPIDER. By
Bertram Mitford.

THE MOVING FINGER. By MARY
Gaunt.
JACO TRELOAR. By J. H. Pearce.
THE DANCE OF THE HOURS.
By 'Vera.'
A WOMAN OF FORTY. By Esme
Stuart.
A CUMBERER OF THE GROUND.
By Constance Smith.
THE SIN OF ANGELS. By Evelyn
Dickinson.

34

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

AUT DIABOLUS AUT NIHIL.
By X. L.
THE COMING OF CUCULAIN.
By Standish O'Grady.
THE GODS GIVE MY DONKEY
WINGS. By Angus Evan Abbott.
THE STAR GAZERS. By G. Man-
VILLE FENN.
THE POISON OF ASPS. By R.
Orton Prowse.
THE QUIET MRS. FLEMING. By
R Pry'c'e
DISENCHANTMENT. By F.MABEL
Robinson.
THE SQUIRE OF WANDALES.
By A. Shield.
A REVEREND' GENTLEMAN. By
J. M. Cobban.

A DEPLORABLE AFFAIR. By
W. E. Norris.
A CAVALIER'S LADYE. By Mrs.
Dicker.
THE PRODIGALS. By Mrs.
Oliphant.
THE SUPPLANTER. By P. Neu
mann.
A MAN WITH BLACK EYE
LASHES. By H. A. Kennedy.
A HANDFUL OF EXOTICS. By
S. Gordon.
AN ODD EXPERIMENT. By
Hannah Lynch.
TALES OF NORTHUMBRIA. By
Howard Pease.

HALF-CROWN NOVELS
Crown 8vo.

HOVENDEN, V.C. By F. Mabel
Robinson.
THE PLAN OF CAMPAIGN. By
F. Mabel Robinson.
MR. BUTLER'S WARD. By F.
Mabel Robinson.
ELI'S CHILDREN. By G. MAN-
VILLE FENN.
A DOUBLE KNOT. By G. Man-
VILLE FENN.
DISARMED. By M. Betham
Edwards.
A MARRIAGE AT SEA. By W.
Clark Russell.

By

E.

IN TENT AND BUNGALOW.
the Author of ' Indian Idylls. '
MY STEWARDSHIP. By
M'Queen Gray.
JACK'S FATHER. By W. E.
Norris.
A LOST ILLUSION. By Leslie
Keith.

THE TRUE HISTORY OF JOSHUA
DAVIDSON, Christian and Com
munist. By E. Lynn Lynton.
Eleventh Edition. Post Zvo. is.

XTbe Novelist
Messrs. Methuen are making an interesting experiment which constitutes a
fresh departure in publishing. They are issuing under the above general title
a Monthly Series of New Fiction by popular authors at the price of Sixpence.
Each Number is as long as the average Six Shilling Novel. The first numbers
of ' The Novelist ' are as follows : —
I. DEAD MEN TELL NO TALES.
E. W. HORNUNG. [Ready.
II. JENNIE BAXTER, JOURNA
LIST. Robert Barr. [Ready.
III. THE ' INCA'S ' TREASURE.
Ernest Glanville. „, [Ready.

IV. A SON OF THE STATE. W.
Pett Ridge. [Ready.
V. FURZE BLOOM. S. Baring
Gould. [Ready.
VI. BUNTER'S CRUISE. C.
Gleig. [Ready.
VII. THE GAY DECEIVERS.
Arthur Moore. [Ready.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

35

Books for Boys and Girls
A Series of Books by well-known Authors, well illustrated.
THREE-ANO-SIXPENCE EACH

THE ICELANDER'S SWORD. By
S. Baring Gould.
TWO LITTLE CHILDREN AND
CHING. By Edith E. Cuthell.
TODDLEBEN'S HERO. By M. M.
Blake.
ONLY A GUARD -ROOM DOG.
By Edith E. Cuthell.
THE DOCTOR OF THE JULIET.
By Harry Collingwood.

MASTER ROCKAFELLAR'S VOY
AGE. By W. Clark Russell.
SYD BELTON : Or, The Boy who
would not go to Sea. By G. Man-
ville Fenn.
THE WALLYPUG IN LONDON.
By G. E. Farrow.
ADVENTURES IN WALLYPUG
LAND. By G. E. Farrow. $s.

The Peacock Library
A Series of Books for Girls by well-known Authors, handsomely bound,
and well illustrated.
THREE-AND-SIXPENCE EACH

A PINCH OF EXPERIENCE. By
L. B. Walford.
THE RED GRANGE. By Mrs.
Molesworth.
THE SECRET OF MADAME DE
MONLUC. By the Author of
'Mdle. Mori.'
OUT OF THE FASHION. By L.
T. Meade.

DUMPS. By Mrs. Parr.
A GIRL OF THE PEOPLE. By
L. T. Meade.
HEPSY GIPSY. By L. T. Meade.
zs. 6d.
THE HONOURABLE MISS. By
L. T. Meade.
MY LAND OF BEULAH. By Mrs.
Leith Adams.

University Extension Series
A series of books on historical, literary, and scientific subjects, suitable for
extension students and home-reading circles. Each volume is complete in
itself, and the subjects are treated by competent writers in a broad and
philosophic spirit. Edited by J. E. SYMES, M.A.,
Principal of University College, Nottingham.
Crown 8vo. Price {with some exceptions) 2s. 6d.
The following volumes are ready : —
M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxon.
Third Edition.
PROBLEMS OF POVERTY : An
Inquiry into the Industrial Condi
tions of the Poor. By J. A. Hobson,
M.A. Fourth Edition.
VICTORIAN POETS. By A. SHARP.

THE INDUSTRIAL HISTORY OF
ENGLAND. By H. de B. Gibbins,
Litt.D., M.A., late Scholar of Wad-
ham College, Oxon., Cobden Prize
man. Sixth Edition, Revised. With
Maps and Plans. 3s.
A HISTORY OF ENGLISH POLITI
CAL ECONOMY. By L. L. Price,

36

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

THE FRENCH REVOLUTION. By
J. E. Symes, M.A.
PSYCHOLOGY. By F. S. Granger,
M(A. Second Edition.
THE EVOLUTION OF PLANT
LIFE : Lower Forms. By G.
Massee. With Illustrations.
AI R AND WATER. By V. B. Lewes,
M.A. Illustrated.
THE CHEMISTRY OF LIFE AND
HEALTH. By C. W. Kimmins,
M.A. Illustrated.
THE MECHANICS OF DAILY
LIFE. By V. P. Sells, M.A. Illus
trated.
ENGLISH SOCIAL REFORMERS.
By H. DE B. Gibbins, Litt.D., M.A.
ENGLISH TRADE AND FINANCE
IN THE SEVENTEENTH CEN
TURY. By W. A. S. Hewins, B.A.
THE CHEMISTRY OF FIRE. The
Elementary Principles of Chemistry.
By M. M. Pattison Muir, M.A.
Illustrated.
A TEXT-BOOK OF AGRICUL
TURAL BOTANY. By M. C.
Potter, M.A., F.L.S. Illustrated.
3S. 6d.

THE VAULT OF HEAVEN. A
Popular Introduction to Astronomy.
By R. A. Gregory. With numerous
Illustrations.
METEOROLOGY. The Elements of
Weather and Climate. By H. N.
Dickson, F.R.S..E., F.R. Met. Soc.
Illustrated.
A MANUAL OF ELECTRICAL
SCIENCE. By George J. Burch,
M.A. With numerous Illustrations.
3s-
THE EARTH. An Introduction to
Physiography. By Evan Small,
M.A. Illustrated.
INSECT LIFE. By F. W. Theo
bald, M.A. Illustrated.
ENGLISH POETRY FROM BLAKE
TO BROWNING. By W. M.
Dixon, M.A.
ENGLISH LOCAL GOVERN
MENT. By E. Jenks, M.A., Pro
fessor of Law at University College,
Liverpool.
THE GREEK VIEW OF LIFE. By
G. L. Dickinson, Fellow of King's
College, Cambridge. Second Edition.

Social Questions of To-day
Edited by H. de B. GIBBINS, Litt.D., M.A.
Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
A series of volumes upon those topics of social, economic, and industrial
interest that are at the present moment foremost in the public mind.
Each volume of the series is written by an author who is an acknowledged
authority upon the subject with which he deals.
The following Volumes of the Series are ready .--

TRADE UNIONISM— NEW AND
OLD. By G. Howell. Second
Edition.
THE CO - OPERATIVE MOVE
MENT TO-DAY. By G. J. Holy-
OAKE. Second Edition.
MUTUAL THRIFT. By Rev. J.
Frome Wilkinson, M.A.
PROBLEMS OF POVERTY. By J.
A. HOBSON, M.A. Fourth Edition.
THE COMMERCE OF NATIONS.
By C. F. Bastable, M.A., Professor
of Economics at Trinity College,
Dublin. Second Edition.

THE ALIEN INVASION. By W.
H. Wilkins, B.A.
THE RURAL EXODUS. By P.
Anderson Graham.
LAND NATIONALIZATION. By
Harold Cox, B.A.
A SHORTER WORKING DAY.
By H. DE B. Gibbins, D.Litt., M.A.,
and R. A. Hadfield, of the Hecla
Works, Sheffield.
BACK TO THE LAND : An Inquiry
into the Curefor Rural Depopulation.
By H. E. Moore.

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

37

TRUSTS, POOLS AND CORNERS.
By J. Stephen Jeans.
THE FACTORY SYSTEM. By R.
W. Cooke-Taylor.
THE STATE AND ITS CHIL
DREN. By Gertrude Tuckwell.
WOMEN'S WORK. By Lady Dilke,
Miss Bulley, and Miss Whitley.
MUNICIPALITIES AT WORK.
The Municipal Policy of Six Great
Towns, audits Infiuencecn their Social
Welfare. By Frederick Dolman.
SOCIALISM AND MODERN
THOUGHT. By M. Kaufmann.
THE HOUSING OF THE WORK
ING CLASSES. By E. Bowmaker.
MODERN CIVILIZATION IN

SOME OF ITS ECONOMIC
ASPECTS. By W. Cunningham,
D.D., Fellow of Trinity College,
Cambridge.
THE PROBLEM OF THE UN
EMPLOYED. By J. A. Hobson,
B.A.
LIFE IN WEST LONDON. By
Arthur Sherwell, M.A. Second
Edition.
RAILWAY NATIONALIZATION.
By Clement Edwards.
WORKHOUSES AND PAUPER
ISM. By Louisa Twining.
UNIVERSITY AND SOCIAL
SETTLEMENTS. By W. Reason,
M.A.

Classical Translations
Edited by H. F. FOX, M. A., Fellow and Tutor of Brasenose College, Oxford

AESCHYLUS — Agamemnon, Chbe-
phoroe, Eumenides. Translated by
Lewis Campbell, LL.D., late Pro
fessor of Greek at St. Andrews. $s.
CICERO— De Oratore I. Translated
by E. N. P. MOOR, M.A. 3S. 6d.
CICERO— Select Orations (Pro Milone,
Pro Murena, Philippic II., In Catili-
nam). Translated by H. E. D.
Blakiston, M.A., Fellow and Tutor
of Trinity College, Oxford. 5s.
CICERO— De Natura Deorum. Trans
lated by F. Brooks, M.A., late
Scholar of Balliol College, Oxford.
3$. 6d.
CICERO DE OFFICIIS. Translated
byG. B. Gardiner, M.A. Crown
zs. 6d.

Zvo.
Educational Books
CLASSICAL

HORACE: THE ODES AND
EPODES. Translated by A.
Godley, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen
College, Oxford, zs.
LUCIAN — Six Dialogues (Nigrinus,
Icaro - Menippus, The Cock, The
Ship, The Parasite The Lover of
Falsehood). Translated by S. T.
Irwin, M.A., Assistant Master at
Clifton; late Scholar of Exeter
College, Oxford. 3s. 6d.
SOPHOCLES — Electra and Ajax.
Translated by E. D. A. Morshead,
M.A., Assistant Master at Win
chester, zs. 6d.
TACITUS— Agricola and Germania.
Translated by R. B. Townshend,
late Scholar of Trinity College, Cam
bridge, zs. 6d.

PLAUTI BACCHIDES. Edited with
Introduction, Commentary, and
Critical Notes by J. M'Cosh, M.A.
Fcap. t,lo. izs. 6d.
A GREEK ANTHOLOGY. Selected
byE C Marchant, M.A., Fellow
of Peterhouse, Cambridge and Assis
tant Master at St. Pauls School.
Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.

PASSAGES FOR UNSEEN TRANS
LATION. By E. C. Marchant,
M.A., Fellow of Peterhouse, Cam
bridge ; and A. M. Cook, M.A., late
Scholar of Wadham College, Oxford ;
Assistant Masters at St. Paul's School.
Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' We know no book of this class better fitted
for use in the higher forms of schools.' —
Guardian.

38

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

TACITI AGRICOLA. With Intro-
' duction, Notes, Map, etc. By R. F.
Davis, M.A., Assistant Master at
Weymouth College. Crown Zvo. zs.
TACITI GERMANIA. By the same
Editor. Crown Zvo. zs.
HERODOTUS : EASY SELEC
TIONS. With Vocabulary. ByA.C.
LlDDELL, M.A. Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d.
SELECTIONS FROM THE ODYS
SEY. ByE. D. Stone, M. A., late
Assistant Master at Eton. Fcap. Zvo.
is. 6d.
PLAUTUS: THE CAPTIVI.
Adapted for Lower Forms by J. H.
Freese, M.A., late Fellow of St.
John's, Cambridge, is. 6d.
DEMOSTHENES AGAINST
CONON AND CALLICLES.
Edited with Notes and Vocabulary,

by F. Darwin Swift, M.A. Fcap.
Zvo. zs.
EXERCISES IN LATIN ACCI
DENCE. By S. E. Winbolt,
Assistant Master in Christ's Hospital.
Crown Zvo. is. 6d.
An elementary book adapted for Lower
Forms to accompany the shorter Latin
primer.
NOTES ON GREEK AND LATIN
SYNTAX. ByG. Buckland Green,
M. A., Assistant Master at Edinburgh
Academy, late Fellow of St. John's
College, Oxon. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
Notes and explanations on the chief diffi
culties of Greek and Latin Syntax, with
numerous passages for exercise.
NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. A
Course for Beginners. By G. Rod-
well, B.A. With a Preface by
Walter Lock, D.D., Warden of
Keble College. Fcap. Zvo. 3s. 6d.

GERMAN

A COMPANION GERMAN GRAM
MAR. By H. de B. Gibbins, D. Litt. ,
M.A., Assistant Master at Notting
ham High School. Crown Zvo. is. 6d.

GERMAN PASSAGES FOR UN
SEEN TRANSLATION. By E.
M'QUEETJ GRAY. Crown Zvo.
zs. 6d.

SCIENCE

DAIRY BACTERIOLOGY. A Short
Manual for the Use of Students. By
Dr. Ed. von Freudenreich, Trans
lated by J. R. Ainsworth Davis,
M.A. Second Edition, Revised.
Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.
OUTLINES OF BIOLOGY. By P.
Chalmers Mitchell, M.A. Illus
trated. Cr. Zvo. 6s.
A text-book designed to cover the new
Schedule issued by the Royal College
of Physicians and Surgeons.
A MONOGRAPH OF THE MYXO-
GASTRES. By George Massee.
With 12 Coloured Plates. Royal Zvo.
iZs. ?iet.
' A work much in advance of any book in
the language treating of this group of
organisms. Indispensable to every
student of the Myxogastres. ' — Nature.
ORNAMENTAL DESIGN FOR
WOVEN FABRICS. By C.
Stephenson, of The Technical
College, Bradford, and F. Suddards,
of The Yorkshire College, Leeds.
With 65 full-page plates. Demy Zvo.
•js. 6d.

1 The book is very ably done, displaying an
intimate knowledge of principles, good
taste, and the faculty of clear exposi
tion.' — Yorkshire Post.
GENERAL ELEMENTARY
SCIENCE. By J. T. Dunn, D.Sc,
and V. A. Mundella. With many
Illustrations. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
[Methuen's Science Primers.
ZEejtboofts of GecbnoIogB
Edited by Professors GARNETT
and WERTHEIMER.
HOW TO MAKE A DRESS. By J.
A. E. Wood. Illustrated. Cr. Zvo.
is. 6d.
' Though primarily intended for students,
Miss Wood's dainty little manual may he
consulted with advantage by any girls
who want to make their own frocks. The
directions are simple and clear, and the
diagrams very helpful.'— Literature.
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY. By
F. C. Webber. With many Illustra
tions. Cr. Zvo. 3s. 6d.
' An admirable elementary text-book on the
subject.' — Builder.

Messrs. Methuen's catalogue

39

PRACTICAL MECHANICS. By
Sidney H. Wells. With 75 Illus
trations andDiagrams. Cr. Zvo. 3s.6d.
PRACTICAL PHYSICS. By H.
Stroud, D.Sc, M.A., Professor of
Physics in the Durham College of
Science, Newcastle-on-Tyne. Fully
illustrated. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.

THE WORLD OF SCIENCE. In
cluding Chemistry, Heat, Light,
Sound, Magnetism, Electricity,
Botany, Zoology, Physiology, As

tronomy, and Geology. By R.
Elliott Steel, M. A., F.C.S. 147*
Illustrations. Second Edition. Cr.
Zvo. zs. 6d.
ELEMENTARY LIGHT. By R. E.
Steel. With numerous Illustrations.
Crown Zvo. a,s. 6d.
VOLUMETRIC ANALYSIS. By J.
B. Russell, B.Sc, Science Master
at Burnley Grammar School. Cr.
Zvo. is. 6d.
' A collection of useful, well-arranged notes.'
— School Guardian.

ENGLISH

ENGLISH RECORDS. A Companion
to the History of England. By H. E.
MALDEN, M.A. Crown Zvo. 3s. 6d.
THE ENGLISH CITIZEN: HIS
RIGHTS AND DUTIES. By H. E.
Malden, M.A. is. 6d.
A DIGEST OF DEDUCTIVE
LOGIC. By Johnson Barker,
B.A. Crown Zvo. zs. 6d.

A CLASS-BOOK OF DICTATION
PASSAGES. By W. Williamson,
M.A. Second Edition, Cr. Zvo. is. 6d.
TEST CARDS IN EUCLID AND
ALGEBRA. By D. S. Calder-
wood, Headmaster of the Normal
School, Edinburgh. In three packets
of 40, with Answers, is. Or in
three Books, price zd., zd., and 3d.

METHUEN'S COMMERCIAL SERIES
Edited by H. DE B. GIBBINS, Litt.D., M.A.

BRITISH COMMERCE AND
COLONIES FROM ELIZABETH
TO VICTORIA. By H. de B.
Gibbins, Litt.D., M.A. Third
Edition, zs.
COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION
PAPERS. By H. DE B. GlBBlNS,
Litt.D., M.A. is. 6d.
THE ECONOMICS OF COM
MERCE. By H. de B. Gibbins,
Litt.D., M.A. is. 6d.
FRENCH COMMERCIAL COR
RESPONDENCE. ByS. E. Bally,
Master at the Manchester Grammar
School. Second Edition, zs.
GERMAN COMMERCIAL COR
RESPONDENCE. ByS. E. Bally.
zs. 6d.
A FRENCH COMMERCIAL
WORKS BY A.M.
INITIA LATINA: Easy Lessons on
Elementary Accidence. Third
Edition. Fcap. Zvo. is.
FIRST LATIN LESSONS. Fifth
Edition. Crown Zvo. zs.
FIRST LATIN READER. With
Notes adapted to the Shorter Latin
Primer and Vocabulary. Fourth
Edition revised. iZmo. is. 6d.

READER. By S. E. Bally. Second
Edition, zs.
COMMERCIAL GEOGRAPHY, with
special reference to the British Em
pire. ByL. W. Lyde, M.A. Second
Edition, zs.
A PRIMER OF BUSINESS. By S.
JACKSON, M.A. Second Ed. is. 6d.
COMMERCIAL ARITHMETIC. By
F. G. Taylor, M.A. Second Edition.
is. 6d.
PRECIS WRITING AND OFFICE
CORRESPONDENCE. By E. E.
Whitfield, M.A. zs.
A GUIDE TO PROFESSIONS AND
BUSINESS. By H. Jones, is. 6d.
THE PRINCIPLES OF BOOK
KEEPING BY DOUBLE ENTRY.
ByJ.E.B.M 'Allen, M.A. Cr.Zvo. zs.
M. ST E DM AN, M.A.
EASY SELECTIONS FROM
CAESAR. Part 1. The Helvetian
War. Second Edition. iZmo. is.
EASY SELECTIONS FROM LIVY.
Part 1. The Kings of Rome. iZmo.
is. 6d.
EASY LATIN PASSAGES FOR
UNSEEN TRANSLATION. Sixth
Edition. Fcap. Zvo, is. 6d.

40

Messrs. Methuen's Catalogue

EXEMPLA LATINA. First Lessons
' in Latin Accidence. With Vocabulary.
Crown Zvo. is.
EASY LATIN EXERCISES ON THE
SYNTAX OF THE SHORTER
AND REVISED LATIN PRIMER.
With Vocabulary. Seventh and
cheaper Edition, re-written. Crown
Zvo. is. 6d. Issued with the consent
of Dr. Kennedy.
THE LATIN COMPOUND SEN
TENCE: Rules and Exercises.
Cr.Zvo. is.6d. With Vocabulary, zs.
NOTANDA QUAEDAM : Miscellan
eous Latin Exercises on Common
Rules and Idioms. Third Edition.
Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d. With Vocabulary.
LATIN VOCABULARIES FOR RE
PETITION : Arranged according to
Subjects. Eighth Edition. Fcap.
Zvo. is. 6d.
A VOCABULARY OF LATIN
IDIOMS. iZmo. Second Edition, is.
STEPS TO GREEK. iZmo. is.
A SHORTER GREEK PRIMER.
Crown Zvo. is. 6d.

EASY GREEK PASSAGES FOR
UNSEEN TRANSLATION. Third
Edition Revised. Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d.
GREEK VOCABULARIES FOR
REPETITION. Arranged accord
ing to Subjects. Second Edition.
Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d.
GREEK TESTAMENT SELEC
TIONS. For the use of Schools.
Third Edition. With Introduction,
Notes, and Vocabulary. Fcap. Zvo.
zs. 6d.
STEPS TO FRENCH. Fourth Edi
tion. iZmo. Zd.
FIRST FRENCH LESSONS. Fourth
Edition Revised. Crown Zvo. is.
EASY FRENCH PASSAGES FOR
UNSEEN TRANSLATION. Third
Edition revised. Fcap. Zvo. is. 6d.
EASY FRENCH EXERCISES ON
ELEMENTARY SYNTAX. With
Vocabulary. Second Edition. Crown
Zvo. zs. 6d. Key 3.5. net.
FRENCH VOCABULARIES FOR
REPETITION : Arranged according
to Subjects. Eighth Edition. Fcap.
Zvo. is.

SCHOOL EXAMINATION SERIES
Edited by A. M. M. STEDMAN, M.A. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.

FRENCH EXAMINATION
PAPERS IN MISCELLANEOUS
GRAMMAR AND IDIOMS. By
A. M. M. STEDMAN, M.A. Tenth
Edition. A Key, issued to Tutors and
Private Students only, to be had
on application to the Publishers.
Fourth Edition. Crown Zvo.
6s. net.
LATIN EXAMINATION PAPERS
IN MISCELLANEOUS GRAM
MAR AND IDIOMS. By A. M. M.
STEDMAN, M.A. Ninth Edition.
Key (Fourth Edition) issued as
above. 6s. net.
GREEK EXAMINATION PAPERS
IN MISCELLANEOUS GRAM
MAR AND IDIOMS. By A. M. M.
Stedman, M.A. Sixth Edition.
Key (Second Edition) issued as
above. 6s. net.
GERMAN EXAMINATION.
PAPERS IN MISCELLANEOUS

GRAMMAR AND IDIOMS. By
R. J. Morich, Manchester. Fifth
Edition. Key {Second Edition) issued as
above. 6s. net.
HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY EX
AMINATION PAPERS. By C. H.
Spence, M.A., Clifton College.
Second Edition.
SCIENCE EXAMINATION
PAPERS. By R. E. STEEL, M.A.,
F.C.S. In two vols.
Part I. Chemistry ; Part 11. Physics.
GENERAL KNOWLEDGE EX
AMINATION PAPERS. By A.
M. M. Stedman, M.A. Third
Edition. Key (Second Edition) issued as
above. 7s. net.
EXAMINATION PAPERS IN
ENGLISH HISTORY. By J Tait
Wardlaw, B.A., King's College,
Cambridge. Crown Zvo. zs. 6d